JP7211469B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
means for shifting the game state to the special state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a situation where the right to shift the game state to the special state advantageous to the player has been acquired;
a setting means having a plurality of stages of set values capable of causing a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages;
A gaming machine comprising
A normal state and a specific state more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set,
means capable of terminating the specific state when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied;
a means capable of grasping the remaining number of the specific state;
means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied;
a first means capable of notifying the number of increases in the remaining number to be increased by the increasing process by means of a predetermined notifying means when the increasing process is performed ;
a second means capable of executing the increase number notification by a predetermined notification means in a game subsequent to the game in which the increase processing was performed ;
with
It is characterized in that, in the special state, the increase number notification of the second means is executed according to a predetermined mode without being affected by the setting value set by the setting means .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first special winning combination process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a third special combination process; 4 is a flow chart showing processing for a specialized zone; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining main results of a lottery related to an instruction function and setting differences between winning probabilities; It is a figure which shows an example of the mode lottery table for display mode transition. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a portent game number table; It is a figure which shows an example of a lottery table of the number of additional games. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode change alerting|reporting. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a betting effect setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an alerting|reporting timing and an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. 10 is a flowchart showing a bonus effect setting process; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for notification of a transition opportunity. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of continuous production. It is a flow chart which shows processing for addition information. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of remaining games in the actual advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display; It is a figure which shows an example of a back-up lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition alerting|reporting timing table. It is a flow chart which shows a process for a post-boarding alerting|reporting. It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between rotation production|presentation and stop operation. 14 is a flow chart showing a fourth special combination process; It is a flow chart which shows the processing for the first pseudo effect. It is a flow chart which shows processing for pseudo-additional information. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a loss counter table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-freeze lottery table. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a BB instruction lottery process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for transitioning to the middle BB mode; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a mid-BB mode transition table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a mid-BB addition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for adding to the middle of the BB; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between each rotation production|presentation and additional alerting|reporting. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for the second pseudo effect. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for pseudo-addition during BB; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-addition table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the difference between an add-on and a pseudo add-on; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the difference between a restricted bonus and a non-restricted bonus; In Modified Example 1, (a) is a flowchart showing part of the process for pseudo-addition during BB, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-addition table, and (c) is an example of a lottery table for addition during BB. It is a figure which shows. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of various pseudo-addition tables in modified example 2; In Modified Example 3, (a) and (b) are diagrams showing examples of various pseudo-additional tables, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a BB medium-additional lottery table. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-addition table in modification 4; 10 is a flowchart showing winning result handling processing for a BB winning game by the main controller in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for the second pseudo effect. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for pseudo-addition during BB; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for freezing non-occurrence. (a) is a flowchart showing BB end notification processing, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the presence or absence of the addition in BB. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining whether or not there is an addition during BB in Modification 1; In the modified example 2, (a) is a flow chart showing BB end notification processing by the main controller, and (b) is a flow chart showing attack mode end processing by the main control device. In the modification 3, (a) is a flowchart showing BB winning processing by the main control device, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of display effect by the auxiliary display section. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing pseudo-addition processing during BB according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a pseudo-addition table. It is a flow chart which shows processing for addition information. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a special effect table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining the difference between an additional charge and an advance charge; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit in Modification 1, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit in Modification 2. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing a part of processing for addition notification in Modification 3. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing a post-loading notification process in Modification 4. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit;

<First Embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and a “first replay” symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). 3rd), “second replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , “Cherry” symbol (eg, 4th on left reel 32L), “Black BAR” symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), “White BAR” symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), “LUCKY There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L) and "young man" symbols (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by the number of bets of medals and a line that is not activated are set. When a prize is established, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lower lines L3 and lower right line L4 There is a case where the combined line is the valid line and a case where only the bend line L6 is the valid line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are betted and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and when two medals are betted and the game is started, the lower line is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as valid lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward right line L5 are never regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game that starts with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game that starts with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game that starts with 1 medal is bet. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. When it stops, it becomes the 1st minor winning combination. When the first minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd minor winning prize to the 26th minor winning prize have different winning symbol combinations. "White BAR" pattern, "Red 7" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, "White Bell" pattern or "LUCKY" pattern, right reel 32R "White BAR" pattern, "Youth" pattern, "White Bell" pattern, A "red 7" symbol or a "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. If you do, you will win the 8th minor role. As shown in FIG. 6, the middle reel 32M has a "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and a "red bell" symbol at a position adjacent to the upstream side (No. 12), and the right reel 32R has: A "red bell" design is arranged at a position (20th) separated by one design upstream from the "white BAR" design (18th). Therefore, when the eighth minor win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th minor combination is a combination in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, "Cherry" on the left reel 32L. The 27th minor winning prize is established when the symbol stops at the upper stage or the lower stage. In this case, the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L is up or stopped. By stopping, the 27th minor winning combination is established. When the 27th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop at the upper or lower stage, and the "cherry" symbols stop together on the lower right line L4. More specifically, "cherry" symbols or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols, "white bell" symbols or "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols on the right reel 32R, When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th minor winning combination is won. When the 28th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is established, the 28th minor winning combination may be established instead of the 27th minor winning combination depending on the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode of winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode of winning the 28th minor role, the 27th minor role winning and the 28th minor role winning are clearly distinguished and determined. is done.

The 29th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is the effective line, the 29th minor winning combination is established by stopping all the "watermelon" symbols downward-sloping. When the 29th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the left reel 32L "watermelon" symbol, the middle reel 32M "watermelon" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 30th small Awarded for the role. When the 30th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol and stop on the active line, the 31st minor winning combination is won. When the 31st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th minor wins, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 36th minor winning prize is obtained when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. , the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 36th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

A "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "black BAR" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, or a "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and the "young man" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small winning combination is won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and a "second replay" symbol are arranged at a downstream adjacent position (No. 6). "Bell" symbols (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th) and "1st replay" symbols are arranged at adjacent downstream positions (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th). On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and adjacent positions (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) on the upstream side are "1st A "replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern is arranged, and a "first replay" pattern is arranged at a position (11th) adjacent to the "white bell" pattern (10th) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 37th minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4, mainly the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are tense on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is displayed. "Bell" symbols and "Replay" symbols do not stop, which is a so-called double-tenpai-out stop result. When the 37th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"White BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the active line, the 38th small winning combination is won. In the 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper and lower stages, and the 38th minor winning combination is established, the left A "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 38th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 39th minor role. The 39th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 39th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 40th minor role. The 40th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 40th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small Awarded for the role. When the 41st minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are granted include first to tenth replaying winnings. Further, when the second re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game. When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state.

State transition winnings in which only game state transition is performed include 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning and CB winning.

When the "red 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the first BB wins, and when the "white BAR" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line. , it will be the 2nd BB prize. When these BB prizes are established, the game state shifts to the BB state. Also, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" pattern, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" pattern, the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern, a "first replay" pattern, and a "black BAR". When the symbols and stop on the active line, the CB prize is won. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stop outcome in which the game state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" pattern or a "white bell" pattern, and the middle reel 32M has a "white BAR" pattern, a "LUCKY" pattern, a "red 7" pattern, a "white bell" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the active line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" pattern, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" pattern, and the right reel 32R has a "white BAR" pattern, a "young man" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. , “red 7” symbols, and “second replay” symbols stop on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transitional numbers.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 , and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at once. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 is provided which is operated when the effect is generated. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided to the left of the effect switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the effect switch 66. there is

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 having an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination, is provided. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected. It's becoming

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are provided via an input/output port 104. connected.

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the input side of which is connected to the main control device 101, and the output side of which the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66). The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, processing is performed to automatically insert 3 virtual medals, and when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game, 1 coin is executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the CB state, and game states other than the CB state (specifically, normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB state), "1" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers. That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and in other than the CB state, the bet number is "1" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the CB state, if no medals have been betted, or if the number of bets is "2" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such shift notification processing will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S206 is performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets for which affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S207, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S208. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in the 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Also, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, RT state processing in step S214, and bonus state processing in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of game states, namely, a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. It is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. . For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is displayed. select. In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. Then, when the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, the set value at that time is set as the current set value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for normal game state selected in the normal game state of "setting 3". An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not any of the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with an index value IV (IV=32 to 52) including any one of the first BB, second BB, and CB. When an affirmative determination is made in step S306, a process of setting corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a is performed in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306 or after the processing of step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor combination corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a is set. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=32, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd minor winning flag and the 33rd minor winning winning flag are set in step S308. 35 Set a minor winning flag. When the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=15, a winning flag indicating that the 30th and 41st minor wins have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

It should be noted that in steps S306 to S308 in a state in which the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1BB, 2BB and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, If a winning combination other than the second BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=32, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor combination winning flag is not set. , the 33rd minor winning combination winning flag and the 35th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV=33 and the determination value DV exceeds 65535, the 28th minor winning flag and the 33rd winning flag are not set without setting the 2nd BB winning flag. A small win flag and a 35th minor win win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV should be set so as not to win the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step S309, and in the following step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV. By the way, when judging the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the lottery (the probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the low cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 218. 1. The probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=17) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV=18) is about 252. 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 20) is about 65,500. 1. The odds of winning forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 21 to 24) are about 1/43.7, middle push bell The probability of winning 1, middle-pressed bell 2, right-pressed bell 1, and right-pressed bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=25 to 28) is about 1/21.8, respectively. The probability of winning the high cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/21800, and the probability of winning the high cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is About 1/21800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV=34) is about 1/32800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV=35 The probability of winning is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/65500, the probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is It is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=40 to 43) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=44, 45) is about 1/21800, respectively. The probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 46) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 47) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB alone (probability of winning when IV=50 and 51) is about 1/32800, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=52) is about 1 in 19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is about 1/1.96.

In addition, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV=2 to 12, 29 to 31, and 53 to 56 in the normal game state lottery table. Therefore, in the normal game state, winning is not possible with these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S312, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, stop information setting processing is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (winning when IV=13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th small winning combination, the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination are displayed on each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R are set to stop symbol information. In addition, when strong cherry overlap 1 is won (winning when IV=32) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1st BB winning flag are set, the 28th minor winning combination, the 33rd minor winning combination, the 35th minor winning combination and the 1st minor winning combination are set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In subsequent step S315, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination and the 1BB winning is set, the 28th is selected rather than the 1BB winning. The order of priority is set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination are preferentially established. In addition, when special reply A duplication 1 is won and stop pattern information corresponding to the 9th replay and 1BB win is set, the 9th replay win is established with priority over the 1BB win. set the priority so that Then, for example, in a situation where the 1BB win is carried over, if the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1BB win and the 1st replay win is set, then the 1BB win is higher than the 1BB win. The order of priority is set so that 1 re-game winning is preferentially established.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

Further, when a plurality of minor winning combinations or multiple replays are won in duplicate, which symbol corresponding to the minor winning combination or replay is stopped on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, when the strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st minor wins is set, as described above, the left The target symbol of the reel 32L is commonly the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which minor win is established. On the other hand, the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both "red bell" symbols for the 30th minor winning combination, and "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols for the middle reel 32M for the 41st minor winning combination. , the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern. For example, in a 3-bet game, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the fourth "watermelon" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, the 30th Both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, can be stopped in the middle row on the active line. becomes. In this case, in the present embodiment, stop symbol information is set so that a symbol with a small number of slips is preferentially stopped. As a result, in the above case, stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor winning combination is not established, and the 30th minor winning combination becomes possible.

On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, when the stopping operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the eighth "black BAR" symbol to the twelfth "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage, the target for the 41st minor winning combination Both the 8th "black BAR" and 11th "cherry" symbols, which are symbols, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor combination, should be stopped in the middle row. becomes possible. In this case as well, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the smaller number of slips is preferentially stopped, so the eighth "black BAR" symbol or the eleventh "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, and the second symbol stops. The 30th minor winning combination is no longer established, and the 41st minor winning combination becomes possible.

The same applies to the right reel 32R. Depending on the timing at which the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed, the "red bell" symbol that is the target symbol for the 30th minor win and the "watermelon" symbol that is the target symbol for the 41st minor win. The stop pattern information is set so that the pattern with a smaller number of slips is stopped on the lower stage, which is the effective line. In the right reel 32R, when the sixth "first replay" symbol and the seventh "black BAR" symbol reach the effective position, the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed. Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped.

After executing the process of step S315, after executing the section display first process in step S316, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. The rotation effect processing will be described later in detail. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when winning is achieved when IV=24 to 31, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When winning the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the 2nd minor winning prize, the 7th minor winning prize or the 9th minor winning prize is established. Then, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the 1st small winning combination is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the 2nd small winning combination and the 7th small winning combination are set. The stop information is set so that the winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination.

The second minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh minor symbol and also function as the ninth minor symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second minor combination symbols (between the seventh minor combination symbols, between the ninth minor combination symbols) are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle row, number 7 "red bell" is displayed as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the upper row. As a result, there remains room for establishing the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination, or the ninth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4.

The second minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. The "white BAR" pattern is arranged only at the 18th position on the middle reel 32M. Also, the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. A "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol or the ninth minor winning symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the None of the ninth minor winning symbols stop on the active line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 13th "first replay" pattern to the 17th "first replay" pattern reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The symbol "white BAR" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the second minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the ninth “second replay” symbol to the thirteenth “first replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. , the seventh minor winning symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle stage. As a result, there remains room for the 7th minor winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "white bell" pattern to the 10th "young man" pattern reaches the lower row, the 9th minor winning pattern "cherry" pattern is in the middle row. to stop. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after being slid by four symbols, the second, seventh and ninth minor symbol symbols are displayed. Cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the 2nd "LUCKY" pattern or the 6th "white bell" pattern stops in the middle stage.

When the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the seventh minor combination winning can be established.

The seventh minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" pattern is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "first replay" symbol to the 10th "white bell" symbol has reached the lower stage, FIG. As shown in , the seventh minor winning symbol "white bell" is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the seventh minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "second replay" symbol No. 3 reaches the lower stage, the "watermelon" symbol No. 4 is displayed as shown in FIG. Stop downstairs. The combination of "red bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the ninth minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the ninth minor combination winning can be established.

The ninth minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. A "young man" symbol is arranged at the 15th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 11th "first replay" symbol to the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, the ninth minor winning symbol is obtained. The "young man" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second minor combination winning can be established.

The second minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. A "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower row, the second minor winning symbol " White BAR” pattern stops at the bottom. As a result, the second minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "white BAR" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the ninth minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop at the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of "white bell" pattern ("red bell" pattern), "LUCKY" pattern ("white bell" pattern), and "watermelon" pattern ("first replay" pattern) shifts as shown in FIG. It is a result.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 2nd minor winning combination and the 7th minor winning combination are established. It is one of a case where a prize is established, a case where a ninth minor winning combination is established, and a case where the transition rolls are stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the first minor combination symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

A "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, which are first minor bonus symbols, are arranged on the right reel 32R such that an interval between the first minor bonus symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation timing.

In the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first minor winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, depending on the operation timing, a small winning combination will be established or the transitional number will stop on the effective line. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation order and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, regardless of the operation order and timing. 1 small role winning is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S415. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S416, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor winning combination has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, re-game setting processing is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , the medal payout process is terminated. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the RT state processing of step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the activated line. When the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. When the current game state is the normal game state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S501 that the transitional number has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether or not it is established. When the second replay winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line under a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the process proceeds to step S503. , the first RT setting flag is set, and this processing ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the "setting 3" first RT state. When compared with the lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and has the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=6 to 56 is equal to each winning probability in the normal game state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV=2 to 5 is about 1/32.8. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if it is won at IV=1, it will be a normal replay win, and if it is won at IV=2, it will be a first promotion replay 1 win, and IV If it is won at IV = 3, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 2, if it is won at IV = 4, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 3, and it will be won at IV = 5 If you do, you will win the first promotion replay 4. The probability of winning at any of IV=1-5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning the normal replay under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. In other words, when the game state shifts to the first RT state, each role type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the normal game state, and a prize-winning mode in which the privilege of replay is given. changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game winning that does not transition to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning, the third re-game winning that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when winning the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 in addition to winning the pressing order bell described above. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are turned on.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When winning the first promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, unlike when winning the push order bell, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay winning or The third replay win is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, one operation order out of six operation orders is associated with the third replay, and the other operation orders are associated with the first replay. attached.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th to 8th replays are not associated with any of the above 6 types of operation orders. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth replays, even if the first promoted replays 2 to 4 are won, no prizes are won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is divided into the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, in the first promotion replay 3, the 7th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and in the first promotion replay 4 Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replays are the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay win has been established. When the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the game state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and has the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=11 to 56 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/13.2, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/10.5, and IV = 9 , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1 in 7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. That is, in the case of shifting to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not change the game state, the second re-game winning that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game winning that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game winning Winning a prize is established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-described first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 1 Even when the 2 promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or the second replay win is established without fail. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning is established without fail. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is established without fail.

Incidentally, the number attached to the fourth replay in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth replay win is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination of loose stitches, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination of red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stage stop (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a loose eye is stopped and the fourth replay win is established, or the red 7・The red 7/black BAR middle stop symbol combination is stopped, and the 4th replay win is established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has been established. If the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning have not been established, the processing is terminated as it is. When the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. and terminate this process.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the 3RT state based on the fact that the 3RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the 3RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the 3rd RT state selected in the 3rd RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24), the lottery table for the 3rd RT state has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether a role is right or wrong using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=1-8, 13-56 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, IV=9, 10 , and the probability of winning at IV=11 and 12 is about 1/7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and a prize-winning mode in which the privilege of replay is given. changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state, The 7 re-game winning, the 8th re-game winning, and the 3 re-game winning to shift to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even when BAR replay 1 and BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set stop information as much as possible.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the seventh replay winning prize, or the third replay winning prize. is always established. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the eighth replay winning prize, and the third replay winning prize. is always established.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the BB state or the CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag is set. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. When CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 and S605, the game state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly described.

"Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols or "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The main controller 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3". is set as a valid line.

At step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 52, and "16384" is set as the point value for IV=53 to 56. is set (see FIG. 17, etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 1 (probability of winning when IV=53) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 2 (IV=54 The probability of winning at the time of ) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium role 3 (the probability of winning at IV = 55) is about 1/4.00, and the CB The probability of winning the small and medium combination 4 (probability of winning when IV=56) is about 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some kind of small winning combination will be won. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be awarded when the 1st minor winning combination, 27th minor winning combination, 31st minor winning combination, 36th minor winning combination to 38th minor winning combination are established. When the payout is performed and the 2nd minor role winning ~ 26th minor role winning, the 28th minor role winning ~ 30th minor role winning, and the 32nd minor role winning ~ 35th minor role winning are established, 14 sheets Medals are paid out. In other words, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out when the state is shifted to the CB state.

In place of or in addition to the CB as the winning hand and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that allows one game (JAC game) to be executed as the winning hand, and the winning of the single bonus (winning a prize) ) may be provided.

Returning to the description of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established.

Then, when any BB prize is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. After that, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the game state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. .

FIG. 28 is a lottery table for the BB state selected in the BB state transitioning to the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1-28 and 32-56, and "21845" is set as the point value for IV=29-31. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the first role in the BB (probability of winning when IV = 29) is about 1/1.11, and the probability of winning the second role in the BB (IV = 30) is about 1/20.0, and the probability of winning the 3rd role in BB (probability of winning when IV=31) is about 1/20.0 becomes. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 65500.

The winning probabilities of the 1st BB hand, the 2nd BB hand and the 3rd BB hand are the winning probabilities common to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB. In addition, the winning probabilities of the 1st BB hand, the 2nd BB hand, and the 3rd BB hand are common winning probabilities regardless of the timing of the transition to the BB state of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. The probability of winning the 3rd role in BB in the 1st BB based on 1 win in the special reply A and the 3rd role in BB in the 1 BB based on 1 win in the special reply AB is the same probability. That is, in any BB state, the lottery processing is performed with reference to the common BB state lottery table.

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As described above, the first minor winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the 1st role in the BB is won, any of the 1st minor role winning, 39th minor role winning, or 40th minor role winning will be awarded regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. It will definitely come true. In addition, the ninth regame winning is also a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, when the second winning combination in the BB is won, the ninth re-game win is always established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

In the third winning combination of the BB, which enables the ninth replay winning prize and the tenth replay winning prize, which replay winning prize is established depends on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. When the stop operation is performed, if any prize can be won, stop drive control is performed so that the replay with the smaller number of slides wins. More specifically, the combination of symbols for winning the ninth replay and tenth replay is common to both the "first replay" symbol and the "second replay" symbol for both the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. However, the left reel 32L is different. That is, in the left reel 32L, the target symbols for the ninth replay are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, while the target symbols for the tenth replay are the "youth" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol. .

For example, in a 3-bet game, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop at the timing when the fourth "cherry" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reach the upper row, the ninth replay is performed. Both the seventh "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol, and the eighth "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol of the tenth replay, can be stopped at the upper stage on the activated line. In this case, stop drive control is performed so as to stop the 7th "red bell" symbol with a small number of slips on the upper stage. As a result, the ninth re-game win can be established instead of the tenth re-game win. In addition, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop at the timing when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 12th "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage on the left reel 32L, the 13th "youth The ninth re-game is set so that the ninth re-game is more likely to win than the 10th re-game, for example, the 12th 'white bell' symbol is driven and controlled to stop at the upper stage instead of the ' symbol. In other words, if the 10th replay is to be won, the 0th "Youth" symbol, the 8th "Watermelon" symbol, and the 13th "Youth" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform the stop operation of the stop switch 42, and if it is other timing, the ninth regame winning will be established.

Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, the 1st winning combination is won in the BB, and if the 1st minor winning combination, the 39th minor winning combination, and the 40th minor winning combination are established, 9 medals are paid out. . Also, when the second combination is won during BB, the ninth re-game winning is established, and even when the third combination during BB is won, the ninth re-game winning is often established. In other words, in the BB state, either the bell winning such as the first small winning combination or the replay winning such as the ninth replay is frequently established. When a replay win is established, no medals are paid out, but a replay is given, and the next game can be played without medals. Since the probability of being out in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a game state in which 9 medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB prize is established, processing for setting a carryover command is performed in step S613. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it known that the bonus winning has not been established in the bonus winning game and a so-called carry-over state has occurred, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

Here, in the present embodiment, winning other bonuses is restricted in the game played in the carryover state. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 17), if a winning combination with a bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) of IV=32 to 49 is won, the corresponding bonus is determined. Winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when winning a small combination of IV = 32 to 49 or a duplicate combination with a replay, the winning flag for each small combination or replay is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is set. It is not set, and only small wins are valid. In other words, the carry-over state can also be said to be a state in which bonus lottery is restricted.

When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and end determination processing is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts has become 0, and when it has become 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Also, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. Note that the end determination processing will be described later in detail.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state is returned to the game state when the CB winning was established. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the normal gaming state is restored after the CB state is ended, and when the CB winning is established under the 3RT state, the 3RT state is established after the CB state is ended. return to On the other hand, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB prize is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the 1st BB prize is established under the 2nd RT state, the normal game state is entered. By the way, when shifting to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 (=9×24-3×24) medals until the BB state ends.

Incidentally, in the BB state, if the 2nd BB hand or the 3rd BB hand is won and a replay is awarded, the remaining payout counter is not decremented. In other words, the number of times the 2nd BB hand or the 3rd BB hand is won in the BB state does not affect the number of medals that can be expected in the BB state.

When none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (NO in step S602), and none of the first BB winning prize, second BB winning prize, and CB winning prize are established, carry over. When a command is set (when the processing of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in steps S605 and S612, when end determination processing is performed in step S614, , the process advances to step S606 to set the status command. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). Set the status command corresponding to the set flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

<Outline of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the game state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the game state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the shift roll on the effective line, and the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB prize is established. The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal game state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state shifts to the second RT state when the third regame winning is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation (see FIG. 23(a)). . In the lottery processing using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, since the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the shift to the 3rd RT state are not won, the state does not shift from the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state.

Further, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state. The first RT state does not transition to the third RT state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (Fig. 23 (b) )reference). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the game state is the 3rd RT state, the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(c)). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of game states, namely, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the BB state, and the CB state. , an attack mode (including an additional specialized zone), a VB mode (including an additional specialized zone), and a BB mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize is established, and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When the normal mode or the challenge mode is shifted to the BB mode, a lottery for transition to the challenge mode and a lottery for transition to the attack mode may be performed in the BB mode. When the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the attack mode after the BB mode is ended, and when the lottery for the shift to the challenge mode is won, the mode is shifted to the challenge mode after the BB mode is ended. When neither transition lottery is won, the game shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the attack mode is shifted to the BB mode, the attack mode is restored after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is shifted to the BB mode, the VB mode is restored after the BB mode is terminated.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "pressing order replay"). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for transition to the challenge mode and a lottery for transition to the attack mode are performed. When the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the challenge mode, and when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the attack mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, so the transition to the second RT state and the third RT state is rare. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the case of the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals decreases by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, as in the normal mode. In challenge mode, a lottery for transition to attack mode is held. However, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the normal mode. In other words, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the operation order is not notified as in the normal mode, but the transition to the attack mode is facilitated. Transition to Attack Mode When the lottery is won, the challenge mode is transitioned to the attack mode. When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is shifted to the normal mode. Challenge mode does not shift to VB mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, and CB state. However, in the challenge mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when winning the replay of the pressing order, so it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, and corresponds to the normal game state or the 1st RT state. It will be done. In the challenge mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will be reduced by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. The attack mode consists of 4 attack modes, 1st attack mode to 4th attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to VB mode. are more likely to migrate. When the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is won, the attack mode is shifted to the VB mode. Shift to VB mode When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the attack mode shifts to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is set to be the highest in the fourth attack mode and the lowest in the first attack mode. , 3rd attack mode, and 4th attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, and CB state. However, in the attack mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell is won and when the pressing order replay is won, the player can operate the stop switches 42 in the notified operation order. When ∼44 is operated, it almost corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the attack mode.

The VB mode, like the attack mode, is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. The difference between the VB mode and the attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, in the attack mode, the operation order for establishing the first replay winning prize is notified. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is announced (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell is won and when the pressing order replay is won, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. If so, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is notified. Therefore, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 every time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

Regarding the transition of the display mode when the number of medals possessed by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the challenge mode, shift from the challenge mode to the attack mode, and return from the attack mode to the normal mode. . In the attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is performed. Therefore, when a loop occurs in which the attack mode shifts to the VB mode and returns from the VB mode to the attack mode, the player expects to increase the number of owned medals. can.

As described above, when the normal mode and the challenge mode are compared, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the attack mode is expected.

In addition, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the VB mode differs in each attack mode. And when it transfers to attack mode from normal mode or challenge mode, it transfers to 1st attack mode fundamentally. In the first attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the second attack mode are held. If the lottery for transition to the second attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the second attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the VB mode is increased. In the second attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the third attack mode are held. When the lottery for transition to the third attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the third attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the VB mode is increased. Then, in the third attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode are performed. When the lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is won, the mode shifts to the fourth attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases.

Therefore, when transitioning to attack mode, the probability of transition to VB mode is increased by promoting the attack mode as follows: first attack mode→second attack mode→third attack mode→fourth attack mode. A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of owned medals in each display mode of the attack mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state are alternated by winning a prize in each replay or by stopping a transitional result. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the attack mode and VB mode, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the operation order that enables the establishment of the first minor winning combination is reported, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to the notification effect on the sub side. The steps will be described in order below.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
(1) Display mode shift lottery processing is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing (step S312) of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. FIG. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31 .

In step S701, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag has already been set before the current game, and whether or not the current game is the carryover state of the first BB or the second BB.

If a negative determination is made in step S701, processing for switching the display mode in steps S702 to S710 and the like are executed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S701 and it is in the carry-over state, processing for transitioning to the display mode or the like is not performed. That is, during the bonus carry-over state, the execution of the process for transitioning to the display mode, etc. is restricted.

Specifically, when a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the current game state is the normal game state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether or not an attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the attack mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the attack mode. When a negative determination is made in step S703, the first special combination process is executed in step S704.

<1st Special Win Process>
The first special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first special combination process is performed means the normal game state or the first RT state and the attack mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first special winning process, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether the display mode should be shifted to the challenge mode, and a transition lottery to determine whether the display mode should be shifted to the attack mode. Further, in the first special combination process, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. When the challenge mode is not in progress means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal table is obtained as a table for attack mode lottery from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 in step S802. On the other hand, if the determination in step S801 is affirmative, in step S803, a challenge mode table is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 as a table for attack mode lottery. In the normal-time table and the challenge mode table, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning combination).

Specifically, in the mode lottery table stored in the various table storage area 105a, the probability of winning each mode transition lottery is set differently depending on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery. It is

As shown in FIG. 36, the game results that trigger the mode transition lottery are strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, weak. Cherry duplication 1, strong watermelon duplication 1, weak watermelon duplication 1, chance A duplication 1, chance B duplication 1, middle bell duplication 1, special reply A duplication 1, special reply A duplication 2, single 1st BB, single 2nd BB are set (hereinafter collectively referred to as “transition triggers”). These transition triggers have the same point value PV set regardless of the set value, and there is no set difference in winning probability. Also, the winning probability of each mode transition lottery is set so that there is no setting difference. On the other hand, strong cherry overlap 2, weak cherry overlap 2, strong watermelon overlap 2, weak watermelon overlap 2, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 2, middle bell overlap 2, special reply AB overlap 1, special reply AB overlap 2 are set so that there is a set difference in the winning probability, and the point value PV is set so that setting 1 generally has the lowest winning probability and setting 6 has the highest winning probability (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as “non-trigger”). Each mode transition lottery is not carried out for the non-trigger role with a setting difference in the winning probability. In other words, mode transition lottery is performed with no set difference in winning probability for transition trigger roles having a common appearance rate, and the transition rate for each mode transition is the same.

In the lottery table for transition to the attack mode acquired in steps S802 and S803, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set according to the type of the transition trigger role. As shown in FIG. 37, for example, when the transition trigger role is a strong cherry, there is a 45% probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode on the normal table, and a 90% probability on the challenge mode table. The lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, and the lottery for transition to the attack mode is set to be more likely to be won in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Further, when the transition trigger combination is Strong Cherry, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to attack mode is higher in both the normal table and the challenge mode table than when the transition trigger combination is Weak Cherry, It is set so that the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the lottery for transition to the attack mode.

After acquiring the attack mode transition lottery table in step S802 or step S803, attack mode lottery processing is executed in step S804. In this process, the lottery counters are obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table obtained in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery for transition to the attack mode.

In step S805, based on the processing result of step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for switching to the attack mode has been won. If the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode. The super attack mode is an attack mode that starts after passing through a special zone. For example, if the initial number of games in the normal attack mode is 50, in the super attack mode, the attack mode is started with the number of games added to the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the special zone. be. Therefore, the degree of advantage for the player differs between the normal attack mode and the super attack mode, and the super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the attack mode.

A lottery for transition to the super attack mode is executed when a lottery for transition to the attack mode is won (when a lottery for transition to the attack mode is won in step S804). It is done based on the transition lottery table for the set super attack mode. As shown in FIG. 37, the transition lottery table for the super attack mode shows that winning the attack mode during the challenge mode wins the transition lottery to the super attack mode more than winning the attack mode during the normal mode. It is set to make it easier to play, and the superiority of the challenge mode is guaranteed. For example, during the normal mode, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to the attack mode triggered by a strong watermelon is 60%, and 5% of those who win the transition lottery win the super attack mode. When a strong watermelon is won in the normal mode, 57% shift to the attack mode, and 3% shift to the super attack mode. On the other hand, during the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to the attack mode with the strong watermelon as a trigger is 50%, and 50% of those who win the lottery to transition to the super attack mode. 25% of the cases where a strong watermelon is won in the challenge mode shift to the attack mode, and 25% shift to the super attack mode, and the shift rate to the super attack mode is higher than that of the normal mode. Furthermore, the winning probability of the lottery to transition to the super attack mode differs depending on the transition trigger role. Although it is common to watermelon (5% winning probability), in the challenge mode, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set to be higher for strong watermelon than for strong cherry.

If it is determined in step S806 that the super attack mode has been won, then in step S807 a process of setting a special zone winning flag is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S806, or after the processing of step S807 is executed, processing of setting an attack mode win flag is performed in step S808. That is, when the attack mode wins, the attack mode win flag is set, and part of them (when the super attack mode wins) sets the specialized zone win flag.

After performing the process of step S808, the process for setting the portent mode is performed in steps S809 to S812. Omen mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests winning in attack mode, challenge mode, etc. is likely to occur. will be announced. The Omen Mode lasts from 0 to 32 games, and the number of games that the Omen Mode continues to play varies depending on the type of attack mode, challenge mode, etc. won and whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. ing. In addition, if attack mode, challenge mode, etc. are won at the same time as the bonus, the winning notification of the bonus will be performed after the omen mode, and after the bonus state ends, the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. will be won. A notification will be made of what happened. Further, when the number of portent games is set to 0 games, winning notification is performed without going through the portent mode.

Specifically, in step S809, first, a process of acquiring the precursor game number table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 38, the number of precursor games table is set so that the number of precursor games to be selected differs depending on the current display mode (normal mode or challenge mode) and whether or not a bonus is simultaneously won. . Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode and when the attack mode is won, if the bonus is not simultaneously won, 1 game to 5 games are selected at 80%, and 6 games are selected. Games ~ 10 games are selected at 20%. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the attack mode and the bonus are simultaneously won, the 1st to 5th games are selected at 10%, and the 6th to 10th games are selected at 20%. 11-20 games are selected at 50% and 21-32 games are selected at 20%. That is, when the display mode is the normal mode, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number when the bonus is won at the same time than when the bonus is not won at the same time. In other words, if the bonus is not won at the same time, the winning of the attack mode will be announced in a relatively short number of games from the attack mode winning game. On the other hand, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games is selected as the number of precursor games regardless of whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. In other words, in this case, the premonition mode is not set, and the winning notification of the attack mode is performed in the next game of the winning game.

In addition, when winning the super attack mode, which is an attack mode with an additional special zone, if the bonus is not simultaneously won, the 1st to 5th games are selected at 70%, and the 6th to 10th games are selected at 30%. Selected in %. On the other hand, if the bonus is simultaneously won at the time of winning the attack mode, the 1st to 5th games are not selected, the 6th to 10th games are selected at 20%, and the 11th to 20th games are selected at 30%. 21st to 32nd games are selected at 50%. That is, even when the super attack mode is won, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number when the bonus is simultaneously won than when the bonus is not simultaneously won, and when the bonus is not simultaneously won. Then, the winning of the super attack mode is reported in a relatively short number of games from the winning game of the super attack mode. Even when the super attack mode is won, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games is selected as the precursor game number regardless of whether the bonus is simultaneously won. That is, in this case, the premonition mode is not set, and the winning notification of the super attack mode is performed in the next game of the winning game.

In the case of a bonus and winning at that time, the number of predictive games that are likely to be selected may be changed according to the type of duplicate combination. For example, a combination of replay (9th replay) and a bonus, such as Special Rep A Duplication 1 and Special Rep A Duplication 2, is a smaller combination such as Strong Cherry Duplication 1 and Weak Cherry Duplication 1 (Strong Cherry, It may be configured such that an indication mode that is longer than overlapping combination of low cherry, etc.) and bonus is more likely to be selected, or vice versa.

In step S810, based on the precursor game number table obtained in step S809 and lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, a lottery process for the number of games in the current precursor mode is performed. Then, in step S811, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter reaches 0, the omen mode ends, and winning notification of winning in a lottery for transition to the attack mode or the like is performed.

In step S812, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, is executed. The portent command includes the result of the lottery that triggered the portent mode (the display mode to be shifted after the portent mode, BB mode and attack mode in the case of step S812) and information on the number of portent games. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the portent command will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S812, the first special combination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S805 that the attack mode transition lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, a challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a table for challenge mode lottery is acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . In the challenge mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set according to the type of transition opportunity (FIG. 37). For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries.

The case where step S813 is executed includes the case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case also, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S813, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. with a table. As in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be changed depending on whether or not the challenge mode is on.

In step S814, it is determined whether or not the player wins the challenge mode based on the result of processing in step S813. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If the mode is the normal mode instead of the challenge mode, in step S816, a process of setting a challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed.

After the process of step S816 is performed, the precursor mode setting process is performed in steps S817 to S820 in the same manner as in steps S809 to S812. That is, in step S817, a precursor game number table is acquired, in step S818, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed, in step S819, the number of precursor games is set, in step S820, a precursor command is set, End the first special combination process.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the predictive game number table obtained in step S817, when the challenge mode alone is won, games 1 to 5 are selected at 90%, and games 6 to 10 are selected at 10%. Selected in %. On the other hand, if the challenge mode is won at the same time as the bonus, the 1st to 5th games are selected at 20%, the 6th to 10th games are selected at 30%, and the 11th to 20th games are selected at 50%. be done. That is, even when the challenge mode is won, if the bonus is won at the same time, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number than if the bonus is not won at the same time. , the winning of the challenge mode is reported in a relatively short number of games from the winning game of the challenge mode.

In addition to the number of omen games, regardless of whether the bonus is won at the same time, the number of omen games that are longer in attack mode than in challenge mode is likely to be selected, and the omen game that is longer in super attack mode than in attack mode. The number is easily selected, and if a display mode advantageous to the player is won, a long predictive game number is likely to be selected. In addition, when the bonus is not won at the same time, the number of omen games of 10 games or less is selected, and if the omen mode continues for 11 games or more, it is confirmed that the bonus and the bonus are won at the same time. do. Also, even if the bonus is won at the same time, the number of premonition games of 20 games or less is selected in the challenge mode and the bonus at the same time. In simultaneous winning, the number of precursor games of 21 games or more is also selected, and when the precursor mode continues for 21 games or more, bonus+attack mode or super attack mode is determined. In this way, the enjoyment of predicting the winning content in relation to the number of precursor games is added.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the transition trigger role is won, there is a case where the game is not won in the attack mode, the challenge mode, or the like, or when a non-trigger role is won, the game may shift to the pseudo omen mode. Although such processing will be described later, the number of games set as the pseudo precursor mode is any one of 1 game to 20 games. Therefore, the occurrence of the winning suggestion effect frequently over 21 games or more determines that the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode that has been shifted to is the portent mode.

If it is determined in step S815 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, then in steps S821 to S825, processing for adding the continuation game of the challenge mode is performed. That is, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S822, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the addition means adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or the attack mode, and the added number of games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuous games. In step S822, a value to be added to the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for the lottery for the number of added games in the challenge mode is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The challenge mode extra game number lottery table is set so that the number of extra games increases according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39, for example, 2 to 20 games in the challenge mode are added to the strong cherry, and the average number of added games is 15 games. In addition, with weak cherries, 5 to 30 games are added, and the average number of games added is 10 games. The average value (the number of games added to the expectation) is set so that the number of games of strong cherries is larger.

In step S823, processing for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a counter for managing the number of continuous games in the challenge mode (more specifically, a challenge mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) is set to a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S822. Perform addition processing. Then, in step S824, after performing the process of setting the additional command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the first special combination process is terminated. The add-on command includes information that the add-on has occurred, the number of add-on games, and the target (challenge mode or attack mode) of the add-on. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that receives the add command will be described in detail later, but in the display control device 81, based on the reception of the add command, the add command as notification of the information included in these add commands is displayed. Notification (additional production) is performed.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S821, the process proceeds to step S825. In step S825, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first special combination process is terminated. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the conditions for adding the number of games in the challenge mode are satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode is added when the bonus ends. That is, it is set so that the game to which the additional notification is performed differs depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S702, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is in the second RT state, it is determined in step S706 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S706, then in step S707 a second special combination process is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S705, it is determined in step S708 whether or not the player is in the bonus state. If it is not in the bonus state, or if the determination in step S706 is affirmative, then in step S709, the third special combination process is executed. If it is in the bonus state, in step S710, the fourth special combination process is executed.

<Second Special Win Process>
The second special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the second special win process is performed means that the player is in the second RT state and the VB mode is not won. The attack mode corresponds to the display mode in this case. In the second special winning process, a transition lottery is performed as to whether or not the display mode should be shifted to the VB mode or the additional special zone. It should be noted that the additional specialized zone indicates a state in which the number of continuous games in the attack zone is increased with a high probability over a plurality of games. In addition, in the second special combination process, a lottery for promotion of the rank of the attack mode is performed, and a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, processing for grasping the rank of the attack mode is performed. As already explained, in the present embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and each rank has a different probability of transition to the VB mode. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined which of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode the rank of the current attack mode is.

At step S902, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the attack mode rank grasped at step S901 is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 37, for example, between strong cherry 1 and weak cherry, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherry 1 than for weak cherry. In the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the probability of transition to VB mode is different as a whole, and the probability of transition to VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. , so that the probability of transition to VB mode is higher in the third attack mode than in the second attack mode, so that the fourth attack mode is more likely to enter the VB mode than the third attack mode. is set so that the transition probability of

In step S903, the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are used to perform a VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S903 corresponds to VB mode winning. In the present embodiment, when a VB mode shift lottery is conducted with a double role as a bonus as a shift trigger, the VB mode shift lottery is not won. In other words, the transition to the BB mode and the transition to the VB mode are prevented from being duplicated as much as possible, so that the advantage of overlapping with these bonuses is not too high.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process of setting a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. After that, in steps S906 to S909, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, the number of precursor games table is acquired in step S906, the number of precursor games is drawn in step S907, the number of precursor games is set in step S908, and the precursor command is set in step S909. End the role process. However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the number of premonitory games is set to 0 for all VB mode wins in the attack mode. Therefore, if the player wins the VB mode during the attack mode, the winning is announced in the next game.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processing for increasing the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, attack mode promotion lottery processing is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105 a of the ROM 105 and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106 . A plurality of tables for promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode. Specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, and a total Three (the promotion lottery is not performed in the situation staying in the 4th attack mode) is provided. In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, in the table for each attack mode, the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode. The table for attack mode is set so that the probability of promotion is lower, and as the rank of attack mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes more difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S910 was promotion winning. If the player wins promotion, the attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In this process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten to a rank flag one level higher than the rank flag corresponding to the current attack mode rank. Thereafter, in step S913, a process of setting the promotion command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The elevate command contains information about the attack mode to elevate to. Upon receiving the promotion command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so as to perform an effect for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As the effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display section 65, for example, a different background color effect is set according to the rank of the attack mode. In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so that an effect for the attack mode is performed with a background color corresponding to the rank of the destination of the promotion.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the processing of step S913 is executed, processing for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S914 to S921.

That is, in step S914, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In the additional lottery process, tables for attack mode additional lottery are acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . As shown in FIG. 40, the attack mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of lottery result.

Here, in the present embodiment, the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is set so that the push order bell or the push order replay will also trigger the lottery. As shown in FIG. 36, a common point value PV is set for the push order bell and the push order replay (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order role") regardless of the setting value, and is set as the winning probability. There is no difference. Also, the odds of winning the lottery for adding the number of games, which is triggered by the winning order, and the number of games to add to the number of games at the time of winning are set so that there is no setting difference. In other words, there is no setting difference in the additional performance triggered by the pushing order. In the following description, the combination that triggers the lottery related to the instruction function, including the transition trigger combination, is also referred to as a specific combination.

As shown in FIG. 40, among the specific combinations, the odds of winning the number-of-games addition lottery in the attack mode are set to be lower for the winning combination than for the transitional combination. Therefore, it is expected that the number of games in the attack mode will be increased in the case where the transition opportunity role appears as a lottery result of each game, rather than in the case where the winning role appears. Then, it is considered that the player advances the game on the premise that he/she expects to win the transition opportunity role. On the other hand, the pushing order combination has a higher winning probability in each game than the transition opportunity combination, and can be said to be a game result that appears relatively easily. By adopting such a combination, it is possible to reduce the presence of the winning combination as an additional opportunity combination and increase the degree of surprise when an additional combination occurs. In addition, the chances of these additional performances based on the winning combination being performed can actually occur during the attack mode (more specifically, if the initial number of games, 50, is played two or three times, it will occur once). appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to favorably generate an increase triggered by the above-described unexpected push-up.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery for the number of added games in attack mode is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, the attack mode additional game number lottery table is set so that the additional game number differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in strong cherry, 20 to 200 games are added in the attack mode, and the average number of added games is 30 games. In addition, with weak cherries, 5 to 300 games are added, and the average number of games added is 20 games. The average value is set so that the number of games with strong cherries is larger.

In step S918, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S917 is added to a counter that manages the number of continuous games in the attack mode (more specifically, attack mode continuous counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Perform addition processing. In the subsequent step S919, an addition notification process is performed for notifying that the addition lottery has been won and the number of games. Then, in step S920, the process of setting the addition command including the processing result of the addition notification process as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The additional notification processing will be described later in detail.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S921. In step S921, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the condition for adding the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode is added at the end of the bonus. That is, like the game number addition notification in the challenge mode, the game for which the addition notification is performed is set to differ depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

If it is determined in step S915 that the additional lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S922. In step S922, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, when a player wins a special role during the attack mode and does not win a lottery for transition to the VB mode or a lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode, etc., a lottery for transition to a special zone is performed. In the special zone lottery process, a special zone transfer lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the special zone is performed by a lottery counter or the like. conduct. As shown in FIG. 39, the special zone transfer lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the transfer lottery differs depending on the type of the transition opportunity role among the specific roles. As already explained, among the transition trigger roles that overlap with the bonus, while it is not possible to win the VB mode transition lottery, as shown in FIG. It is set so that the number-adding lottery will always be won (with a probability of 100%). Therefore, the special zone transfer lottery will not be performed with the overlapping roles with these bonuses as a trigger, and the special zone transfer lottery will be at the time of winning a strong cherry or a weak cherry that does not overlap with the bonus, It is set so that the player can win the lottery for transition to the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games when the player does not win the lottery. For example, a special zone transfer lottery based on strong cherries wins with a probability of 5%, and a special zone transfer lottery based on weak cherries wins with a probability of 0.5%. On the other hand, in the special zone transfer lottery based on the strong watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 15%, and in the special zone transfer lottery based on the weak watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 5%.

In step S923, based on the result of the process in step S922, it is determined whether or not the lottery for moving to the specialized zone has been won. If not won, the second special combination processing is terminated as it is. When winning, in step S924, a process of setting a special zone winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. Then, in step S925, a process for acquiring a precursor game number table is performed, in step S926, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed, in step S927, a process for setting the number of precursor games is performed, and in step S928, a precursor command is executed. is set, the second special combination process is terminated. The processes of steps S925 to S928 are similar to the processes of steps S906 to S909, for example, and are processes for setting the portent mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S923 and none of the lottery for transition to VB mode, the lottery for adding the number of games in attack mode, and the lottery for transition to specialized zone is not won, pseudo-addition notification is performed in step S929. After performing the processing, the second special combination processing is terminated. The pseudo-additional notification process is a process for sustaining the sense of expectation by generating an effect similar to that at the time of winning even if the lottery is not won. The pseudo-additional notification processing will be described later in detail.

<Third Special Win Process>
Next, the third special combination process executed in step S709 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The case where the third special winning process is performed means the state of the third RT or the state of the second RT and winning the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to attack mode or VB mode. In the third special combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode and a lottery for transition to a specialized zone are performed.

That is, in step S1001, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S914. Note that the odds of winning the additional lottery may differ between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1001 was an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1004 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the attack mode. Then, in step S1005, processing for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed, in step S1006 processing for addition notification is performed, and in step S1007 processing for setting the addition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. , ends the third special combination processing. The processing of steps S1003 to S1007 is the same as the processing of steps S916 to S920. The number of additional games may differ between the lottery process of step S916 and the lottery process of step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1009. In step S1009, a lottery for transition to a specialized zone is executed. In other words, even if the specific winning combination is won during the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is performed. The specialized zone lottery process is the same as the process of step S922, and is performed based on the table for the specialized zone transfer lottery (FIG. 37). The processing of steps S1010 to S1016 is the same as the processing of steps S923 to S929. Also, if it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third special combination processing is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is as described above.

In the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), the fourth special combination process in step S710 is a process during the bonus state, and will be described later in detail.

If it is determined in step S701 that it is in the carryover state, or after any one of steps S704, S707, S709 and S710 is executed, the result of this lottery process is pushed in step S711. It is determined whether or not the order replay or the pushing order bell win was made. In the case of winning the first prize, the first prize process is executed in step S712. The pushing process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S711, or after the process of step S712 is executed, the process proceeds to step S713. In step S713, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As described above, after the special zone winning flag is set based on winning the transition lottery to super attack mode or the transition lottery to the special zone, the transition to the special zone is possible. This is a flag that is set when it occurs (when the 7th regame win is established). If the specialized zone flag is set in step S713, the specialized zone processing is executed in step S714. When a negative determination is made in step S713, or after the process of step S714 is executed, this lottery result corresponding process is ended.

<Processing for specialized zone>
The specialized zone processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special zone processing, first, in step S1101, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the subsequent step S1102, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the subsequent step S1103, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1104, the addition notification process is executed, and in step S1105, after setting the addition command, the special zone process is terminated. The processing of steps S1102 to S1105 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S920. However, the number of games to be selected is larger in the number-of-addition-games lottery process of step S1102 than in the number-of-addition-games lottery process of step S917 (FIG. 39). Also, in the specialized zone, regardless of the game result, the number of games in the attack mode is always added (FIG. 40).

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, on the condition that the carryover state is not in effect, the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode, or the VB mode, or the process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or the attack mode. etc. In other words, even if a special role is won, during the carry-over state, the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, processing for adding the number of continuous games in challenge mode or attack mode, etc. are not performed. its implementation is restricted. When a lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode is won, the fact that the lottery for transition is won is notified after the premonitory game is played. Therefore, the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Processing for transitioning the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery>
(2) In the processing for transitioning the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the processing for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for transitioning the game state are performed. A process for performing is performed. Therefore, first, a description will be given of the processing related to the notification that the transfer lottery has been won.

<Processing for mode change notification>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode change notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode change notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursory games is counted in a prize-winning result handling process to be described later, and the number of precursory games is decremented by one each time one game is played. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1202 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning a bonus. If the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1203, and then this mode transition notification processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command notifies that the bonus has been won by, for example, displaying "Bonus confirmed!!" It should be noted that the type of the winning bonus (either the first BB or the second BB) may be notified together.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, or the like are won at the same time, the attack mode or the like is announced at the end of the bonus announced in step S1203. The processing related to such winning notification will be described in detail later, but when winning notification such as attack mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification, winning notification such as attack mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1203. A configuration in which a command is set is preferable.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1205. Then, in step S1206, a challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S<b>1207 , a challenge mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the challenge mode is started. Such notification will be described later in detail.

After that, in step S1208, the count of the number of continuous challenge modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1208, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1204 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1210. Then, in step S1211, an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The notification flag for attack is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state in accordance with winning the attack mode transition lottery. After that, in step S1212, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the attack mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1212, this mode shift notification process is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of notification of winning in super attack mode is different from the mode of notification of winning in attack mode. Therefore, in step S1212, it is preferable to set the attack mode winning notification command so as to include information as to whether or not it is the super attack mode. The mode of notification of winning in the attack mode and the mode of notification of winning in the super attack mode may be different as long as the player can distinguish between them. It is preferable that the aspect is more flashy than the aspect of winning notification in the attack mode.

It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the form of notification of winning in these attack mode and super attack mode is made common. By doing so, it is possible to make it look as if the content of the winning has been promoted from the attack mode to the super attack mode from the attack mode winning notification game to the start notification game, and the attack mode winning can be shown. It is possible to eliminate delays due to the difference between the notification game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1209 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the attack mode win flag is set, the VB mode win flag is cleared in step S1214. Then, in step S1215, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the game state to the 3rd RT state when the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won. After that, in step S1216, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1216, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1213 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1217. In step S1217, it is determined whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode change notification process is terminated. When it is set, in step S1218, processing for clearing the special zone winning flag is performed. Then, in step S1219, a process of setting a specialized zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag for executing the pressing order notification corresponding to the seventh regame winning. After the process of step S1219 is executed, the special zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1220, and then this mode transition notification process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the specialized zone has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S1217, the mode change notification process is terminated.

That is, of the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone that transition through the omen mode, the challenge mode is activated based on the bet operation when the number of omen games in the omen mode becomes 0. be started. On the other hand, for the attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, only the announcement of winning the attack mode transition lottery or VB mode transition lottery based on the bet operation when the number of omen games in the omen mode becomes 0 is given. The attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone are not started even if the number of precursor games becomes 0. This is because the challenge mode as a display mode does not involve the transition of the game state, while the attack mode and the VB mode involve the transition of the game state. This is due to the difference that VB mode is initiated by transitioning to the third RT state. As for the specialized zone, there are cases where the transition of the game state is not accompanied (from the 3rd RT state to the 3rd RT state). The processing configuration is as described above.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is entered when the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the 3rd RT state is entered into the second promoted replays 1 and 2. , and when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, This is the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, when a lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the VB mode is won, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is reported in the game in which the player wins the winning combination to shift the game state, It is configured to allow the game state to be shifted. It should be noted that from the notification of winning the attack mode or VB mode transition lottery to the start of the attack mode or VB mode (until the game state transitions), notification as a preparation state (for example, " In preparation") is performed.

<Description on transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the pushing process (step S712) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the pushing process, the outline of the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Outline of push order notification effect>
Notification of the order of operations at the time of winning a winning hand (push order notification, push order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68 . Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left. Notification of the pressing order on the instruction monitor 68 will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Pushing down process>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 43, the pushing process executed in step S712 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) will be described.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S1301 means that the first replay or the third replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1302 to determine whether or not an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM . As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the attack mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 41). be.

When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1303, processing for notifying the pressing order of the third re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(a)). After that, in step S1304, a process of setting a push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order process is terminated. The pressing order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described later in detail.

In step S1303, the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning prize is notified, basically, the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, and the winning notification of the attack mode is performed via the sign mode. It is assumed that it will be after the attack mode has been completed and before the transition to attack mode. That is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. However, even in the attack mode, the game state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state due to an erroneous operation etc. Even in such a case, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 will be won. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S1305 means that the first replay or the second replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1306, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1307, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation order corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1308, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

In this way, if the player wins the first promotion replays 1 to 4 in a state in which the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state to the third. It becomes possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1302, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

In addition, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the notification flag for attack is set, the game state is shifted to the 1st RT state by notifying the operation order corresponding to the first replay winning prize. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1306, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay winning may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the 1st RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay win, and the 3rd replay win is established. Even in the case of (even in the case of shifting to the second RT state), the second replay winning prize can be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the attack mode is not won and the game moves to the second RT state by chance, the game will quickly move to the first RT state after that.

If a negative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. A positive determination in step S1309 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1310, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1311 whether or not the VB notification flag or special zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 41). be. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursory games in the precursory mode becomes 0 after winning the special zone transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 41). be.

When the notification flag for VB or the notification flag for specialized zone is set, in step S1312, processing for notification of the pressing order of the fourth re-game or fifth re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth regame, the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth regame winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1313, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1310, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1311, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed in step S1307, and the processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed in step S1308. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, when winning the second promotion replays 1 and 2 without winning the VB mode or the special zone, if the attack mode is in progress, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, and the attack is performed. If it is not in the mode, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1309, it is determined in step S1314 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay 1. Affirmative determination in step S1314 means that any one of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replay wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1315, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1316 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. When the notification flag for attack is set and the notification flag for special zone is set, in step S1317, the process for notification of the pressing order of the seventh regame is executed. Specifically, among the first replay, the third replay, and the sixth to eighth regames, the operation order corresponding to the seventh regame win is reported (see FIG. 23(c)). After that, in step S1318, after a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1315, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1316, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed in step S1307, and the processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed in step S1308. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case where BAR replay 1 is won without winning the VB mode or the specialized zone, if the attack mode is in effect, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning prize is performed, and if the attack mode is not in effect The pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1314, it is determined in step S1319 whether or not the result of the current lottery is winning of the bell in order of pressing. If the pressing order bell is won, it is determined in step S1320 whether the current display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode. If it is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, in step S1321, a process for notifying the pressing order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1322, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1319 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1320, the actual pressing order process is terminated without performing the process for notifying the pressing order.

In the case where the challenge mode is configured to perform at least a predetermined number of push order notifications (once), it is determined in steps S1302 and S1320 whether or not the predetermined number of push order notifications have been performed during the challenge mode. should be configured to perform If a negative determination is made in this determination, the predetermined number of times is counted, and the processing for notifying the pressing order in steps S1303 and S1321 may be performed.

<Processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, as a result of performing the notification for shifting the game state as described above, the processing when the winning combination corresponding to the shift of the game state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result handling process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1401, game number management processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode, the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, etc. are counted. In the subsequent step S1402, a post-loading notification process is executed. The post-boarding notification processing is processing for performing post-boarding notification, which is one notification mode of the additional notification. The post-loading notification process will be described later in detail.

In the following step S1403, it is determined whether or not the result of this stop is the third replay winning. As described above, when the third regame winning has been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), the processing for shifting the game state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1404, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. The case where the attack notification flag is not set means the case where the third replay win is established without the condition for shifting to the attack mode being established. The winning result handling process is terminated as it is. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. In addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode, the attack mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1405, when it is determined that the attack mode flag is set, in addition to the attack mode, the VB mode and the special zone are included. .

At step S1405, if the attack mode flag is set, the display mode is already the attack mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1406 to S1409.

That is, in step S1406, an attack mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1407, the attack mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After that, in step S1408, counting of the attack mode continuation number is started. Specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the attack mode.

After performing the process of step S1408, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone flag is set in step S1409. Affirmative determination in step S1409 means that the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode. In this case, after clearing the special zone winning flag in step S1410, the additional special zone starts. (steps S1419 to S1421). Processing for starting the additional specialized zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, the winning result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1403 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay wins have been established as a result of this stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, the RT state processing (FIG. 21) performs processing for shifting the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1412, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the 4th and 5th re-game wins are established without winning the VB mode transition lottery. , the winning result handling process is terminated. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1413 whether or not the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag has not been set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1414 to S1416.

That is, in step S1414, processing for setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is due to the fact that the VB mode is a mode that transitions through the attack mode, and that the transition to the attack mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

After that, in step S1415, a VB mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1416, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 25) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1416, the main winning result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the fourth and fifth replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the seventh regame winning has been established as a result of this stop. In this embodiment, when the seventh replay winning has been established, that is, the middle stage of the left reel 32L has a "black BAR" symbol, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M has a "black BAR" symbol, and the middle stage of the right reel 32R has a "black BAR" symbol. When the "black BAR" pattern stops and the "black BAR" pattern stops on the middle combination line, it is configured to shift to the special addition zone. The case where the 7th re-game win is established means the case where BAR Replay 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game win. There is (Fig. 23(c)).

If the seventh regame winning has been established, it is determined in step S1418 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. When the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1419 to S1421. As already described, when the super attack mode is started, even if affirmative determination is made in step S1409 and the process of step S1410 is performed, the process of steps S1419 to S1421 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1419, a process of setting a specialized zone flag in various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 is performed. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped. . In this case, an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag may coexist in the various flag storage area 106d.

After that, in step S 1420 , the specialized zone start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1421, counting of the number of continuations of the specialized zone is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1421, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1418, the winning result handling process is terminated.

As described above, processing for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21) based on the winning of the combination (3rd to 5th replays) corresponding to shifting the game state. conduct. This is to avoid the attack mode or the like from being started based on the winning of a winning combination corresponding to changing the game state by chance, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. is.

In addition, when the display mode is shifted, among those accompanied by the shift of the game state, the shift to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, or when shifting from the attack mode to the VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the attack mode or VB mode to the special zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to a lower mode, the display mode transition is not performed when the game state transitions due to, for example, a second regame win as a fall replay or a stop of the transition result. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games played. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Number of games management process>
The number-of-games management process executed in step S1401 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continued games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted. Then, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in the present embodiment, each game can be executed with the number of bets from 1 to 3, and in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 as the specific number. If the bet is not 3 bet, the game number management process is terminated. In other words, in the 1-bet and 2-bet games, the number of games in the omen mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode and the like are not counted. Note that the counting may be performed regardless of the number of bets.

If the game to end this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the game is in a bonus state. If the determination in step S1502 is affirmative, in step S1503 the display mode flags of the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag are cleared, and then the number of games management process ends. do. In other words, when the bonus win flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games in the attack mode, etc., is not counted. Note that if each flag is not set in step S1503, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1503, while the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag are cleared, the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after going through a preparation state such as an attack mode, these flags are used to notify the order of pressing for shifting the game state, so that the game state before the bonus can be restored. On the other hand, when a bonus is won during the challenge mode or the special zone, the bonus win terminates the challenge mode or the special zone. Also, in step S1503, the challenge mode winning flag, the attack mode winning flag, etc. are not cleared. Therefore, when the attack mode or the like and the bonus are won at the same time, the winning notification based on these winning flags is performed after the bonus is finished.

If the determination in step S1502 is negative, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1505. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1504 (not in precursor mode), or after the process of step S1505 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1506 to S1528. .

That is, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process advances to step S1507 to perform processing for subtracting 1 from the challenge mode continuation counter, thereby decrementing the number of continuation games in the challenge mode. Then, in step S1508, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1509, and a challenge mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1510. Upon receiving the challenge mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the challenge mode will end in the current game. After performing the process of step S1510, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1506 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is in attack mode, the process advances to step S1512 to determine whether it is a specialized zone in attack mode. That is, in the case of transitioning to the specialized zone at the start of the attack mode like in the super attack mode, affirmative determination is made in step S1512. If it is in the special zone, the game number management process for the special zone is performed in steps S1525 to S1528. These processes will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1512 that the zone is not a special zone, in step S1513, the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the attack mode continuation game count. Then, in step S1514, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1515, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1516. After that, in step S1517, an attack mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the attack mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1517, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1511 that the attack mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1518. In step S1518, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process advances to step S1519 to determine whether or not it is an additional specialized zone. If the zone is not an additional zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1520, thereby decrementing the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1521, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1522, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1523. After that, in step S1524, a VB mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the VB mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1524, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1519 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1525. As already explained, even if it is determined in step S1512 that the zone is a specialized zone in the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1525. In step S1525, the special zone continuation game number is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1526, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1527, and the special zone end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1528. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone ends in the current game. As such notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1528, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1518 or step S1526, the game number management process is terminated.

<End determination processing>
Next, as the processing at the end of the bonus, the end determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether or not the bonus termination condition is met, and when the bonus is to be terminated, a process for notification of winning such as an attack mode in which the bonus and the bonus are duplicated is performed, and an attack mode in which the bonus is duplicated and the like is selected. For example, processing for adding the number of games is performed.

That is, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a minor winning combination has been established. As already explained, during the bonuses of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the 1st hand in the BB is established with a high probability, and the 2nd hand in the BB and the 3rd hand in the BB are partially established (FIG. 28). When the 1st role in the BB is won, the 1st minor role is mainly won, and a predetermined number of medals (9 medals) are paid out, and the 2nd role in the BB and the 3rd role in the BB are replayed in the 9th replay. This is a replay of the 10th replay, and medals are not paid out even if a prize is established. Also, during the CB, any of the CB medium and small wins 1 to CB small and medium wins 4 is won, and even if you win any of them, the first small win is mainly established and the predetermined number (15) of medals will be paid out. Step S1601 is a process of determining whether or not a small winning combination that causes a medal payout has been established among the winning combinations during the bonus or CB.

If it is determined in step S1601 that a minor win has been established, then in step S1602 processing is performed to subtract the current game payout number from the remaining payout number. When a negative determination is made in step S1601, or after the processing of step S1602 is executed, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of payouts has become 0 in step S1603. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after a bonus end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1604, in steps S1605 to S1619, processing for notification of winning such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. Processing for adding the number of continuous games is performed.

That is, in step S1605, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode win flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S1606, the number of precursor games is set in step S1607, and the precursor command is set in step S1608. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of precursor games in step S1606, a lottery is performed in which the number of precursor games is 0 with a probability of 100%. That is, in step S1607, the number of premonitory games of 0 game is always set, and winning notification of the attack mode or the like is performed in the next game after the bonus ending game. After executing the process of step S1608, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1605, it is determined in step S1609 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1606 to S1608 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1609, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in step S1510. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1606 to S1608 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the premonition game is performed, and then the challenge mode and the VB mode winning notification is performed.

In addition, if the bonus ends when the attack mode winning flag or challenge mode winning flag is set, it means that the bonus is won at the same time as the attack mode, challenge mode, etc., or the winning announcement of the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. This is the case when the bonus is won during the omen mode of. On the other hand, when the bonus is terminated while the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode and the bonus are simultaneously won during the attack mode, or during the premonitory mode of the VB mode winning notification (in this case, This is a case where the bonus is won in the next game after winning the VB mode, because the premonition mode of the 0 game is selected.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the attack mode addition flag is set. If the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition game count lottery processing is performed in step S1612, the attack mode game addition processing is performed in step S1613, and the addition notification processing is performed in step S1614. , in step S1615, an add-on command is set. The processes of steps S1612 to S1615 are the same as the processes of steps S917 to S920. After executing the process of step S1615, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1611, it is determined in step S1616 whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode add-on flag is set, the challenge mode add-on game number lottery process is performed in step S1617, the challenge mode game add-on process is performed in step S1618, and an add-on command is set in step S1619. . The processes of steps S1617 to S1619 are the same as the processes of steps S822 to S824. If a negative determination is made in step S1616, or if the process of step S1619 has been executed, the end determination process is terminated.

As described above, on the main controller 101 side, (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) winning result. As a result of the processing for shifting the display mode based on the above, the auxiliary display unit 65 generates a pressing order notification effect, and the game state shifts so as to follow the transition of the display mode, and further, A pressing order bell winning can be generated by the pressing order notification performance by the auxiliary display section 65, and a large amount of medals can be expected to be obtained.

Here, when the pressing order replay or the pressing order bell win is performed, if the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 (the pressing order notification effect by the display control device 81) is performed, in addition to the pressing order notification effect, the main control The instruction monitor 68 connected to the device 101 also informs of the pressing order. The configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 47(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 47(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is used when the player wins a lottery to switch to the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode when the display mode is the normal mode, or when the player wins the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode at the same time. Lights up when the bonus to be obtained (1st BB) is won. Also, when the attack mode, super attack mode, challenge mode, or first BB ends and shifts to the normal mode (except when transitioning to the attack mode again after going through the precursor mode), the lights are turned off.

In other words, the navigation state (attack mode, super attack mode, high-frequency mode) in which the operation order of the push order bell and the push order replay are easily reported to the player to easily win a prize in an advantageous manner. Chance state (challenge mode, 1st BB, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win the transition lottery, or transition to the navigation state or chance state. The section including the state (winning mode) is regarded as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the advantageous section and turned off during the normal section, which is not the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means) for clearly indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section.

The eighth display segment N8 is a game that starts a game in which a game result (such as a special hand such as a strong cherry) that triggered an advantageous section such as the navigation state, the chance state, and the winning state is won and the game result is established. Then, at a timing before the game operation by the player is permitted in the game subsequent to the start game, lighting is started as a notification that the advantageous section will be reached. More specifically, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game result that triggered the advantageous interval is established, that is, regardless of whether or not there is a dropout, the game in which the game result is won is played. As the start game, the eighth display segment N8 is lit at a timing before the bet operation is permitted as a game operation by the player in the next game. In other words, the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 starts before the start of the game following the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display displays the payout number on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

The section display first process and the section display second process will be described below as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it means that the player has won a lottery for transition to the attack mode, super attack mode, or challenge mode as an advantageous section, or is in any of these modes. A case is shown. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. When the eighth display segment N8 is turned off and either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, in the current lottery process, the lottery for transition to the challenge mode or the attack mode Or when you win the lottery for transition to super attack mode. As already explained, in the first special combination process (FIG. 32), when the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won, the challenge mode winning flag is set, and the lottery for transition to the attack mode or super attack mode is won. If so, the attack mode win flag is set. In step S1702, if none of the flags is set, the section display first processing is terminated.

If either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the process advances to step S1703 to start displaying the section indicator by lighting the eighth display segment N8. In addition, in the main controller 101, when starting to display the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the lighting state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound of "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so as to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Incidentally, when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. The configuration may be such that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

After executing the process of step S1703, in step S1704, the process of starting to count the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is executed, and then the first section display process ends. The number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is determined by measuring the number of games in the advantageous interval AG provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S1704, the number of games in the advantageous interval is set to 0, which is the initial value. I do. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is incremented by 1 for each game in the advantageous interval.

If it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1705 processing is performed to continue display during the advantageous section, and then this section display first processing is performed. exit. Specifically, in step S1705, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S415 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being lit. If it is turned off (non-lighting, non-display), the second section display process is terminated. If it is during lighting display, the process proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, a process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of games in the advantageous interval, and counts the number of games played while the eighth display segment N8 is lit. After executing the processing of step S1802, the number of remaining games management processing is executed in step S1803. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games with the current number of remaining games, based on the number of remaining games in the attack mode.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50, first, in step S1901, the number of precursor games G1 is grasped. The number of precursor games G1 indicates the number of remaining precursor mode games, for example, when the current state is the precursor mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 45). . In step S1902, the challenge mode continuation number G2 is grasped. The challenge mode continuation number G2 represents the number of remaining challenge mode games, for example, when the current situation is the challenge mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 45). . In step S1903, the attack mode continuation count G3 is grasped. The attack mode continuation count G3 represents the number of remaining attack mode games, for example, when the current state is the attack mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 45). . In step S1904, the VB mode continuation number G4 is grasped. The VB mode continuation number G4 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, for example, when the current state is the VB mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 45). . In step S1905, the specialized zone continuation number G5 is grasped. The specialized zone continuation number G5 represents the number of games remaining in the specialized zone, for example, when the current status is the specialized zone in the advantageous zone, and is set to 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 45). subtracted. In step S1906, the BB remaining game number G6 is grasped. The number of remaining BB games G6 represents the number of remaining BB mode games, for example, when the current state is the BB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, and is performed each time the game number management process (FIG. 45) is started. Then, it is decremented by 1 in a subtraction process (not shown) on condition that the BB mode is on.

Here, values of 0 or more may be input to these continuation numbers G1 to G6 even if the mode or zone does not correspond to the current state. Specifically, for example, in a situation where a lottery for transition to VB mode has been won but the transition to VB mode has not yet been made, the current mode is attack mode and VB mode continuation count G4 indicates that VB mode continuation The initial value of the number of games "25" remains input. Also, in a situation where you have won the lottery to move to the super attack mode during the challenge mode, but have not yet moved to the super attack mode, the current mode is the challenge mode, and the special zone continuation number G5 is special. "5", which is the initial value for the number of games to be continued in the attack zone, is still input, and "50", which is the initial value for the number of games to be continued in the attack mode, is still input to the attack mode continuation number G3. becomes.

In step S1907, a process of calculating the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section is performed by integrating G1 to G6 ascertained in each process of steps S1901 to S1906. By performing such processing, it is possible to grasp how many games the advantageous section continues. In the following step S1908, the number of games in the advantageous interval (the number of games in the advantageous interval AG) and the number of remaining games ZG are added to calculate the total number of games in the advantageous interval SG. Then, in step S1909, the number of vacant games (the number of vacant games that can be added, the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the above-mentioned total number of games SG in the advantageous interval from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of continuous games in the advantageous interval. process.

After the processing of step S1909 is performed, it is determined in step S1910 whether or not the number of empty games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether or not there is an empty game number and can be added. If the free game number FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of free games FG is 0 or less, a process of setting an excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S1911, and then the remaining game number management process is terminated. The excess flag indicates a situation in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section cannot be increased, more specifically, the CPU 102 grasps a situation in which even if an increase is made, the additional games are not played due to forced termination at the 1500th game. is a flag for

By setting the excess flag, in the present embodiment, even if a specific role is won during the advantageous section, the execution of the lottery for adding the number of games during the attack mode is restricted. More specifically, for example, in step S914, step S1001, etc., in the attack mode game number addition lottery process, if the excess flag is set, the execution of the lottery process is restricted, and the extra lottery will not be won. (Or, even if you win, 0 games will be added). As a result, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the advantageous section will continue for the upper limit number of games or more by adding the game to the amount that cannot be continued.

It should be noted that once the excess flag is set, the remaining game number management process may not be executed in the current advantageous section.

Returning to the description of the second section display process (FIG. 49), after executing the process of step S1803, in step S1804, it is determined whether the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit value of "1500" in the current game. determine whether or not If it reaches "1500", in step S1805, the number of games in the advantageous section AG is cleared to 0, and in step S1806, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished as processing for ending the display of the section display. process to cause Then, after performing data initialization processing in step S1807, the second section display processing ends.

The data initialization process is a process of resetting the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. For example, if the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or if the VB mode winning flag is set during the attack mode, and the flag remains set until this initialization processing. clears these winning flags. Also, in the initialization process, if an attack notification flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, special zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Furthermore, if the omen counter, the counter for the number of continuous games such as the attack mode, etc. are greater than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step S1804 that the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has not reached the upper limit value, the process advances to step S1808 to determine whether or not the advantageous interval has ended. That is, in step S1808, it is determined whether neither the challenge mode winning flag nor the attack mode winning flag is set, and in step S1809, neither the challenge mode flag nor the attack mode flag is set. state or not. If both steps S1808 and S1809 result in an affirmative determination, it means that the advantageous interval has ended before reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval. Along with clearing to 0, end processing of the display of the section indicator is performed in step S1806, data initialization processing is performed in step S1807, and then the second section display processing is terminated. If a negative determination is made in either step S1808 or step S1809, it is determined that the current section is still in an advantageous section, and the second section display processing ends. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (the eighth display segment N8) continues.

<Regarding the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 51, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not illuminated) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, the pressing order notification effect is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to an advantageous section that has an instruction function such as the pressing order notification. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if a weak watermelon role is won in a lottery to transition to an advantageous section such as challenge mode or attack mode, the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established is set as the starting game. At the timing before the betting operation by the player is allowed in the next game, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is lit, and the notification of the advantageous section is started.

In this case, in the game in which the weak watermelon combination is won as described above, the game is in the state before transition to the advantageous section, and is included in the normal section. Then, with respect to the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator indicating the advantageous interval, the notification of the advantageous interval is the timing at which the betting operation for the game following the starting game in which the weak watermelon role was won is permitted. In other words, if the game in which the advantageous section starts is considered to be played at the timing when the game becomes playable, as described above, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in the weak watermelon role winning game (starting game). The notification can be said to be prior notification performed prior to the notification of the advantageous section (in-state notification, in-mode notification).

After that, in the situation where the advantageous section is being notified, the pressing order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is generated. In this case, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above. You can understand the order. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit and the final game of the advantageous interval is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also extinguished, and the notification of the advantageous interval ends. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted in games in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. Up to the game is the number of games in the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals is finished in the final game of the advantageous section (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). If medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game was the last game in the advantageous section.

In this manner, the eighth display segment N8 is lit when the advantageous section is reached, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the advantageous section ends. The eighth display segment N8 not only starts to light up when the mode shifts to the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc., but also based on winning the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc. Lighting starts. In other words, even if no notification is given in the game in which the lottery for transition to these modes has been won, whether or not the lottery for transition to these modes has been won can be determined by checking whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated. can be clearly understood. By doing so, there is an advantage between players who end the game without knowing it even though they have won the lottery for transition to these modes, and the succeeding players who sit after that. It can be made so that there is no difference in degree.

In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured so that there is no difference in the advantage due to the setting value in regard to the game property in which the advantage is changed by notification of the pressing order in the challenge mode, the attack mode, or the like. Therefore, by making the playability based on the push order notification a uniform advantage for each game table (set value) and each game (situation), the advantage/disadvantage between players is eliminated, and the privilege is aimed at the pattern. While fully enjoying the original game property of the slot machine 10 of obtaining .

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing relating to the notification effect on the sub side, processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As processing for various notifications, effect setting processing is provided which is executed at a predetermined cycle (cycle of 1.49 msec). Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S2002. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, or if the process of step S2002 has been executed, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. A bet time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the bet operation being performed, and in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal processing, mode transition notification processing (see FIG. 41), an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like. In the case of these betting commands, a betting effect setting process is executed in step S2004.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003, or if the process of step S2004 has been executed, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third special combination process (FIGS. 32 to 34), push order notification commands set in the push order process (FIG. 43), and the like. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S2006.

If a negative determination is made in step S2005, or after the processing of step S2006 is executed, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S2008, effect setting processing at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2007, or if the process of step S2008 has been executed, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stopped command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to commands, attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, special There is a zone end command and so on. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2010.

When a negative determination is made in step S2009, or after the process of step S2010 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2011, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S2011, setting effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main control device 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

Below, the effect setting process at the time of betting, the effect setting process at the time of start, the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation, and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described. Note that each effect setting process will be described with reference to schematic diagrams of display effects shown in FIGS. 58 and 63 to 68. FIG.

<Production setting processing at the time of betting>
The effect setting process at the time of betting will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode start command is included in the betting command received this time. When the challenge mode start command is included, in step S2102, a process of setting a challenge mode start effect is performed. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Challenge mode start", and the display mode to be changed is likely to win the attack mode shift lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) indicating the chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Grab the attack mode!" in a thick male voice) is emitted.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S2101, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the attack mode win notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When an attack mode winning notification command is included, in step S2104, processing for setting an attack mode winning notification effect is performed. In the attack mode win notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Attack mode confirmed". In addition, in the attack mode winning notification presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack number one!" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, in step S2106, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "VICTORY BONUS confirmed". In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" in male and female voices) is emitted.

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2105, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the bonus winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the bonus winning notification command is included, in step S2108, processing for setting the bonus winning notification effect is performed. In the bonus-winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "You did it! Bonus confirmed". In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "I did it!") is emitted.

If the bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2107, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not the specialized zone winning notification command is included as the betting time command received this time. When the special zone winning notification command is included, in step S2110, processing for setting the special zone winning notification effect is performed. In the special zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "Ride on!". In addition, in the special zone winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a thick, ecstatic male voice, "Norinori!") is emitted.

After any one of steps S2102, S2104, S2106, S2108 and S2110 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S2109, other effects at the time of betting are set in step S2111. , the effect setting process is terminated. In the process of step S2111, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Alternatively, for example, processing for returning from the demo mode in which one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined time, or lighting a lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation is valid. processing, etc.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2201, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is the normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, and in the corresponding display mode , the display effect of the auxiliary display section 65 is set. Specifically, a challenge mode flag, an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag are also set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side as flags for grasping the display mode. Areas are provided in which a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode and cleared at the end of each mode. For example, in the process of setting the challenge mode start effect in step S2102, a challenge mode flag is set. In step S2201, by grasping these various mode flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In subsequent step S2202, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. In the case of winning the pushing order, in step S2203, processing for notification of pushing order is performed. Here, the pressing order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the pressing order notification command is included in the start time command received this time. If the pressing order notification command is not included, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the current lottery results are the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2303, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the third replay win is established, and then the pressing order notification processing is performed. exit.

If it is determined in step S2302 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the current lottery result is drop replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2305 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to perform push order notification that the first regame winning is established, and then the push order notification process is terminated. do.

If it is determined in step S2304 that the replays are not falling replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2306 whether or not the current lottery results are the second promotion replays 1 and 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect or the specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2106 and the special zone winning notification effect in step S2110, the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 indicate that VB winning or special zone winning has been announced. set a flag. The alerted flag is cleared upon transition to the VB mode or specialized zone. Then, in step S2307, the presence or absence of the notified flag may be determined. If the VB mode or special zone winning has already been announced, in step S2308, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to announce the pressing order in which the 4th and 5th regame winnings are established. , terminates the pressing order notification process. If the notification of winning in the VB mode or the special zone has not been completed, the process advances to step S2305 to perform notification of the pressing order for the first re-game winning, and then terminates the processing for notification of the pressing order.

If it is determined in step S2306 that it is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2309 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay 1. If it is BAR replay 1, it is determined in step S2310 whether or not the special zone winning notification effect has been executed. If it has already been announced that the special zone has been won, in step S2311, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform the pressing order notification that the seventh regame winning is established, and then the pressing order notification processing is performed. finish. If the special zone winning notification has not been completed, the process advances to step S2305 to perform the pressing order notification for the first regame winning prize, and then terminate the pressing order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2309 that it is not BAR replay 1, it is determined in step S2312 whether or not the current lottery result is Bell. If the bell is won, in step S2313, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the bell wins as the first minor combination, and then the pressing order notification processing is terminated. . If a negative determination is made in step S2312, the pressing order notification process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 54), if it is determined in step S2202 that the push-up role is not won, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the transition opportunity role is won. If the transition opportunity is won, a process for notification of the transition opportunity is performed in step S2205. The transition trigger notification process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S2204, or after the processing of step S2203 or step S2205 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. When the add-on command is received, in step S2207, the process of setting the add-on effect in advance is performed so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As the additional performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, the auxiliary display section 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted.

Details of the processing for setting the additional effect in step S2207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, a process of grasping the number of added games to be notified is performed based on the added command received this time. In the following step S2402, processing for grasping notification timing is executed. The notification timing is the timing for executing the additional effect, and the timing is determined by a process (additional notification process) on the main controller 101 side, which will be described later. Information on the determined timing is set in the above-mentioned add-on command and output. Therefore, on the side of the display control device 81, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the addition effect should be executed by reading the addition command. As the notification timing, a game in which an additional effect should be executed and a timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set.

After grasping the notification timing in step S2402, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the result of grasping in step S2402 is that an additional effect is to be performed in the current game. If the current game does not include the addition notification, the processing for setting the addition effect is terminated as it is. If an additional effect is to be performed in the current game, it is determined in step S2404 whether or not any of the reels is stopped and turned on as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2405, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is operated to stop ON. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the additional effect. Further, in step S2405, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional performance is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the additional performance is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined in step S2406 whether or not the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. If it is the time of the stop OFF operation of these reels, in step S2407, the target reel to generate the additional effect is set so that the additional effect is generated at the time of the stop OFF operation of the target reel. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to comprehend the timing of generating the additional effect. Further, in step S2407, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read out from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area.

When a negative determination is made in step S2406, in step S2408, setting is made so that this additional effect is generated when all the reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF). Specifically, a process of setting a third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. Also, in step S2408, temporary storage processing of effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processing of step S2405, step S2407 or step S2408, the setting processing of the additional effect is ended.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, if the addition command is not received in step S2206, or after the process of step S2207 is executed, the effect setting process during the bonus is executed in step S2208, and the process proceeds to step S2209. Then, in step S2210, after setting other start effects, the start effect setting process is terminated. The during-bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be described later in detail. In the process of step S2210, for example, a process of setting an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. is performed.

<Production setting processing at each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting processing at the time of stop operation performed in step S2008 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2501, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the process advances to step S2502 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and ON is set as the current game effect. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop ON operation effect. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2504, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop ON operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. An additional performance will occur at . Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

Further, for example, if the current game is a winning push order and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel stops based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production that shows the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the first reel shown in FIG. 42(a) is displayed as the operation target. . Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 42(b) is displayed. change in performance. Further, if two reels are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, the second reel is displayed as a stop target shown in FIG. When the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display indicating that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 42(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the process advances to step S2505 to determine whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the reels is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, the process advances to step S2506 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect of the current game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2507 whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop OFF operation effect. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2508, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional performance is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect. If the determination in step S2505 is negative, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the challenge mode end command is included, in step S2602, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Challenge mode end". In addition, in the challenge mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "More diligence!" in a loud male voice).

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2601, it is determined in step S2603 whether or not the attack mode start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the attack mode start command is included, in step S2604, processing for setting the attack mode start effect is performed. In the attack mode start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Attack Mode!! Ver.1". In addition, in the attack mode start rendering, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack mode start!" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

Incidentally, the display of "Ver. 1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, the display indicates that the attack mode to be started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when the promotion command is received), the character display of "Attack mode!! Ver. In addition, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the characters "Attack mode!! Ver.3" are displayed, and when the rank is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the characters "Attack mode!! Ver.4" are displayed. display is performed.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2603, it is determined in step S2605 whether or not the attack mode end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the attack mode end command is included, in step S2606, processing for setting an attack mode end effect is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 65(b), in the attack mode ending presentation, the characters "Attack mode END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the current attack mode (including VB mode and specialized zone) is displayed. ), and the total number of payouts for this attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you later" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2605, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. When the VB mode start command is included, in step S2608, processing for setting the VB mode start effect is performed. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "777 VICTORY!!". In addition, in the VB mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory bonus start" in male and female voices) is emitted.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2607, it is determined in step S2611 whether or not the VB mode end command is included in the currently received stop command. If a VB mode end command is included, then in step S2612 processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "VICTORY BONUS END", and at the same time, the number of continuous games in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total payout number of attack mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "It's still going on") is emitted.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2611, it is determined in step S2613 whether or not the special zone start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the special zone start command is included, in step S2614, processing for setting the special zone start effect is performed. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Add Challenge!!" A character is displayed to indicate that In addition, in the special zone start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go" in a boy's voice) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2613, it is determined in step S2615 whether or not the special zone end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the special zone end command is included, in step S2616, processing for setting the special zone end effect is performed. In the special zone end presentation, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted. It is preferable to change the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2615, it is determined in step S2617 whether or not the bonus end command is included in the currently received stop command. When the bonus end command is included, in step S2618, processing for setting the bonus end effect is performed. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts obtained during the bonus, and if the bonus is shifted to the attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, the attack mode ( Display the total number of payouts for VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end effect, a character or the like suggesting these contents is performed according to the suitability of the attack mode, the suitability of the challenge mode, and the number of additional games.

After executing any of steps S2602, S2604, S2606, S2608, S2612, S2614, S2616 and S2618, or after making a negative determination in S2617, the process proceeds to steps S2609 and S2619. move on. In steps S2609 and S2619, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S2207 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 56), when the timing of occurrence of the additional effect of this time is set at the time of full stop, as shown in FIG. , 32R are stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display portion 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

After that, in steps S2610 and S2620, after setting other effects at the time of stop, the present effect setting process is terminated. In steps S2610 and S2620, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination. , and control so that the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to an automatic bet during a replay.

As described above, based on various commands from the main controller 101, the display control device 81 performs various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notification of the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Production processing during various games>
In this embodiment, effects during bonuses and continuous effects are provided as effects during various games. The effect during the bonus is a effect performed in each game during the bonus state that is shifted based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. A continuous effect is a effect that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, attack mode, challenge mode, VB mode, etc.), and the game is played a plurality of times (four times in this embodiment). This is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which it is notified whether or not the advantageous result was obtained in the final game.

<Bonus effect setting process>
First, the during-bonus effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The during-bonus effect setting process is a process executed in step S2208 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 54).

In the bonus effect setting process, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the game after winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB to the end of the bonus. The affirmative determination in step S2701 means that the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning has been established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2702, a process of grasping the bonus type of this time is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on the first BB winning or the second BB winning. Then, in step S2703, a bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type ascertained in step S2702 is set. When a negative determination is made in step S2701, or after the processing of step S2703 is executed, the during-bonus effect setting processing is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the contents of the bonus effect are different between the bonus game based on the 1st BB winning and the bonus game based on the 2nd BB winning to the extent that the player can distinguish between them. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the 1st BB winning, the auxiliary display section 65 is set with a bonus effect in which live-action moving image effects are performed, and in the bonus game based on the 2nd BB winning, the animation A bonus effect is set in which the effect is performed by. Also, the sound effects (songs) output from the speaker 64 are different between the first BB and the second BB.

Both bonus effects are effects that are performed independently regardless of the progress of the game, and are set to be performed repeatedly as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a five-minute animation performance or animation performance is set as a unit performance, and when the unit performance ends after five minutes have passed since the start of the bonus performance, the unit performance is set to start again from the beginning. Note that the effect on the auxiliary display section 65 may be stopped at the screen at the end of the unit effect, and only the sound effect (song) may be repeated. Moreover, the effects on the auxiliary display section 65 may be performed in synchronization with the progress of each game, and only the sound effects (songs) may be performed independently regardless of the progress of each game.

As described above, while the bonus effect based on the 1st BB win and the bonus effect based on the 2nd BB win can be identified, the game result that triggered the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win can be identified from the bonus effect. It is set to be impossible or difficult to identify. That is, regarding the bonus effect based on the 1BB winning, for example, the bonus effect is distinguished between the case of winning the 1BB with the opportunity of winning one special reply A and the case of winning the first BB with the opportunity of winning one special reply AB. Impossible or difficult to identify, more specifically, the same bonus effect is executed. In addition, the same applies to the bonus effect based on the 2nd BB winning. It is difficult, and the same bonus effect is executed.

<Processing for continuous production>
An outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display indicating the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed (in the figure, four stages are displayed corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). It shows the daruma dropping performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the first daruma drop is successful, It indicates that the continuous production will continue). If the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect will end in the middle (for example, an effect that the daruma drop in the first step fails). ). The effect regarding whether or not to continue the continuous effect is the same in each game in the continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 68(b), at the start of the second game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining three daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the second daruma drop is successful, indicating that the continuous effect is continued). ).

As shown in FIG. 68(c), at the start of the third game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is provided (in the figure, the remaining two daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued. ).

As shown in FIG. 68(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous effect, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, one-stage daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is given as to whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the figure shows the effect that the daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous effect, the effect of the previous game is inherited and the effect of the next game is set, and the effect of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize what game the current game is from the start of the continuous effect (how many games are there until the end of the continuous effect).

Here, in each game of the continuous effect, whether or not the continuous effect continues to the next game is set so that the continuation rate increases as the game of the continuous effect progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of continuous effects, there is the highest possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous effects will be reported, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility that the discontinuation will be reported. Therefore, in the continuous effect, the player's level of interest greatly differs depending on what game the current game is in the continuous effect, and as the game progresses from the start game to the end game, the player's interest becomes high. .

Hereinafter, as the processing relating to the above-described continuous effect, the process for notifying the transition opportunity role (step S2205) and the continuous effect setting process (step S2209) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 54) will be described.

<Transition trigger notification process>
In the transition opportunity notification process, first, in step S2801, a chance effect lottery process for determining whether or not to set a chance effect as the effect of the current game is executed. In the chance production, as shown in FIG. 67(b), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Chance!!" to correspond to and display each. In addition, in the chance presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "kyui") is emitted. In the chance effect lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed so that the chance effect occurs about half the time when the transition opportunity role is won. It should be noted that the winning probability of the chance effect lottery process may differ depending on the type of transition opportunity combination, display mode, game state, set value, and the like. In subsequent step S2802, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S2801 has been won. If the game has been won, in step S2803, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of the current game.

Here, in the slot machine 10, a game mode recommended for establishing a winning of each minor combination including the shift trigger combination will be described.

Among the winable hands in each game, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon are set as the so-called small winning combinations that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. . More specifically, as already explained, the strong cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 28th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 28th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L, The 32nd to 35th minor symbol symbols are the “cherry” symbol and the “second replay” symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 28th minor symbol, the 32nd to 35th minor symbols, ie, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a strong cherry combination may be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 27th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 27th minor combination symbol, the 32nd minor combination symbol to the 32nd minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L. The 35 small combination symbols are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 27th minor symbol, 32nd minor symbol to 35th minor symbol "Cherry" symbol and "2nd replay" symbol can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a weak cherry combination may be missed.

The strong watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 30th or 41st minor combination, and the 30th or 41st minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth “red 7” symbol to the third “white bell” symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the 30th The minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 29th or 41st minor combination, and the 29th or 41st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth "red 7" symbol to the third "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, The 29th minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "Watermelon" symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon combination will be missed.

Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped while leaving the possibility of winning for any of these combinations that can be missed, the fourth "cherry" symbol to the sixth "second replay" symbol are displayed on the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation when reaching the upper stage. In the following description, the operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a failure. It is also called a mode (second operation mode).

In the chance presentation set in step S2803, it is suggested that the winning combination of this time is one of the transition trigger roles, but it is set so that it is not possible or difficult to determine which transition trigger role it is. It is That is, when the chance effect is performed, the winning combination of this game is likely to be either a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc., but it is either a strong cherry or a weak cherry. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause a dropout even if any of the transition timing combinations is won.

Also, the chance effect does not always occur in the game in which the transition opportunity role is won, but occurs on the condition that the player wins in the chance effect lottery process (step S2801). Then, it is recommended to operate the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode every game from the normal time so as not to miss the transition opportunity.

If a negative determination is made in step S2802, or if the process of step S2803 has been performed, the process advances to step S2804. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not the current starting command includes a precursor command. If no portent command is included, it is determined in step S2805 whether or not an additional command is included as the command at the start of this time. If the add-on command is not included, it is determined in step S2806 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, that is, if the lottery result is a transition trigger role such as a strong cherry or a weak watermelon, the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode or addition of the number of continuous games If the lottery has not been won and the bonus has not been won, in step S2807, the pseudo precursor mode lottery process is executed. The pseudo sign mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the sign mode, but in the sign mode, based on the completion of the number of sign games, the player is notified of a result (such as winning the challenge mode) that is advantageous to the player. The pseudo precursor mode is a mode that ends without informing the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo precursor games.

In step S2807, a table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is acquired from the table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is acquired from the counter area 183b, and a lottery is performed to determine whether the pseudo-prediction mode is to be executed. conduct. In the table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is set differently depending on the type of transition opportunity that has been won. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo omen mode is high.

In step S2808, based on the processing result of step S2807, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the pseudo precursor mode has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S2809, lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is performed. This process corresponds to step S810 and the like on the main controller 101 side, and randomly determines the number of pseudo precursor games, which is 1 out of 1 to 20, by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the portent modes based on various winnings, the number of pseudo portent games is determined to be 20 games or less. Also, in the lottery for the number of pseudo precursor games, 0 games are not selected. In the subsequent step S2810, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2809 is set in the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which 4 games are continuously produced, the continuous production is started in the game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and the result is notified in the game in which the continuous production counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when an omen mode or a pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or the pseudo omen mode is terminated after a continuous effect. Then, in step S2810, by inputting the number of pseudo-prediction games to the continuous effect counter, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo-prediction mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (remaining 4 games), the continuous effect is started. It will happen.

In step S2811, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating the pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. In the following step S2812, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the transition trigger notification process is terminated. In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2804 to S2806, or when the negative determination is made in step S2808, the transition trigger role notification processing is terminated as it is.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S2209 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included in the start command currently received. When the precursor command is included, in step S2902, the number of precursor games of the precursor mode included in the precursor command is input to the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the omen mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (remaining four games), the continuous effect is started. In step S2902, when the number of precursor games of the first game to the third game is input to the continuous effect counter, the continuous effect is started from the middle. For example, when 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2902, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the third game of the continuous effect shown in FIG. 68(c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when winning notification of the attack mode or the like is performed without going through the portent mode, the continuous effect is not executed. After performing the process of step S2902, a continuous effect flag is set in step S2903.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, or if the process of step S2903 has been executed, the process advances to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2905. Then, in step S2906, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S2907 whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2908 to acquire the present prognostic effect table from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2909, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for the indication and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the present effect table for indication is effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and the continuous effect counter is If it is 0, it is effect data indicating that the current continuous effect ends with success.

If it is determined in step S2907 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2910. In step S2910, a pseudo-prediction effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2911, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for pseudo precursor and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as If the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for the pseudo precursor is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect data indicating that the continuous effect will not continue. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect ends in failure.

Note that the effect data specified from the pseudo-prediction effect table when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3 includes data for which no continuous effect is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game in FIG. When the effect data of the first game of effect is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data of the second game of continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect is not continued to the next game in FIG. 68(b) is set. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the game in which the number of pseudo-prediction games in the pseudo-prediction mode is 0.

After performing the processing of step S2909 or step S2911, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0 in step S2912. When the continuous effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2913. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S2904, step S2906 or step S2912, or after performing the process of step S2913, this continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing is performed on the main controller 101 side based on insertion of medals as game media and starting operation of the start lever 41, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R When the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started to rotate and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop, and the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding combination is selected. A plurality of RT states with different probabilities of being replayed as a result of lottery processing are provided in a configuration in which a privilege is given, and the RT state shifts when a corresponding promotion replay or falling replay is won. Whether or not the corresponding replay wins a prize is determined by the result of the lottery and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the order of operation is performed according to the result of the lottery process, and the transition of the display mode. It is done by winning the lottery. A pressing order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to achieve the winning of the pressing order bell and obtain medals. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as a game state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to the display mode in which the operation order is notified, in the RT state, the replay probability is improved. It is possible to achieve the winning of the order bell, and to acquire a large amount of medals.

As already explained, when the player shifts to, for example, the attack mode as a mode in which a large amount of medals can be obtained, the initial number of games (50) is set, and the attack mode can be played over the initial number of games. If the additional lottery is won in the attack mode or the like, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added, and the number of games that can be played in the attack mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be obtained in the attack mode can also be increased.

<Aspect of additional notification>
In this slot machine 10, a plurality of modes are set for addition notification when the number of continuous games in the attack mode is increased. More specifically, there are a plurality of modes in which the game in which the additional notification is performed is different as the mode of the additional notification, and the additional notification is given in the game in which the additional notification occurs or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional notification occurs. (In the following description, also referred to as "immediate addition notification"), and in the case of performing an additional notification in which the game is later than the game in which the addition occurred and the notification game is determined after the fact (In the following description, " (also referred to as “post-boarding notification”) is set.

In the instant addition notification, a series of games triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred means, for example, a case in which the above-mentioned precursor mode occurs or a continuous effect occurs, etc., triggered by a game in which an addition occurs. A series of games is defined as a series of games that can continue over a plurality of games from the game in which the addition occurred. The series of games includes cases where continuous effects do not occur. The game in which the addition occurs and the game until the addition notification occurs are regarded as a series of games, and the aspect of the addition notification is also included in the immediate addition notification.

On the other hand, in the subsequent notification, the game that is determined after the game after the game in which the addition occurred is not determined in the game in which the addition occurred, but for example, just before the end of the attack mode. This is different from the series of games in the above-described immediate boarding notification in that the notification timing is determined ex post facto as the attack mode progresses, such as in a game. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred.

In addition, as an effect mode of the additional notification, as described with reference to FIG. 58, in addition to the mode in which the additional effect is generated by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64, the additional effect is accompanied by the rotation effect of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The manner in which the production occurs is also set.

Hereinafter, each aspect of the additional notification will be described including the processing for performing the additional notification.

<Additional notification processing>
The processing for addition notification is performed by the main controller 101 in step S919 of the second special combination processing (FIG. 33), step S1006 of the third special combination processing (FIG. 34), step S1104 of the special zone processing, and the like. This is the process to be performed. That is, this is a process executed by the main controller 101 after winning the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode and adding the number of games. In the addition notification processing, settings are made for the game in which the addition notification is to be performed, and when the addition notification is to be performed in the game, the execution timing of the addition notification is set.

An overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

The immediate entry notification is to first notify a part of the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval ZG as the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval. An effect is performed to notify the number of games of . Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is a display remaining number counter HG, and the number of games to be notified later is a post-addition counter BG, the number of advantageous section remaining games ZG is post-addition to the display remaining number counter HG. equal to the total value with the counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is completed, and the post-loading counter BG is not decremented unless the post-loading notification occurs even if the game is completed.

As shown in FIG. 70, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (remaining game number display ZGP) is set to a predetermined number (this modification) while the attack mode is completed. In the example, when 1) is reached, that is, when the display remaining number counter HG managed by the main controller 101 reaches a predetermined number (1), the post-loading notification is generated. In the add-on notification, for example, similarly to the case of the add-on notification effect, it is notified that the number of games (150 in the figure) corresponding to the add-on counter BG (150) has been added. As a result, the post-loading counter BG managed by the main controller 101 is subtracted by the reported amount (becomes 0 in the drawing), and the display remaining number counter HG managed by the main control unit 101 is reported by the post-loading report. The remaining game number display ZGP on the auxiliary display section 65 also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 in the figure after completing one game).

As described above, when the additional winning is selected, a difference may occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. On the other hand, when the immediate boarding notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. In this embodiment, the add-on counter BG is referenced when the add-on win is made, and whether the add-on notification is selected or the immediate add-on notification is selected depends on the current value of the add-on counter BG.

That is, in the add-on notification process, as shown in FIG. 69, first, in step S3001, the process of grasping the add-on counter BG in the various counter areas 106e is performed. In subsequent step S3002, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether the current addition notification should be a post-addition notification or an immediate addition notification. In the notification game lottery process, a post-boarding lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether post-boarding notification is to be performed according to the value of the post-boarding counter BG grasped in step S3001.

As shown in FIG. 71, the add-on lottery table is set so that the probability of selecting the add-on notification is different depending on the value of the add-on counter BG and the type of the specific combination that triggered the add-on win. there is For example, at the time of addition triggered by a strong cherry, if the subsequent addition counter BG is less than 30, the subsequent addition notification is selected at 20% (the immediate addition notification is selected at 80%). When the add-on counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the add-on notification is selected at 10%, and when the add-on counter BG is 100 or more, the add-on notification is selected at 5%, so that the value of the add-on counter BG is large. It is set so that the selection rate of the post-boarding notification becomes lower as the number increases.

In addition, as the type of specific role that triggered the additional winning, there are various types of rare roles (low probability trigger result, low probability result) with relatively low winning probability such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. So-called normal roles (high-probability trigger result, high-probability result) with a relatively high winning probability, such as push-order replay and various push-order bells, have a higher pick-up selection rate when the pick-up counter BG value is small. is set. More specifically, in notification game lottery processing triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, if the post-addition counter BG is less than 30, the post-addition notification is selected with a probability of 100%.

As described above, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the addition notification after the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, basically, as the game in the advantageous section, that is, the game in the attack mode, progresses, the value of the trailing counter BG often increases. In the early stages, the value of the trailing counter BG is likely to be 0 or a small value.

That is, when an additional winning is made at the beginning of the attack mode game, there is a high probability that the subsequent addition notification is selected, especially when an additional winning is triggered by a normal combination that is not a rare combination such as a push order replay or a push order bell. , if it is the beginning of the attack mode, the post-boarding notification is always selected. As a result, after the start of the attack mode, the trailing counter BG tends to accumulate relatively early.

After the notification game lottery process is executed in step S3002, it is determined in step S3003 whether or not the player wins the additional prize. If the additional winning game is not won and the immediate addition notification is selected, in step S3004, a process of adding the current additional winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Then, in step S3005, notification timing setting processing is executed for setting at which timing the additional notification is to be performed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process of setting at what timing in the current game the additional notification is to be performed.

The addition notification is set so that the execution timing differs according to the number of addition games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table of FIG. 72, as the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of stop operation, reel 1, reel 2, and reel 3. Then, the time of the stop operation of the first reel, the time of the stop operation of the second reel, and the time of the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of the operating mode of the stop switches 42-44. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position arranged on the frontmost side to an operating position arranged on the farthest side. In the state of being arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are lowered. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that the stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Also, the stop switches 42 to 44 are biased toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released and the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed, ie, the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has ended.

The addition notification is set so that it can occur both when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop ON and when the stop is OFF. In other words, in a game in which an additional notification occurs, the additional effect can occur not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the addition notification execution timing table, when the number of games to be added is relatively small, for example, 5 games to 10 games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , the timing of the stop OFF operation of the first reel is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 30%, and each is selected. In this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation of each reel, and the operation on the rear side is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of games with a relatively large number of games to be added is, for example, 100 games or more, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected. is performed 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the third reel ( When all reels are stopped) is 45%, and each is selected. In this case as well, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the rear side is relatively easier to be selected.

In other words, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the additional notification is more likely to occur during the stop OFF operation than during the stop ON operation of each reel. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most likely to be selected, the second reel stop operation is the second most likely to be selected, and the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is the least likely to be selected during operation.

In terms of the relationship with the number of additional games, the greater the number of additional games, the more likely it is that the third reel stop OFF operation will be selected. In other words, when the player is aware of the occurrence of the additional notification in advance, if the additional notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is greatly affected by the occurrence of the addition of a large number of games. It is considered that the third reel stop OFF operation is executed while expecting.

In step S3005, the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game is set based on the execution timing table of the additional notification. After that, the process for addition notification is terminated. In this case, the information that the current addition is notified in the current game as an immediate addition notification, and the information regarding the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game are executed following the addition notification processing. In addition command setting processing (step S920, step S1007, step S1105, etc.), the addition command is set. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command including these information sets the add-on notification effect based on these information (FIG. 56).

If it is determined in step S3003 that the post-addition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S3006. In step S3006, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the post-addition counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S3007, after performing the process of setting the post-add flag in the various flag storage area 106d, the add-on notification process is terminated.

The post-boarding flag is set by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 to indicate that the post-boarding notification should be performed when the value of the post-boarding counter BG is greater than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value. It is a flag for grasping. Further, in this case, in the addition command setting process executed subsequent to the addition notification process, information indicating that the addition notification will not occur in the current game is set in the addition command. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command including this information performs control so that the add-on notification is not generated in the current game ( FIG. 56 , step S2403: NO).

<Post-loading notification processing>
Next, the post-loading notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The post-addition notification process is a process executed in step S1402 of the winning result handling process (FIG. 44) in main controller 101. FIG.

First, in step S3101, it is determined whether the current display mode is one of attack mode, VB mode, and special zone. As already explained, it is possible to determine which display mode is by grasping the corresponding flag. If it is not in these modes, that is, if it is in the normal mode or the challenge mode, the post-boarding notification process is terminated as it is. If the mode is any one of the attack mode, VB mode, and special zone, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the player is in the bonus state. In the case of either the BB state based on the first BB or the second BB or the CB state based on the CB, the post-addition notification processing is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the process advances to step S3103 to perform subtraction processing of the display remaining number counter HG. In this case, in step S3103, a command including the value after subtraction of the display remaining number counter HG is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received such a command controls the auxiliary display section 65 so as to update the display of the number of remaining games ZGP. The display control device 81 may be provided with a counter or the like corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG, and the display control device 81 may perform processing for updating the remaining game number display ZGP.

In step S3104, as a result of processing in step S3103, it is determined whether or not the display remaining number counter HG has reached a predetermined value (1) that triggers the post-addition notification. If it does not reach the predetermined value, the post-addition notification process is terminated. If it reaches the predetermined value, it is determined in step S3105 whether or not the post-loading flag is set. If the post-boarding flag is not set, the post-boarding notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3105 that the post-loading flag is set, the process advances to step S3106. In step S3106, the value of the trailing counter BG is grasped. Then, in step S3107, a process of setting an add-on command is performed so that an add-on notification corresponding to the value of the add-on counter BG is performed. The add-on command in this case includes information that an add-on notification is performed in the game and information that an add-on of the number of games corresponding to the value of the add-on counter BG is performed. It should be noted that it is also possible to add a part of the post-loading counter BG. It is preferable to set the information that is performed in the superposition command.

In the following step S3108, a process of subtracting the value corresponding to the number of additional games set in the additional command in step S3107 from the additional counter BG is performed. Then, in step S3109, it is determined whether or not the post-loading counter BG has become 0 as a result of the processing in step S3108. If it is not 0, the post-addition notification process is terminated. If it is 0, the process for clearing the post-loading flag is performed in step S3110, and then the post-loading notification process is terminated.

As described above, by transmitting the add-on command to the display control device 81 in the add-on notification processing in the winning result handling processing, the display control device 81 executes the step in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 59) In S2609 or step S2619, a process for performing an additional notification effect is executed in the process for an additional notification at the time of full stop. As a result, in the game in which the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value, the additional information is executed as the additional information after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. Therefore, in a game in which the remaining number counter HG for display has reached a predetermined value (1), regardless of the winning result of the game, while expecting that the additional notification (post-addition notification) will be performed, A stop OFF operation is performed.

Incidentally, the third reel stop OFF operation of the timing of the additional information selected in the case of performing the immediate information can be different timing from the time of full stop in the case of performing the subsequent information. That is, the time of the third reel stop OFF operation is the timing when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed, and if the corresponding reel may stop at that timing, the timing is slightly delayed due to the slip control. In some cases, the corresponding reel stops. Therefore, the third reel stop OFF operation can be slightly earlier than the timing at which all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. On the other hand, the execution timing of the post-addition notification set in the post-addition notification processing in the winning result handling processing is the timing after the winning result handling processing is executed, and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are complete. It is the timing after the medal is paid out (after the payout determination process of step S413 is executed) if a minor win has occurred. Therefore, the timing at which the post-boarding notification is executed can be a timing later than the third reel stop OFF operation in the immediate boarding notification.

<Rotation effect processing>
Next, as one type of effect mode when the additional notification is performed, the processing for performing the additional notification accompanied by the rotation effect of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing. The rotation effect process is a process executed in step S401 of the reel control process (FIG. 18) in the main controller 101. FIG. In the rotation effect processing, based on the rotation effect flags set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, a process for executing the corresponding rotation effect is performed. In this embodiment, a pseudo freeze flag, a first freeze flag, a second freeze flag, and a third freeze flag are provided as the flags for rotation effects. Therefore, first, an overview of rotation effects (various freeze effects) corresponding to these freeze flags will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG.

Here, the freeze effect means that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (revolving bodies) are started to rotate based on the operation of the start lever 41 (start operation means), and the stop switches 42 to 44 (stop operation means) are operated. The normal game action is to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on , and the effect is to limit the start or progress of the normal game action. More specifically, the freeze effect is based on the operation of the start lever 41, the rotation start control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the operation of the start lever 41, the operation of the stop switches 42-44, and the operation of the stop switches 42-44. This is an effect in which at least one of the rotation stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not executed (limited).

In this embodiment, the freeze effect corresponding to each freeze flag is set as a spin effect that is performed when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. In this embodiment, the freeze effect is set to be triggered by a part of the games won in the ninth replay (special reply A). When the freeze effect occurs, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the ninth re-game winning is established as a game result, and a re-game is given as a privilege based on the ninth re-game winning, and the automatic betting process is started. After completion, that is, when the starting operation of the start lever 41 is performed in a situation where the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped (ta1, tb1), first, the normal rotation direction (forward direction, downward direction, rotation direction) by a predetermined angle (ta1 to ta2, tb1 to tb2). In this embodiment, the predetermined angle is the angle by which one pattern is displaced by one frame. ) is set as an angle (approximately 15 degrees). After rotating in the reverse direction by a predetermined angle, the state of being temporarily stopped at that position is maintained for a predetermined period (about 1 sec) (ta2 to ta3, tb2 to tb3). As described above, since the predetermined angle is set to be smaller than the angle at which one pattern is shifted by one frame, each pattern is arranged at a position shifted from the effective line when the game is paused. By doing so, even if the player misses the reverse rotation, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the shifted state.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of angles may be provided as the predetermined angle, and the angle that is likely to be selected may differ depending on the effect. Further, a plurality of types of periods in which the angle is maintained at a predetermined angle may be provided, and the periods that are likely to be selected may differ according to the presentation. Furthermore, these angles and periods may be combined and applied to effects, or may be configured to pause at a plurality of types of angles in stages.

If the pseudo-freeze flag corresponding to the pseudo-freeze effect is set in the freeze effect, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76(a), after rotating backward by the predetermined angle and pausing, a predetermined period of time After the elapse of, it rotates forward and shifts to normal rotation control (from ta3). After that, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to be stopped based on the stopping operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (ta4), and the symbols corresponding to the game result of the current game are stopped on the activated line (ta5). ).

On the other hand, if one of the first freeze flag, the second freeze flag, and the third freeze flag corresponding to various 7 matching freeze effects is set among the freeze effects, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 (b) Then, after rotating in the reverse direction by the predetermined angle and temporarily stopping, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the wheel is further rotated in the reverse direction (tb3 to tb4), and then temporarily stopped in a state in which the “red 7” symbols are aligned on the predetermined line. (tb4-tb5). After that, it rotates forward and shifts to normal rotation control (from tb5), and based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (tb6), the symbols corresponding to the game results of the current game stop on the effective line. (tb7).

In the various 7 matching freeze effects, the expected number of additional games is set to differ depending on the line where the "red 7" symbols are aligned and paused. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a mid-stage red 7 alignment freeze effect in which the "red 7" symbols are aligned on the middle line L2 and temporarily stop, and a right rising red 7 symbol in which the "red 7" symbols are aligned on the right rising line L5 and are temporarily stopped. A matching freeze effect and an upper red 7 matching freeze effect in which the “red 7” symbols are aligned on the upper line L1 and paused are set, and the expectation for the number of additional games is the highest for the upper red 7 matching freeze effect. It is set to be the highest, the right rising red 7 aligned freeze effect is next highest, and the middle row red 7 aligned freeze effect is set to be the lowest. In addition, the middle row red 7 aligned freeze effect is executed by setting the first freeze flag, the right rising red 7 aligned freeze effect is executed by setting the second freeze flag, and the upper row red 7 aligned freeze effect is executed It is executed by setting the third freeze flag.

In the rotation effect process, first, in step S3201, a process of subtracting 1 from the freeze counter FC provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The freeze counter FC is a counter for the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 to grasp after how many games the freeze effect will be generated from the game in which the freeze effect has been determined. More specifically, the CPU 102 controls to generate a freeze effect when the freeze counter FC becomes 0. For example, when 1 is input to the freeze counter FC, it is determined to perform the freeze effect. After that, when the subtraction process (step S3201) is performed once, the freeze effect is generated. In this case, for example, if 1 is input to the freeze counter FC in the process prior to the rotation effect process, such as the lottery process in the current game, the freeze counter FC becomes 0 in the current game, and the current game A freeze effect will occur. Further, for example, when 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in the processing prior to the rotation effect processing such as the lottery processing in the current game, the game after one game, that is, the next game is started with the current game as a trigger. Then, the freeze counter FC becomes 0, and the freeze effect is generated in the next game. As described above, the freeze counter FC is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the game in which the freeze effect is to be executed in a series of games triggered by the game in which the freeze effect is determined.

After the freeze counter FC is decremented in step S3201, the freeze counter FC becomes 0 in step S3202 and it is determined whether or not the current game should generate a freeze effect. When the freeze counter FC becomes 0, the process advances to step S3203 to determine whether or not a pseudo-freeze flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. When the pseudo-freeze flag is set, the process of clearing the pseudo-freeze flag is executed in step S3204, and in step S3205, the pseudo-freeze effect is set as the rotating effect of the current game. do. In this case, the main controller 101 individually controls the stepping motors connected to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to execute a pseudo-freeze effect.

If it is determined in step S3203 that the pseudo freeze flag has not been set, it is determined in step S3206 whether or not the first freeze flag has been set. When the first freeze flag is set, the process of clearing the first freeze flag is executed in step S3207, and in step S3208, as the rotation effect of the game, the middle stage red 7 aligned freeze effect is performed. set to take place. In this case, the main controller 101 individually controls the stepping motors connected to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, thereby executing a middle stage red 7 aligned freeze effect.

If it is determined in step S3206 that the first freeze flag has not been set, it is determined in step S3209 whether or not the second freeze flag has been set. When the second freeze flag is set, the process of clearing the second freeze flag is executed in step S3210, and in step S3211, as the rotation effect of the current game, the right rising red 7 matching freeze effect is performed. be set to take place. In this case, the main controller 101 individually controls the stepping motors connected to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to execute a right-rising red 7-aligned freeze effect.

If it is determined in step S3209 that the second freeze flag has not been set, it is determined in step S3212 whether or not the third freeze flag has been set. If the third freeze flag is set, the process of clearing the third freeze flag is executed in step S3213, and in step S3214, as the rotation effect of the game, the top red 7 aligned freeze effect is performed. set to take place. In this case, the main controller 101 individually controls the stepping motors connected to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, thereby executing the upper red 7 aligned freeze effect.

After executing the processing of step S3205, step S3208, step S3211 and step S3214, or after making a negative determination in step S3202 or step S3212, another rotation effect setting processing is executed in step S3215. In the other rotation effect setting process, various rotation effects provided in addition to the above freeze effects (for example, effects in which the rotation start timings of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are different, and rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R Make settings so that a freeze effect, etc., performed without starting ) will be performed. After executing the process of step S3215, the rotation effect process is terminated.

As described above, various freeze effects are set as one aspect of the effect mode when the additional notification is performed. In this embodiment, these various freeze effects are configured to occur during the bonus based on the winning of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

<4th Special Win Process>
As the lottery process relating to the instruction function during the bonus, the fourth special combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The fourth special combination process is a process executed in step S710 of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31) in the main controller 101, and is executed on the condition that the player is in a bonus state, not a carryover state. .

In step S3301, it is determined whether or not the current game result is the second winning combination in BB. If it is the second winning combination in BB, the first pseudo-effect processing is executed in step S3302, and then the fourth special winning combination processing ends. If it is not the 2nd BB hand, it is determined in step S3303 whether or not it is the 3rd BB hand. If it is the 3rd winning combination during BB, the processing for instruction lottery during BB is executed in step S3304, and then the 4th special winning combination processing ends. If it is not the 3rd winning combination in BB, ie, if the current game result is the 1st winning combination in BB, the process for the 4th specific combination is terminated.

As already explained, in the bonus state, it is possible to win the 1st BB hand, the 2nd BB hand and the 3rd BB hand (FIG. 28). The first hand in BB is the Bell hand, and the second hand in BB and the third hand in BB are Replay. In more detail about the 2nd hand in BB and the 3rd hand in BB, the 2nd hand in BB is the result of winning the 9th replay (special reply A), and the 3rd hand in BB is the 9th replay ( Special reply A) and the 10th replay (special reply B) are the game results of winning. In the fourth specific combination process, if the game result is that the ninth regame is won, either the first pseudo effect process or the BB instruction lottery process is executed, of which the tenth regame is won. If not, that is, if it is the 2nd winning combination in BB, the first pseudo performance process is executed, and if the tenth replay is won, that is, if it is the 3rd winning combination during BB, the instruction lottery process for BB is executed. It is a process to The first pseudo effect processing and the BB instruction lottery processing will be described below.

<Processing for first pseudo effect>
The first pseudo effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3401, a process of grasping the values of the out-of-order counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The loss counter is a counter to which addition processing can be performed when the lottery relating to the instruction function is not won in a non-bonus state, that is, in a normal game state, various RT states, or the like. Also, the loss counter is reset to an initial value (0) by an initialization process (not shown) at the end of the bonus state (BB state). That is, the loss counter can be said to be an index indicating how many times the lottery relating to the instruction function was not won in the game between the bonuses.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, as the lottery related to the instruction function, the lottery for transition to VB mode or special zone, attack, which is executed in the first special combination process, the second special combination process, and the third special combination process. Mode addition lottery and the like are set, and pseudo-addition notification processing is provided as processing when the lottery related to these instruction functions is not won (step S929 in FIG. 33, step S1016 in FIG. 34). ). As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79, in the pseudo-additional notification process, in step S3501, the process of grasping the trigger combination that has resulted in non-winning in various lotteries this time is performed. Then, in step S3502, the addition point of the above-mentioned outlier counter is grasped. As shown in FIG. 80(a), the various table storage area 105a is provided with a loss counter table, and the loss counter table is assigned points to be added to the loss counter according to the lottery trigger. The winning counter table is basically set such that the lower the winning probability in each game, the more points are added. For example, if a lottery for various instruction functions is not won with a strong cherry as a trigger, 10 points are added to the loss counter, and if a lottery for various instruction functions is not won with a weak cherry as a trigger, 1 point is added. Points are allocated so that points are added to a miss counter. In addition, it is set so that more points are given to a game result that does not overlap with a bonus than to a duplicate role. 1 point is set. After the addition point of the loss counter is grasped in step S3502, the loss counter addition processing is performed in step S3503, and then the pseudo-addition notification processing is terminated. That is, more points are accumulated in the losing counter as the number of situations in which the lottery related to various instruction functions is not won is increased. The more points are accumulated as the number of scenes in which the lottery is not won, the more points are accumulated.

Returning to the description of the first pseudo-effect processing, after executing the processing of grasping the value of the out-counter accumulated points in the above-described pseudo-additional notification processing in step S3401, pseudo-freezing in step S3402 Execute the lottery process. In the pseudo-freeze lottery process, a pseudo-freeze lottery table is obtained from the various table storage areas 105a, and a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the pseudo-freeze effect based on the out-counter grasped in step S3401. The pseudo-freeze lottery table, as shown in FIG. 80(b), is set such that the larger the value of the out-counter, the higher the probability of winning the pseudo-freeze effect.

After executing the pseudo-freeze lottery process in step S3402, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-freeze is won in step S3403. If the pseudo-freeze is won, the pseudo-freeze flag is set in step S3404. Thereafter, in step S3405, the process of inputting 2 to the freeze counter FC is performed, and then the first pseudo effect process is terminated. As a result, a pseudo-freeze effect is generated at the start of reel rotation in the game next to the current game. When the pseudo-freeze is not won, the process for the first pseudo effect is terminated as it is.

In this way, the game result of the game before transitioning to the bonus state can contribute to the presence or absence of the freeze effect during the bonus state. By doing so, it is possible not only to enhance the performance effect during the bonus state, but also to make the player aware that the timing and situation of transitioning to the bonus state will affect some kind of lottery during the bonus state. Become.

<Processing for instruction lottery during BB>
Next, the BB instruction lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the instruction lottery process during BB is a process executed in a game in which both the 9th replay and the 10th replay are won in the bonus state (game in which the 3rd hand during BB is won). is.

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the current bonus is a bonus based on a game result with a set difference in winning probability. As shown in FIG. 36, strong cherry duplication 1, weak cherry duplication 1, strong watermelon duplication 1, weak watermelon duplication 1, chance A duplication 1, chance B duplication 1, middle bell duplication 1, special reply A duplication 1 and single No. The 1st BB when one of the 1BBs is won, and the 2nd BB when either the special reply A duplication 2 or the single 2nd BB is won are bonuses based on the game results with no set difference. On the other hand, the 1st BB when winning Tokurip AB duplication 1, strong cherry duplication 2, weak cherry duplication 2, strong watermelon duplication 2, weak watermelon duplication 2, chance A duplication 2, chance B duplication 2, middle bell duplication 2 , The second BB in the case of winning either the special reply A duplication 2 or the special reply AB duplication 2 is a bonus based on the game result with a set difference. That is, even in the same 1st BB and 2nd BB, whether or not the bonus is based on the game result with the set difference differs depending on the winning opportunity.

As already explained, in the slot machine 10, various lotteries related to instruction functions are performed based on game results with no set difference. Therefore, during the bonus based on the game result with no setting difference, various lotteries related to the instruction function can be executed. It is configured to restrict the execution of In the following explanation, depending on the presence or absence of a lottery related to the instruction function, the bonus based on the game result with no setting difference is also referred to as a non-limiting bonus, and the bonus based on the game result with a setting difference is subject to restrictions. Also called a bonus.

As described above, even the same 1st BB or 2nd BB may be a restricted bonus or a non-restricted bonus. mode), it is not possible to distinguish between a restricted bonus and a non-restricted bonus. However, the ratio between the restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus is different between the 1st BB and the 2nd BB. (about 1 in 496), the 1 BB restricted bonus wins about 1 in 1310 (about 38% of the 1 BB), and the unrestricted bonus wins about 1 in 800 (1 BB) 62% of 1BB), while the 2BB restricted bonus is won at about 1/1010 (about 49% of the 2BB), and the unrestricted bonus is won at about 1/978 ( about 51% of the 2nd BB). In other words, the first BB has a higher ratio of non-restricted bonuses than the second BB, and the first BB is preferable to the player from the viewpoint that the lottery for the command function is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3601 and the current bonus is a non-restricted bonus, it is determined in step S3602 whether the display mode before transition to the bonus state is the normal mode or the challenge mode. In step S3602, even if the display mode before the transition to the bonus state is the normal mode or the challenge mode, if the attack mode winning flag is set, that is, the simultaneous winning of the bonus and the transition lottery to the attack mode or the like is performed. If so, a negative determination is made.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, then in step S3603, the mid-BB mode transition process is executed, and then the mid-BB instruction lottery process ends. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S3602, then in step S3604, the processing for addition during BB is executed, and then the processing for instruction lottery during BB is ended. Also, when it is determined in step S3601 that the current bonus is a restricted bonus, in step S3605 the second pseudo effect processing is executed, and then the BB instruction lottery processing is terminated.

The middle BB mode transition processing, the middle BB addition processing, and the second pseudo effect processing will be described below.

<BB middle mode transition processing>
The middle BB mode transition processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3701, mode transition lottery processing is performed. In the mode transition lottery process, the mode transition table during BB stored in the various table storage area 105a is obtained, and the mode transition lottery is performed. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the mid-BB mode transition table shows the probability of winning the mode transition lottery and the transition destination at the time of winning according to the current display mode, the difference between the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and the value of the losing counter. display modes are set differently.

More specifically, for example, in the mode transition lottery executed in the bonus state based on the winning of the first BB that transitioned to the normal mode, if the value of the loss counter is 5 or less, the transition to the challenge mode is performed with a probability of 5%, It has a 1% probability of transitioning to attack mode, and a 0.1% probability of transitioning to super attack mode. Similarly, even in the bonus state based on the winning of the 1st BB that has shifted to the normal mode, if the value of the loss counter is 21 or more, there is a 10% probability of shifting to the challenge mode, and a 5% probability of shifting to the attack mode. 1% chance to switch to Super Attack Mode. In the bonus state based on the winning of the first BB during the challenge mode, even if the value of the loss counter is the same, the transition winning rate of each mode is higher than that in the normal mode, for example, the loss counter is 21. In the case above, there is a 20% probability of transition to the attack mode, and a 10% probability of transition to the super attack mode.

The bonus state based on winning the 2nd BB has a higher transition winning rate in each mode than the bonus state based on winning the 1st BB even if the loss counter value is the same, for example, when the loss counter is 5 or less in the normal mode. , there is a 10% probability of transitioning to challenge mode, a 5% probability of transitioning to attack mode, and a 1% probability of transitioning to super attack mode.

Therefore, if you win the 1st BB or the 2nd BB in a situation where many points are accumulated in the loss counter, the probability of winning the mode transition lottery is higher, and if you win the 2nd BB than the 1st BB, the probability is higher. , The probability of winning the mode transition lottery is high. However, as described above, the 2nd BB has a higher percentage of restricted bonuses than the 1st BB, and the possibility of the mode transition lottery being performed (the process for mode transition during the BB being performed) is higher in the 1st BB.

In the present embodiment, in one bonus state, the result of the mode transition lottery is reflected when the next instruction lottery process during BB is activated (when the 3rd combination during BB is won). For example, when a lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won in the mode transition lottery in the bonus state shifted to the normal mode, the mode transition lottery from the challenge mode is executed in the next BB mode transition process. Further, when the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won in the mode transition lottery in the bonus state that transitioned to the normal mode, in the next BB instruction lottery process, a negative determination is made in step S3602, and the BB medium add-on is determined. Processing is performed.

After the mode transition lottery process is executed in step S3701, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not a mode transition lottery has been won. If no lottery for transition to any mode is won, the process proceeds to step S3703, after setting the pseudo-freeze flag, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S3704, End the process. In this case, a pseudo-freeze effect occurs at the start of rotation of the game following the current game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the process advances to step S3705 to determine whether or not the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode has been won. If the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode is won, in step S3706, a process of setting the first freeze flag is executed.

At subsequent step S3707, a process of setting a challenge mode winning flag is executed, and at step S3708, a process of setting the number of games in the precursor mode to 0 is executed. In this case, when the bonus state ends, a challenge mode winning notification effect is generated, and the challenge mode is started from the next game in the bonus state. Then, in step S3704, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC, and then the mid-BB mode transition processing ends. In this case, when the rotation of the game next to the current game starts, a middle stage red 7 aligned freeze effect is generated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3705, the process advances to step S3709 to determine whether or not a lottery for switching to the attack mode has been won. If the move lottery to the attack mode is won, in step S3710, the process of setting the second freeze flag is executed.

In subsequent step S3711, a process of setting an attack notification flag is executed. In this case, it becomes possible to establish the first promotion replay prize after the end of the bonus state, and the shift to the attack mode occurs early. If a challenge mode flag or a challenge mode winning flag is set in step S3711, these flags are cleared. After that, in step S3704, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC, and then the process for transitioning to the middle BB mode ends. In this case, when the rotation of the game next to the current game starts, a freeze effect with seven reds rising to the right is generated.

A negative determination in step S3709 means that the lottery for switching to the super attack mode has been won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3712 to set the third freeze flag, and in step S3713 to set the attack notification flag and in step S3714 to set the special zone notification flag, respectively, and freeze in step S3704. After inputting 2 to the counter FC, the mid-BB mode transition processing is terminated. In this case, at the start of rotation of the game next to the current game, a freeze effect with 7 reds on the upper row occurs, and after the bonus state ends, it is possible to establish the first and second promotion replay winning prizes and BAR replay winning prizes. , the transition to super attack mode occurs early.

<Additional processing in BB>
The process for adding in BB will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3801, a lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is executed. In the game number addition lottery process, the BB middle addition lottery table stored in the various table storage area 105a is acquired, and the game number addition lottery is performed. As shown in FIG. 83(b), the BB middle extra lottery table is set so that the extra winning probability and the extra game number at the time of winning are different depending on the difference between the 1st BB and the 2nd BB and the value of the losing counter. .

More specifically, for example, in the bonus state based on the winning of the 1st BB, if the loss counter value is 5 or less, there is a 20% chance of winning 30 games, and a 15% chance of winning 50 games. Then, with a probability of 5%, you will be elected to add 100G. Similarly, even in the bonus state based on the winning of the 1st BB, if the loss counter value is 21 or more, there is a 40% chance of winning the additional 30 games, and a 30% chance of winning the additional 50 games. 20% chance of winning 100 extra games. In other words, if the bonus state is entered while many points have been accumulated in the loss counter, the odds of winning are higher, and the number of winning games is greater.

Further, when the first BB and the second BB are compared, the second BB is set so that the additional winning probability is higher and the number of additional games at the time of winning is also larger. For example, in the bonus state based on winning the 2nd BB, if the loss counter value is 21 or more, there is a 10% chance that you will win 30 games, a 40% chance that you will win 50 games, and a 50% chance. Win 100 games with a probability of winning.

After the game number addition lottery process is executed in step S3801, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not an addition lottery is won. If not winning, a pseudo-freeze flag is set in step S3803, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S3804, and the process for adding in the BB ends. In this case, a pseudo-freeze effect occurs when the rotation of the game following the current game starts.

If it is determined in step S3802 that the additional lottery has been won, the process advances to step S3805. In step S3805, it is determined whether or not the number of games to be added is 30 games. If it is the 30th game, in step S3806, a process of setting the first freeze flag is executed. If the determination in step S3805 is negative, it is determined in step S3807 whether or not the number of games to be added is 50 games. If the number of games is 50, then in step S3808 a second freeze flag is set. A negative determination in step S3807 means that the number of games to be added is 100. In this case, in step S3809, a process of setting a third freeze flag is executed.

After executing any of steps S3806, S3808, and S3809, the process advances to step S3810. In step S3810, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is executed. More specifically, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the attack mode continuation number G3 is executed. In the subsequent step S3811, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the display remaining number counter HG is executed. Then, in step S3812, an add-on command is set, and in step S3804, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC, and then the BB add-on process ends.

In this case, when the first freeze flag is set in step S3806, as shown in FIG. 85(a), a middle stage red 7 aligned freeze effect is generated as the effect at the start of rotation of the game next to the current game. After that, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, an additional notification effect of 30 games is generated as the all-stop effect. Further, when the second freeze flag is set in step S3808, as shown in FIG. 85(b), a freeze effect with 7 reds rising to the right is generated as the effect at the start of rotation of the game next to the current game. After that, when all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, an additional notification effect of 50 games is generated as the all-stop effect. Then, when the third freeze flag is set in step S3809, as shown in FIG. 85(c), a freeze effect with 7 reds on the upper row is generated as the effect at the start of rotation of the game next to the current game. After that, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, an additional notification effect of 100 games is generated as the all-stop effect. It should be noted that when each red 7 matching freeze effect occurs, a display effect corresponding to the red 7 matching freeze effect (for example, a display of a soldier character raising a roar) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Occur.

<Second Pseudo Effect Processing>
The second pseudo effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second pseudo effect process is a process executed in a game in which the 3rd winning combination in the BB is won in the restricted bonus.

In the second pseudo effect processing, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the bonus is shifted to the normal mode or the challenge mode. Since the display mode transition lottery is not performed during the restricted bonus, the attack mode win flag is set ex post facto as in the process of step S3602, so that the result of the determination process differs in the same bonus state. No event occurs.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S3901, the first pseudo effect processing is executed in step S3902, and then the second pseudo effect processing is terminated. The first pseudo-effect processing is the same as the processing in FIG. 78, and performs processing for generating a pseudo-freeze effect according to the value of the loss counter accumulated before the transition to the bonus.

If the determination in step S3901 is negative, it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the post-loading flag is set. If the post-loading flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3902, and the pseudo-freeze effect processing is executed in the first pseudo-effect processing. If the add-on flag is set, the process for pseudo add-on during BB is executed in step S3904, and then the process for the second pseudo effect is terminated.

<Processing for pseudo-addition during BB>
The processing for pseudo-addition during BB will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

As described above, the pseudo add-on processing during BB is when the display mode is attack mode or VB mode, and when the add-on flag is set in the special zone and the bonus is shifted to the restricted bonus, This is executed when the 3rd role in BB is won during the bonus. In the pseudo-addition processing during BB, regarding the addition lottery whose execution is restricted in the restricted bonus, the processing for performing a pseudo-addition notification effect without executing the addition lottery is set.

That is, in step S4001, a process of grasping the value of the post-loading counter BG is executed. As already explained, the add-on counter BG corresponds to the number of add-on games for which an increase in the number of games in the attack mode has occurred but no notification to that effect has been made. In the subsequent step S4002, it is determined whether or not the trailing counter BG ascertained in step S4001 is less than 30. If it is less than 30, in step S4003, after executing the first pseudo effect processing, the BB pseudo add-on processing is terminated. As described above, in the first pseudo effect processing, the pseudo freeze effect processing based on the losing counter is performed.

If it is determined in step S4002 that the post-loading counter BG is equal to or greater than 30, then in step S4004 a notification game number lottery process is executed. In the notification game number lottery process, a pseudo add-on notification effect (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo add-on notification effect) is performed based on the first pseudo add-on table acquired from the various table storage area 105a and the post-add counter BG. lottery for the number of reported games. In the first pseudo add-on table, as shown in FIG. 88(a), 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games are set as the number of informing games in the pseudo add-on informing effect. If the value of the post-addition counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the 30th game is selected with a probability of 100%. If the value of the trailing counter BG is 200 or more, 30 games are selected with a probability of 10%, 50 games with a probability of 40%, and 100 games with a probability of 50%. That is, the larger the value of the add-on counter BG, the larger the number of games notified in the pseudo add-on notification effect. It is associated with the number of games.

After the informing game number lottery process is executed in step S4004, the process proceeds to step S4005. In step S4005, it is determined whether or not notification of 30 games has been selected in the notification game number lottery process. If 30 games have been selected, in step S4006, a process of setting a first freeze flag is executed. Then, in step S4007, a process of subtracting 30 from the post-loading counter BG is executed, and in step S4008, a process of adding 30 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4005, the process advances to step S4009. In step S4009, it is determined whether or not the notification of 50 games has been selected in the notification game number lottery process. If 50 games have been selected, a process of setting a second freeze flag is executed in step S4010. Then, in step S4011, a process of subtracting 50 from the post-loading counter BG is executed, and in step S4012, a process of adding 50 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

A negative determination in step S4009 means that notification of 100 games has been selected in the notification game number lottery process. In this case, in step S4013, processing for setting the third freeze flag is executed. Then, in step S4014, the process of subtracting 100 from the post-loading counter BG is executed, and in step S4015, the process of adding 100 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

After executing any one of steps S4008, S4012 and S4015, the process proceeds to step S4016. In step S4016, a process of inputting 2 to the freeze counter FC is executed. As a result, when the first freeze flag is set, a middle stage red 7-aligned freeze effect occurs at the start of rotation of the next game, and when the second freeze flag is set, the right freeze effect is generated at the start of rotation of the next game. When the rising red 7-aligned freeze effect is generated and the third freeze flag is set, the upper row red 7-aligned freeze effect is generated at the start of the rotation of the next game.

Then, in step S4017, processing for setting an additional command is executed. The addition command includes information for generating, in the game, an addition notification effect for the number of games added to the display remaining number counter HG in step S4008, step S4012 or step S4015. As a result, an additional notification effect corresponding to various kinds of freezing effects occurring in the current game is executed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the like.

After executing the processing of step S4017, it is determined whether or not the post-loading counter BG has become 0 in step S4018. If the post-loading counter BG is 0, a process of clearing the post-loading flag is executed in step S4019. If a negative determination is made in step S4018, or if the process of step S4019 has been executed, the process for pseudo-addition during BB ends.

By doing so, an additional notification effect with various red 7 matching freeze effects is generated during the restricted bonus. This addition notification effect is a pseudo effect rather than an actual addition lottery.

A supplementary explanation will be given of the relationship between the number of games that can be selected and the trailing counter BG.

50 games are selected as the number of games to be notified in the pseudo-additional notification effect only when the added-on counter BG is 100 or more (100 to 199). In this case, even if 50 games of the post-addition counter BG are reported as the pseudo-additional notification effect, the remaining 50 or more games remain in the post-addition counter BG. Also, 100 games is selected as the number of reported games only when the post-addition counter BG is 200 or more. In this case, even if 100 games of the post-addition counter BG are notified as the pseudo-additional notification effect, the remaining 100 games or more remain in the post-addition counter BG. On the other hand, 30 games as the number of games to be notified is selected when the add-on counter BG is 30 or more. It is possible that more than this remains.

In other words, as a pseudo-additional notification effect, if a freeze effect with 7 reds in the middle occurs and an additional notification effect of 30 games is generated, 30 games will be added as the additional notification effect this time, but how long will the additional notification effect be after that? remains undetermined. On the other hand, as a pseudo-additional notification effect, when a right-rising red 7 aligned freeze effect is generated and an additional notification effect of 50 games is generated, not only is the addition of 50 games performed as the current additional notification effect, but also the rest of the game is added. This indicates that 50 or more games remain as the toppings. In addition, as a pseudo-additional notification effect, when the upper stage red 7 aligned freeze effect is generated and the additional notification effect of 100 games is generated, not only the addition of 100 games is made as the additional notification effect of this time, but also the remaining post-addition. This indicates that 100 games or more remain as minutes. Then, even if it is determined that the additional notification effect in the restricted bonus is a pseudo one, it will provide more information than the additional notification effect, and it will be a motivation to confirm the additional notification effect. be able to.

<Appearance of pseudo-additional notification>
The relationship between the actual number of remaining games ZG and the display remaining number counter HG when the second addition notification and the pseudo addition notification are performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), when the attack mode is started as an advantageous section at the timing of tc1, the initial number of games in the attack mode is the number of remaining games ZG (more specifically, the number of consecutive attack modes G3. Hereinafter, ), and the same initial number of games is input to the display remaining number counter HG. After that, each time the game is played, the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG are subtracted.

When an additional chance is generated at the timing of tc2 or tc3 and an additional win is won (for example, when an additional win occurs based on a strong cherry), the number of additional games is added to the remaining number of games ZG. When the immediate addition notification is selected, the number of additional games is also added to the display remaining number counter HG at timing tc2 and timing tc3.

In the case where the additional information won at the timing of tc4 is selected instead of the immediate addition notification, the number of additional games is added to the number of remaining games ZG, while the number of additional games is displayed in the remaining number counter HG for display. is not added. As a result, an event occurs in which the value of the actual number of remaining games ZG differs from the value of the display remaining number counter HG. After that, as the timing of tc5, when the game is completed until the value of the remaining number counter HG for display reaches a predetermined value (1), an unannounced additional information is generated. As a result, the value of the display remaining number counter HG becomes the same value as (or close to) the value of the number of remaining games ZG.

As for the add-on that was won at the timing of tc6, it is assumed that the post-add notification was selected, and thereafter, the unrestricted bonus was won at the timing of tc7. As already explained, even in the attack mode, the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG are not decremented each time the game is played during the bonus period. On the other hand, even in the bonus during the attack mode, the processing for increasing the number of advantageous interval games AG is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 88(b), in the effect during the bonus, the subtraction stop display indicating that the update of the number of remaining games ZGP of the auxiliary display section 65 is stopped (in the figure, , "STOP" is displayed so as to be superimposed on the remaining game number display ZGP). On the other hand, the display of the total number of games corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is not displayed to stop the subtraction, so that the player can understand that the update has not stopped. In addition, during the bonus effect, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the number of remaining payouts corresponding to the number of remaining payouts of the bonus, so that the player can grasp how many more games can be played during the bonus. It's becoming

As described above, in the non-restricted bonus, an additional lottery is performed when the 3rd role in the BB is won, and if the additional lottery is won, various red 7 matching freeze effects will occur as an additional notification. For example, when an additional winning is made at the timing of tc8 or the timing of tc9, an additional notification effect is generated accompanied by a red 7 matching freeze effect corresponding to the number of additional games. In this case, since the remaining game number ZG is added in the main control device 101, the remaining game number display ZGP in the auxiliary display section 65 is also updated by adding the corresponding number of games. When the bonus state ends at the timing of tc10, the subtraction processing of the number of remaining games ZG and the display remaining number counter HG is also restarted.

When the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value (1) at the timing of tc11, the addition generated at the timing of tc6 is notified as a subsequent addition notification. After that, both the number of remaining games ZG and the display remaining number counter HG become 0 at the timing of tc12, and the attack mode (advantageous section) ends.

As shown in FIG. 89(b), when the attack mode is started as an advantageous section at timing td1, the initial number of games in the attack mode is the number of remaining games ZG and the number of remaining games for display, as in FIG. 89(a). It is input to the number counter HG. After that, the addition occurs at the timing of td2, the timing of td3, the timing of td4, and the timing of td6, of which the immediate addition notification is selected for the addition of timings td2 and td3, and the addition of timings td4 and td6 is delayed. Assume that notification is selected.

The added amount at timing td4 is notified at timing td5 by a subsequent addition notification based on the display remaining number counter HG reaching a predetermined value. This is similar to the timing description for tc4 and tc5.

Assume that the bonus transferred at the timing of td7 is a limited bonus, unlike the non-limited bonus transferred at the timing of tc7. As described above, in the restricted bonus, even if the 3rd winning combination is won in the BB, the execution of the additional lottery is restricted. However, in the present embodiment, a pseudo-additional notification effect using an unreported additional amount may occur during the restricted bonus. That is, if the player wins the 3rd prize in the BB at the timing td8, the pseudo-additional notification is generated by using the additional bonus generated at the timing td6. In this case, a part of the number of additional games generated at the timing of td6 is used as a pseudo-additional notification, and an additional notification effect accompanied by a red 7 matching freeze effect is performed.

Then, after the bonus state ends at timing td9, at timing td10 when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value, the remainder of the addition generated at timing td6 is notified to be added later. After that, both the number of remaining games ZG and the display remaining number counter HG become 0 at the timing of td11, and the attack mode (advantageous section) ends.

A supplementary explanation of the limited bonus and non-limited bonus will be given with reference to FIG.

As already explained, in the slot machine 10, the first BB and the second BB are mainly set as the bonus combination to shift to the bonus state. In the first BB, winning is established by stopping with all "red 7" symbols on the effective line, and in the second BB, winning is established by stopping with all "white BAR" symbols on the effective line. Therefore, the player can clearly grasp which bonus is selected from the winning mode. In addition, in the effect setting process during bonus by the display control device 81 (FIG. 60), it is set so that different effects are performed corresponding to each bonus. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the bonus is the 1st BB or the 2nd BB not only in the winning mode but also in the bonus state.

The 1st BB and the 2nd BB are set with a single winning combination and a double winning combination. Watermelon overlapping 1, 2, etc.), overlapping roles with the 9th replay (special replay A overlapping 1, 2), overlapping roles with the 9th replay and 10th replay (special replay AB overlapping 1, 2) are set It is

The single winning hand and the overlapping hand of the ninth replay are set so that there is no set difference in the winning probability for either the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. The 2nd BB is a non-restricted bonus where the lottery for the pointing function is not restricted. In addition, with respect to overlapping roles with the 9th replay and the 10th replay, there is a set difference in the winning probability for both the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and the 1st BB and the 2nd BB triggered by the role , It is a limited bonus that restricts the lottery related to the instruction function.

On the other hand, the overlapping role with the transition trigger role is set so that there is no set difference in the winning probability for the 1 BB, and the 1 BB triggered by the role is a non-restricted bonus. As for the 2BB, there is a set difference in the probability of winning, and the 2BB triggered by the winning combination is a restricted bonus.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the same 1st BB and 2nd BB, it is set so that a limited bonus or a non-limited bonus may occur depending on the timing of winning. Therefore, for example, if you win the third role in the BB during the 1st BB and an additional notification effect with a red 7 matching freeze effect occurs, is it an additional notification effect with an actual addition or a post-addition? It is difficult to determine whether or not it is a pseudo-additional notification effect using the unreported part of the notification.

More specifically, when winning the third role in BB in the 1st BB, if an additional notification effect with a red 7 matching freeze effect occurs, this bonus is a duplicate role with the transition trigger role or the 9th replay If the bonus is triggered by the overlapping role of and the single winning role, the additional notification effect is the additional notification effect with the actual addition, while the bonus this time overlaps with the 9th replay and the 10th replay. If it is a bonus triggered by a role, the additional notification effect becomes a pseudo-additional notification effect. Also, when winning the 3rd role in the BB in the 2nd BB, if the additional notification effect with the red 7 matching freeze effect occurs, the bonus this time is the 9th replay and the overlapping role and the single winning role. If it is a bonus, the additional notification effect is an additional notification effect that accompanies an actual addition, while the bonus this time is an overlapping role with the transition trigger role or an overlapping role with the 9th replay and the 10th replay. If it is a bonus to be used as a trigger, the additional notification effect becomes a pseudo-additional notification effect.

Moreover, in particular, the overlapping combination with the ninth replay and the overlapping combination with the ninth and tenth replays are set so that the stop numbers in the winning game are likely to be common. Specifically, in the ninth replay and the tenth replay, although the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are common, the target symbols of the left reel 32L are the "red bell " symbol or "white bell" symbol, and in the tenth replay, the "young man" symbol is set. A total of six "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L, while only one "youth" symbol is arranged on the left reel 32L. Also, on the left reel 32L, the "young man" symbol is arranged at the 13th position, and the "white bell" symbol is arranged at the 12th position directly below it and the 15th position, which is two positions above it. Therefore, in a situation where both the ninth replay and the tenth replay are won, stop the target symbol of the tenth replay on the effective line of the left reel 32L so as to win the tenth replay. If so, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing when the 13th "young man" symbol reaches the activated line, and at other timings, that is, when the 14th "first replay" symbol to the 12th "white If the stopping operation is performed at the timing when the "bell" symbol reaches the activated line, the target symbol of the ninth re-game is stopped instead of the target symbol of the tenth re-game.

Therefore, in the special reply AB overlap 1, 2 winning game, which is an overlapping role with the 9th replay and the 10th replay, basically the 9th replay win is established, and the 10th replay win is daringly aimed. Only when the stop operation is performed and the stop operation is successful, the tenth regame win is established. Then, the stop roll (the stop roll that becomes the 9th replay win) in the special type A overlapping 1, 2 winning game, which is an overlapping role with the 9th replay, and the 9th replay and the 10th replay. The stop numbers in the special reply AB duplicate 1st and 2nd winning games, which are duplicate roles, are basically the same, making it difficult to determine which winning combination triggered the bonus. In other words, it is difficult to determine whether it is a restricted bonus or a non-restricted bonus from the stop result in the winning game, and whether the additional notification effect accompanying the red 7 matching freeze effect during the bonus is pseudo. It is becoming difficult to distinguish between

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A setting difference is provided in the probability of winning, and a pseudo addition notification performance is generated by using an uninformed part of the addition notification during a restricted bonus in which the execution of the addition lottery is restricted. As a result, it is possible to improve interest in the restricted bonus while preventing the advantage of the restricted bonus that is shifted to the advantageous section from being too high.

The pseudo-additional notification effect in the restricted bonus is executed based on the winning of the 3rd hand in the BB that can be won in the restricted bonus, and the winning probability of the 3rd hand in the BB is the same regardless of the set value. probability. By doing so, the appearance rate of the trigger for the pseudo-additional notification in the restricted bonus can be the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, in a restricted bonus that has a different transition rate depending on the set value, not only does the pseudo-additional notification improve the interest, but the pseudo-additional notification effectively camouflages that the bonus is a restricted bonus, and sets An effect of making it difficult to predict the value can also be expected.

When performing a pseudo-additional notification effect in the limited bonus, a freeze effect is generated in which the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is restricted. While the lottery for each game is executed by the main controller 101 and the rotation control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed, various effects such as the auxiliary display section 65 are executed by the display control device 81 on the sub side. On the premise that it will be executed, it is conceivable that the player is likely to have a suspicion that it is a pseudo one even if the pseudo additional notification effect is performed as various effects on the sub side. In that regard, as described above, by setting a pseudo-additional notification effect accompanied by a freeze effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R on the main control device 101 side, it is not an additional notification effect as a mere effect, but an actual addition. This makes it easier to give the impression that it has been through a lottery. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the additional notification presentation in the restricted bonus.

Moreover, the freeze effect that is executed together with the pseudo-additional notification effect is associated with the freeze effect that occurs when the addition is made in the non-restricted bonus, and if the additional notification effect for the same number of games is performed, the same type It was configured to perform a freeze effect. By doing so, it is also possible to enhance the impression that the pseudo-additional notification effect has passed through the actual addition lottery.

In the case of not generating a pseudo-additional notification performance even when winning the third role in BB, a pseudo-freeze performance that does not develop into a freeze performance with 7 kinds of reds is executed. As a result, it is possible to further strengthen the impression of the additional notification effect occurring after the lottery by showing that the player may lose the lottery. And since this pseudo-freeze actually occurs when the non-restricted bonus is not won, the reliability of the pseudo-additional notification effect during the restricted bonus is considered from the relationship with the non-restricted bonus. can be provided.

It is configured to generate a pseudo-additional notification performance after the appearance of the stop roll corresponding to the result of the lottery that triggers it, and more specifically, the next game in which the stop roll that wins the third prize in the BB appears. It was configured to generate a pseudo-additional notification effect at the start of. Events under the control of the main control device 101 side, such as the stop result, are more effective in making the player trust than events under the control of the display control device 81 side, such as the display performance by the auxiliary display section 65. Based on the idea that it would not be possible, the above configuration is a configuration in which a pseudo additional notification effect is generated after imparting reliability. By doing so, if the additional notification effect that can occur from now on is not suspected that it is a pseudo one, trust is given by the stop result, and then the additional notification effect is performed, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the additional notification effect is seen through as a pseudo one.

Moreover, after the reliability is imparted by the stop result, the reliability is additionally imparted by the freezing performance of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and then the additional notification performance is generated by the auxiliary display part 65. , the effect of preventing the additional notification effect from being detected as a pseudo one is further enhanced.

In addition, as described above, since the pseudo-additional notification effect is executed based on the winning of the 3rd hand in the BB as the game result, the impression of the additional notification effect through the lottery on the main control unit 101 side can be obtained. The effect is enhanced.

Even if the player wins the 3rd role in the BB in the restricted bonus, a pseudo add-on notification performance is prevented from occurring depending on the value of the add-on counter BG. As a result, it is possible to give a strong impression that it is necessary not only to simply win the 3rd role in the BB but also to win some kind of lottery (additional lottery). In addition, if it is possible to create a situation in which the addition notification does not occur when the third combination in the BB is won in this way, a lottery table that does not win the third combination in the BB according to the value of the second addition counter BG can be created. , there is no need to use a special configuration, and with a simpler configuration, it is possible to increase the attention of the restricted bonus while not giving a sense of incongruity that there is a bonus that is difficult to win in the 3rd role in the BB. It becomes possible.

In addition to the 3rd BB hand, the 2nd BB hand is provided as a hand that can be won during the restricted bonus, and the 3rd BB hand is a hand that wins the 9th replay and the 10th replay. On the other hand, the 2nd hand in the BB is a hand that wins the 9th replay, and when it is won, the 9th replay win can occur. It is common with the third role. Then, in the 2nd role in the BB, since the pseudo-additional notification effect is not generated, even if the stop roll that results in the 9th re-game winning appears, the above-mentioned pseudo-additional notification effect is performed. If it does not occur, it cannot be determined whether it is due to the winning of the 3rd hand in the BB or the winning of the 2nd hand in the BB. As a result, even if there is a scene in which the addition notification performance is not generated based on the winning of the third combination during the BB, such as a scene where the addition counter BG is not accumulated, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort that may be given.

Both the 2nd and 3rd BB wins are wins to which replays are given, and even if there is a difference between the presence or absence of the pseudo-additional notification effect as described above, the player will not be affected. There is no difference in the advantage of As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of making it difficult to determine whether the trigger for generating the additional notification effect is the second winning combination during BB or the third winning combination during BB.

In the attack mode or the like, the post-loading counter BG is easily accumulated by pushing order bells or pushing order replays. More specifically, the push order bell and the push order replay are made to be more likely to select the late addition notification at the time of additional winning than the so-called rare combination such as strong cherry. By accumulating the post-addition counter BG by pressing order bells with a relatively high probability of winning in this way, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the post-addition counter BG has been accumulated, and the limited bonus is prevented. Even if a pseudo add-on notification is generated in , it is possible to make it difficult for the user to recognize that it uses the add-on counter BG.

Comparing a restricted bonus with a difference in winning probability depending on the set value and a non-restricted bonus with no difference in winning probability due to the set value, the mode of the additional notification effect that occurs during the bonus is common. From the aspect of the notification effect, it is made impossible to identify which bonus is in progress. By doing so, it is difficult to discriminate between the limited bonus and the non-limited bonus, and by making the limited bonus seem to be the non-limited bonus, the playability of the limited bonus can be improved.

Moreover, if it is difficult to distinguish between the two bonuses that differ in the probability of winning depending on the set value as described above, it will be difficult to distinguish the difference in the probability of winning due to the set value, giving the impression that the bonus was won by one's own luck. It becomes easier to give In other words, for example, even if you acquire a lot of game media by shifting to a restricted bonus with a setting difference, if you can not distinguish it from a non-restricted bonus, it is not due to the set value, but your own It is also possible to give the impression that it was obtained by luck.

The additional notification effect executed with the non-restricted bonus is an immediate notification executed in a series of games triggered by the additional winning, while the additional notification effect executed with the restricted bonus is the game in which the additional winning The post-addition notification is executed in a game that is a later game and is determined after the fact, but the immediate addition notification and the post-addition notification other than during the bonus are different to the extent that the player can distinguish between them. However, it is not possible to distinguish between the immediate boarding notification and the later boarding notification during the bonus. That is, by having the player experience both notifications during the bonus on the premise that they can be identified outside of the bonus, it is possible for the player to understand that the two notifications are the same notification.

In particular, the post-addition notification other than during the bonus can occur in a game in which the remaining game number display ZGP, which is continuously displayed during the attack mode, is 1, and that the post-addition notification can occur. While it can be detected in advance (before multiple games), it cannot be detected until the 3rd role in the BB is won in the post-loading notification in the restricted bonus, and it is not possible to detect it until the 3rd role in the BB is won, and from the game that triggers it, such as the immediate loading notification other than during the bonus. This is included in the category of notifications performed in a series of games. Even from such a difference, it is easy to understand that the added notification effect in the restricted bonus is not the added notification, and it gives a strong impression that the added notification is not a pseudo one. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the non-restricted bonus.

The winning probability of the 3rd combination in BB, which triggers the additional notification effect in both the restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus, is common to both bonuses. Therefore, even from the appearance rate of the 3rd combination in BB, it is not possible to determine which bonus it is, and the effect of improving the playability of the restricted bonus is enhanced.

Moreover, when the additional notification performance is generated when the 3rd combination is won during BB, the stop roll resulting in the 9th replay win appears regardless of the bonus. As a result, not only does it become difficult to distinguish the bonuses from the stop results, but also as a result of drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the main controller 101 side, the impression that the additional notification effect is occurring is given. It can be strongly given, and it is judged that the additional notification effect performed in the restricted bonus has passed through the additional lottery, that is, the effect of making it think that this additional notification effect is the effect occurring in the non-restricted bonus. can be increased.

When the 2nd combination is won during the BB, no additional notification performance is generated regardless of whether the bonus is restricted or not. Moreover, the stop roll at the time of winning the 2nd hand in BB is also common between the restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus, and the winning probability is also the same. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish which bonus is based on the stop roll and its appearance rate even in a scene where no additional notification performance is generated, and to enhance the effect of improving the playability of the restricted bonus.

Between the restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus, in the BB instruction lottery process, the process when winning the third hand during the BB is different from the middle, and in the restricted bonus, the second pseudo-effect process is executed, and the non-restricted bonus is performed. In the bonus, processing for transitioning to the middle BB mode and processing for adding to the middle BB are executed. In this way, the processing structure is simplified in order to share the processing up to the middle of any bonus and generate different additional notification effects depending on the bonus type.

Moreover, for example, whether it is the process for adding to the middle of the BB or the process for the second pseudo effect, the process of setting various freeze flags and the like are common to both processes. In other words, in the above-described configuration in which the processing is shared until the middle and the processing is different from the middle, the processing configuration can be further simplified because there is common processing even in the different processing. ing.

In the first BB, it is possible to shift to a restricted bonus and a non-restricted bonus, and in the second BB, it is possible to shift to a restricted bonus and a non-restricted bonus. In other words, it is not possible to distinguish between the restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus based on the winning numbers ("Red 7" pattern matching or "White BAR" pattern matching) at the time of bonus transition. Moreover, since the performance by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like is common to these restricted bonuses and non-restricted bonuses, it is difficult to distinguish between the restricted bonuses and the non-restricted bonuses visually after winning. become. For this reason as well, the effect of enhancing the playability of the restricted bonus is enhanced.

Even in the winning game, the stop results of the restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus are basically common. At the time of special reply AB duplicate 1 win, basically the 9th re-game winning which is special reply A is established. By doing so, it is even more difficult to distinguish which bonus is which.

However, as far as winning games are concerned, it is possible to distinguish between restricted bonuses and non-restricted bonuses. A distinction is made between a restricted bonus and a non-restricted bonus according to the success or failure of a game win. By doing so, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of a player who wants to enjoy the performance without distinguishing between the two bonuses and a player who wants to enjoy the performance while distinguishing between the two bonuses. .

At the time of special reply AB double winning, winning can be established more easily in the ninth re-game than in the tenth re-game, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the stop operation timing corresponding to the tenth re-game winning. can be stopped, the 10th re-game winning is established. A player who wants to enjoy the performance while distinguishing between the two bonuses is likely to be a player skilled in the game. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a player who wants to enjoy the performance without turning it on will erroneously establish the 10th replay winning prize.

When an additional lottery is executed in a non-restricted bonus, the winning probability of the additional lottery is made different according to the situation before the bonus shift. More specifically, the odds of winning the extra lottery during the bonus are made different according to the accumulated state of the loss counter before the bonus is shifted. In this way, with the awareness that the game situation before the transition to the bonus may affect the probability of winning the extra lottery during the bonus, etc. By adopting a configuration for generating a pseudo add-on notification effect, it is possible to accept without discomfort the phenomenon in which the add-on notification effect in the restricted bonus is likely to occur or not to occur according to the value of the add-on counter BG. It becomes possible.

Comparing a restricted bonus with a set difference in winning probability and a non-restricted bonus with no set difference, the likelihood of winning may be reversed depending on the set value. That is, for example, when comparing the winning probability of the limited bonus based on the special reply A overlap 1 and the limited non-target bonus based on the special reply AB overlap 1, as shown in FIG. The probability of winning is about 1/1010, and the special reply AB overlap 1 is about 1/6550, and the special reply A overlap 1, that is, the limited bonus is easier to win. On the other hand, in setting 6, the probability of winning the special reply A duplicate 1 is about 1/1010, and the special reply AB duplicate 1 is about 1/546. easy to get elected. In this way, since the ratio of the restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus differs depending on the setting value, it is difficult to distinguish whether the additional notification effect implemented for both bonuses is a pseudo one or not. can.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the processing configuration of the pseudo-addition processing during BB in the above-described embodiment is changed. FIG. 91(a) is a flow chart showing part of the process for pseudo-addition during BB in this modification.

In step S4101, the post-loading counter BG is grasped. In subsequent step S4102, a pseudo-additional lottery process is executed. In the pseudo add-on lottery process, a second pseudo add-on table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an add-on notification effect accompanied by various red 7-matching freeze effects. As shown in FIG. 91(b), the second pseudo add-on table is set so that the winning rate of the pseudo add-on notification effect and the number of pseudo add-on games at the time of winning are different according to the value of the add-on counter BG. . In particular, when the value of the post-addition counter BG is 30 or less, it is set so that no pseudo-addition of the number of games occurs.

In step S4103, based on the processing result of step S4102, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-addition notification lottery has been won. If the pseudo-addition notification lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S4104, the first pseudo-effect processing is executed, and then the pseudo-addition processing during the BB is terminated. The first pseudo effect processing is as described in step S4003 and the like. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4103, the process advances to step S4005 to execute processing for a pseudo-additional notification effect accompanied by various red 7 uniform freeze effects.

That is, as in the above configuration, even if the configuration is such that the red 7 matching freeze effect is generated through the pseudo-additional lottery, if the value of the post-addition counter BG does not reach the minimum number of additional games in the bonus state, the pseudo-additional If the lottery is not won, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as the post-loading counter BG becoming negative.

Unlike the first embodiment, the second pseudo add-on table is set so that even if the value of the post-add counter BG is 30 or more, the pseudo add-on notification may not be won. That is, if the add-on counter BG is less than 30, the notification winning rate is 0%, if it is 30 or more and less than 100, the notification winning rate is 30%, and if it is 100 or more and less than 200, the notification winning rate is 50%. If the number is 200 or more, the notification success rate is 70%.

In other words, even if there are potentially many additional games to be added, there are many situations where pseudo-additional notifications do not occur during the bonus, and the rarity of such additional notifications is increased. In addition, because of its rarity, the degree of pleasure when the additional notification is performed is increased, and even if the third role in the BB is won in the scene where the additional addition counter BG is likely to be accumulated By daring to show a scene in which the additional notification does not occur, it is possible to make it difficult to cause suspicion that the additional notification is a pseudo one.

A plurality of bonuses with different top-up winnings may be provided in the non-limiting bonus, and the effects of the plurality of bonuses may be associated with the effects of the limited bonuses with different notification winning rates. For example, as shown in FIG. 91(c), according to the rank of the attack mode at the time of transition to the bonus state, the additional winning probability when winning the 3rd combination in BB is set differently. Specifically, for the attack mode ranks from 1 to 4, when winning the 3rd role in BB, there is no additional winning at rank 1, there is a 30% chance of winning at rank 2, and 50 at rank 3. A BB extra lottery table is set so that an extra win is made with a probability of 10% and an extra win is made at rank 4 with a probability of 70%. At Rank 1, the effect during the bonus state is the first effect (blue background), at Rank 2, the effect during the bonus state is the second effect (yellow background), and at Rank 3, the effect during the bonus state is the third effect (background). Each rank is set so that the player can clearly grasp the effect mode during the bonus state, such as the fourth effect (red background) for rank 4, and the fourth effect (red background) during the bonus state.

Based on this premise, the mode of presentation during the bonus state is varied according to the notification success rate of the pseudo-additional notification during the restricted bonus. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(b), if the value of the post-loading counter BG is less than 30, the effect during the bonus state is the first effect (background blue), and the value of the post-loading counter BG is 30. If it is less than 100, the second effect (yellow background) is given during the bonus state. If the value of the post-loading counter BG is 200 or more, the effect during the bonus state is the fourth effect (red background). In this way, it is possible to grasp from the performance during the bonus state that the notification winning rate during the bonus state is high or low, and the performance with the non-limiting bonus and the freezing performance with various red 7 matching are added. Since the relationship with the occurrence rate of the notification effect is the same for the restricted bonus, it is possible to make it difficult to realize that the additional notification effect that occurs during the restricted bonus is a pseudo one. .

In this case, the performance during the bonus state of the restricted bonus may reflect not only the value of the post-loading counter BG but also the rank of the attack mode. For example, instead of setting the effect in the bonus state of the non-restricted bonus according to the rank of the attack mode in a one-to-one correspondence, at rank 1, the first effect is likely to be selected, and the second effect to the fourth effect are set. Although the production is difficult to select, even if it is a non-restricted bonus in the attack mode of rank 1, the second production to the fourth production can be selected, and the production during the bonus state of the limited bonus is made. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which selection is made from the post-loading counter BG at the time of transition and the rank of the attack mode. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity that the rank of the attack mode does not correspond to the effect during the bonus of the restricted bonus.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the probability of occurrence of the pseudo-additional notification effect is varied according to the number of remaining payouts during the bonus state. FIG. 92 shows various pseudo add-on tables in this modified example.

In the pseudo-additional lottery process (step S4102) in this modified example, the value of the current remaining payout number counter is grasped. Then, a pseudo add-on table corresponding to the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts is acquired to determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pseudo add-on notification performance and the number of informing games to be executed.

FIG. 92(a) shows the third pseudo add-on table obtained when the remaining payout counter is between 150 and 216, and FIG. 92(b) shows the situation when the remaining payout counter is between 100 and 149. FIG. 92(c) shows the fifth pseudo add-on table acquired under the condition that the remaining payout counter is 1-99. As already explained, when the medals are paid out in the bonus state, the remaining remaining number counter is subtracted. Therefore, the larger the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, the smaller the number of times medals have been paid out in the bonus state (the fewer the number of wins of the first hand in BB), in other words, the more uncompleted games in the bonus state. indicates a high number. In other words, the situation in which the third pseudo-additional table is acquired is the situation in which the number of uncompleted games in the bonus state is larger than the situation in which the fourth and fifth pseudo-additional tables are acquired. Further, the situation in which the fourth pseudo add-on table is acquired is a situation in which the number of uncompleted games is greater than in the situation in which the fifth pseudo add-on table is acquired, and less than in the situation in which the third pseudo add-on table is acquired. . A situation in which the fifth pseudo-additional table is acquired is a situation in which the number of uncompleted games is smaller than a situation in which the third or fourth pseudo-additional table is acquired.

As shown in FIG. 91, the third pseudo-addition table to the fifth pseudo-addition table are set so that the pseudo-addition notification effect does not occur in any of the tables when the post-addition counter BG is less than 30. On the other hand, if the post-addition counter BG is 30 or more, the third pseudo-addition table has the lowest occurrence rate of the pseudo-additional notification effect, and the fifth pseudo-addition table has the lowest rate of occurrence of the pseudo-additional notification effect when the value of the post-addition counter BG is the same. The top table is set to be the highest. Also, the number of games to be notified when the pseudo-additional lottery is won is set so that the third pseudo-additional table is the smallest and the fifth pseudo-additional table is the largest.

By adopting the above configuration, it becomes difficult for the pseudo-addition notification of a large number of games to occur at the beginning of the bonus state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the event that the post-loading counter BG is depleted as the game progresses during the bonus state.

In particular, in restricted bonuses, the add-on counter BG is not replenished during the bonus state, so unless the above configuration is used, the rate of occurrence of the pseudo add-on notification tends to differ between the beginning and end of the bonus state. This can be a factor in realizing that the additional notification effect is pseudo. In that respect, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to bring the occurrence rate of the pseudo-additional notification closer to the average throughout the bonus state, and the effect of making it difficult for people to notice that it is a pseudo-additional notification. can be further increased.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the probability of occurrence of the pseudo-additional notification effect is varied according to the progress of the attack mode. FIG. 93 shows various pseudo add-on tables in this modified example.

In the pseudo-additional lottery process (step S4102) in this modified example, the current number of games in the advantageous section AG is grasped. Then, a pseudo add-on table corresponding to the value of the number of games in the advantageous section AG is acquired to determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pseudo add-on notification effect, and the number of informing games in the case of execution.

FIG. 93(a) shows the sixth pseudo add-on table obtained when the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is less than 100, and FIG. 93(b) shows the situation in which the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is 100 or more. 8 shows a seventh pseudo-addition table obtained in . As already explained, the number of games in the advantageous section AG indicates the number of games played after winning the attack mode or the like. In other words, the situation in which the sixth pseudo-additional table is acquired indicates that the bonus state of this time is a bonus state in which the number of games played since the start of the advantageous section is less than 100 games (situation shortly after the start). , The situation in which the seventh pseudo-additional table is acquired is that the bonus state this time is a bonus state in which the number of games played from the start of the advantageous section is 100 or more (a situation in which a certain amount of time has passed since the start). is shown. It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the pseudo-additional table to be acquired is changed according to the number of games played from the start of the attack mode (the number of completed games) instead of the number of games AG in the advantageous section.

As shown in FIG. 93(b), in the seventh pseudo add-on table, if the add-on counter BG is less than 30, the add-on notification effect does not occur and the add-on counter If the BG is 30 or more, the larger the value, the higher the occurrence rate of the post-addition notification effect, and the number of notification games at the time of occurrence is set to increase. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93(a), the sixth pseudo add-on table is set so that the add-on notification effect is not generated regardless of the value of the add-on counter BG. It should be noted that the sixth pseudo-addition table may partially generate the pseudo-additional notification effect, but it is preferable that the occurrence rate is lower than that of the seventh pseudo-additional table.

In other words, in this modification, in the restricted bonus that is shifted in a situation shortly after the start of the advantageous section such as attack mode, the pseudo-additional notification effect does not occur, and a certain number of games from the start of the advantageous section such as attack mode A pseudo-additional notification effect will occur in the restricted bonus that has been transferred in the situation where the has been digested.

In this way, in a situation in which the attack mode has just started, that is, in a situation in which accumulation of the post-addition counter BG cannot be expected, the pseudo-additional notification effect is not generated, so that the pseudo-additional notification effect is simulated. The impression of being a thing can be diluted more. Accumulation of the add-on counter BG tends to depend on the number of wins of a specific role that can be expected to be added. The number of times itself has a greater influence on the trailing counter BG. On the other hand, if the number of wins of the special combination increases, the influence of the selection rate between the immediate-addition notification and the subsequent-addition notification increases, and the effect of the number of times the special combination won itself on the subsequent-addition counter BG becomes relatively small. . In other words, with the above configuration, if the effect of events that can be clearly grasped by the player, such as the number of wins of a specific role, is large, the pseudo-additional notification effect is not generated in the first place, or the pseudo-additional notification effect is not generated. It is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the content of the winning is notified in advance by making it difficult for the occurrence of

Further, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which an immediate addition notification and a subsequent addition notification are selected at the time of addition during an unrestricted bonus, and the selection rate is varied according to the progress of the attack mode. When the additional information is selected, only the processing of adding the number of additional games to the additional game counter BG is performed without generating the additional information performance accompanied by the freezing performance of all kinds of red 7.例文帳に追加For example, as shown in FIG. 93(c), in a situation where the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is less than 100, the additional notification is always selected. It is assumed that the post-loading notification is selected at a rate (30%). By doing so, in both the non-restricted bonus and the restricted bonus, the all-red-7 freeze effect does not occur at the beginning of the attack mode. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of changing the winning probability of the pseudo-additional lottery according to the progress of the restricted bonus.

On top of that, if the additional notification is selected in the non-restricted bonus, a pseudo-freeze will occur, and even if the pseudo-additional notification effect is not generated in the restricted bonus, a pseudo-freeze will occur at a predetermined rate. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the freeze occurrence mode (occurrence rate of additional notification effect) in the restricted bonus and that in the non-restricted bonus, and to increase the effect of making the two bonuses indistinguishable. .

Further, in the early stages of the attack mode, if an extra bonus occurs during the non-limiting bonus, that is, if an extra extra notification is selected, the pseudo-freeze may not occur. In this case, it is preferable not to generate a pseudo-freeze even if the pseudo-additional lottery is not won in the beginning of the attack mode even in the restricted bonus. As a result, it is possible to give a strong impression that the bonus that is shifted in the early stages of the attack mode does not generate an additional addition, or that even if an additional addition occurs, the subsequent addition notification is always selected (with a high probability). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo add-on notification effect and the actual add-on notification effect.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the rate of occurrence of the pseudo-additional notification effect differs depending on the set value. FIG. 94 shows a pseudo add-on table in this modified example.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the eighth pseudo add-on table of this modified example, when the add-on counter BG is 30 or more, the rate of occurrence of the pseudo add-on notification effect and the number of informing games at the time of occurrence differ depending on the set value. For example, in a situation where the add-on counter BG is 30 to 99, the probability of the pseudo add-on notification effect for 30 games occurring is 30% for settings 1 and 2, 35% for settings 3 and 4, and 40 for settings 5 and 6. %, and the higher the set value, the higher the rate of occurrence of the pseudo-additional notification effect. Also, in a situation where the add-on counter BG is 100 to 199, the pseudo add-on notification effect of 50G does not occur at settings 1 and 2, but is set to occur at settings 3 and above. Furthermore, the pseudo-additional notification effect of 100 games is set so that it can be selected only in a situation where the post-addition counter BG of setting 5 and 6 is 200 or more, and when the pseudo-additional notification effect of 100G occurs , settings 5 and 6 are determined.

By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the pseudo add-on notification effect, and even if the player realizes that the add-on notification effect is a pseudo one, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the additional notification performance is a meaningless performance.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, whether or not the pseudo-additional notification effect is generated in the limited bonus is made different depending on the winning mode in the winning game of the limited bonus. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the winning result handling process for the BB winning game in this embodiment. The winning result handling process for the BB winning game is a process that is carried out when the winning result handling process (FIG. 44) is carried out, and is a process that is carried out before step S1401, for example.

In step S4201, it is determined whether the winning game is the first BB or the second BB. That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in which the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. If neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, or if one of the flags is set but was set in a game prior to the game, the main BB as it is End the processing for the winning game. By making an affirmative determination in step S4201, the process proceeds to step S4202.

In step S4202, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game is special reply AB duplication 1 or special reply AB duplication 2. When the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set with a game result other than these as a trigger, the processing for this BB winning game is terminated as it is. When the BB winning flag is set with these game results as a trigger, the process proceeds to step S4203.

In step S4203, a process of ascertaining the winning result of the current game is executed. As already explained, when a double combination is won in each game, priority/non-priority may be set for the prize winning order depending on the type of the winning combination. In this slot machine 10, replays are preferentially won in replays and bonuses, such as special replays AB duplication 1 and 2. A replay is a game result that does not cause any loss. The process of step S4203 is a process for ascertaining which of the 9th re-game winning and the 10th re-game winning has been established.

In step S4204, based on the processing result of step S4203, it is determined whether or not the 10th re-game winning (special reply B winning) has been established. When the 10th re-game winning has not been established, that is, when the 9th re-game winning has been established, the process for the BB winning game is terminated as it is. When the 10th regame winning has been established, in step S4205, the processing for setting the freeze limit flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and then the processing for the BB winning game is terminated.

As already explained, in a situation where the ninth replay and the tenth replay are duplicately won, the ninth replay win is overwhelmingly more likely to be established, and a specific stop operation mode (the effective line of the left reel 32L The 10th re-game win is established only when the stop operation is performed in the stop operation mode performed at the timing when the 13th "young man" symbol arrives at . That is, in the process for the BB winning game, basically the freeze limit flag is not set, and the freeze limit flag is set only when the stop operation is performed in a specific stop operation mode in the BB win game. be done.

Next, the second pseudo effect processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not the current bonus state has shifted to normal mode or challenge mode. If the transition is to the normal mode or the challenge mode, it is determined in step S4302 whether or not the freeze limit flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is set, the second pseudo effect processing is terminated. If the freeze limit flag is not set, the first pseudo effect processing is executed in step S4303, and then the second pseudo effect processing is terminated. As already explained, the first pseudo effect process is a process for generating a pseudo freeze effect. That is, when the freeze limit flag is set, the first pseudo effect processing is not executed, and the pseudo freeze effect does not occur.

If it is determined in step S4301 that the mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode, it is determined in step S4304 whether or not the post-loading flag is set. If the add-on flag is set, the process for pseudo add-on during BB is executed in step S4305, and then the process for the second pseudo effect is terminated. If the post-loading flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4302, and as described above, the processing of whether or not to generate a pseudo-freeze effect is executed depending on the presence or absence of the freeze limit flag.

Next, the processing for pseudo-addition during BB in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The processing for pseudo-addition during BB in this embodiment is generally the same as the processing in the first embodiment. The difference lies in the presence or absence of flags.

That is, in the same way as steps S4001 and S4002, in step S4401, the processing for grasping the post-addition counter BG is executed, and in step S4402, it is determined whether or not the post-addition counter BG is less than 30. If it is less than 30, it is determined in step S4403 whether or not the freeze limit flag has been set. If the freeze limit flag is not set, the first pseudo effect processing is executed in step S4404, and then the pseudo add-on processing during BB is terminated. On the other hand, if the freeze limit flag is set in step S4403, the process for pseudo-addition during BB is terminated. That is, when the freeze limit flag is set, pseudo-freeze does not occur in a situation where the post-loading counter BG is less than 30.

If the post-loading counter BG is equal to or greater than 30, in step S4405, a notification game number lottery process is executed. In step S4405, as in step S4004, the number of games to be notified is determined based on the first pseudo add-on table and the add-on counter BG.

After that, in step S4406, it is determined whether or not the freeze limit flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is not set, in steps S4408 to S4422, in the same manner as the processing in steps S4006 to S4019, processing for generating an additional notification effect accompanied by various red 7 uniform freeze effects is performed. Run. If it is determined in step S4406 that the freeze limit flag has been set, then in step S4407 freeze non-occurrence processing is executed, and then the pseudo-addition processing during BB is terminated.

<Processing for non-freezing>
The freeze non-occurrence processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not the processing result of the informing game number lottery processing in step S4405 is a pseudo-additional informing effect of 30 games. In the case of the pseudo add-on notification effect of 30 games, in step S4502, 30 is added to the post-BB notification counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. After executing the subtraction process, the freeze non-occurrence process ends. That is, in this case, the first freeze flag is not set, the freezing effect with 7 reds in the middle row does not occur, and the addition notification of 30 games does not occur. The post-BB notification counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the subtraction amount of the post-loading counter BG for the non-occurrence of such a freeze effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S4501, the process advances to step S4504 to determine whether or not the pseudo-additional notification effect of 50 games has been selected. In the case of the pseudo add-on notification effect of 50 games, in step S4505, the processing of adding 50 to the post-BB notification counter is executed, and in step S4506, the processing of subtracting 50 from the post-BB addition counter is executed. , terminate the freeze non-occurrence processing.

A negative determination in step S4504 means that the processing result of the number-of-notification-games lottery process this time was a pseudo-additional notification effect of 100 games. In this case, in step S4507, a process of adding 100 to the post-BB notification counter is executed, and in step S4508, a process of subtracting 100 from the post-loading counter BG is executed, and then the freeze non-occurrence process ends. do.

In this way, in the bonus state triggered by the special reply AB duplication 1, 2 winning, by establishing the 10th replay prize in the special reply AB duplication 1, 2 winning game, pseudo-freeze and various red 7 freeze effects execution is restricted. As described above, in the special reply AB duplication 1, 2 winning game, basically, the 9th replay winning is likely to be established, and the 10th replay winning is difficult to be established. That is, in the special reply AB overlap 1, 2 winning game, the 10th replay winning will not be established unless the stop operation is performed aiming at the 10th replay winning.

Depending on the player, it is considered that there are not only players who want to enjoy the performance but also players who want to prioritize the progress of the game. Since it does not make a difference, it is conceivable that players who want to give priority to the progress of the game may feel that the above-described configuration in anticipation of the performance effect is rather troublesome. Therefore, as in the above configuration, if the 10th re-game winning is established, the pseudo-additional notification effect is not generated, so that the game progresses while expecting the effect of the effect. It is possible to meet the needs of players who want to give priority to.

<BB end notification processing>
The BB end notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 99(a). The BB end notification process is a process executed when the remaining payout amount becomes 0 in the end determination process (FIG. 46) by the main controller 101. For example, between steps S1603 and S1604 The process to be performed.

In step S4601, it is determined whether or not the post-BB notification counter is greater than zero. That is, it is determined whether or not the bonus to be terminated this time is a restricted bonus and the execution of the pseudo-additional notification effect is restricted during the bonus. If the post-BB notification counter is 0, the BB end notification processing is terminated. If the post-BB notification counter is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S4602.

In step S4602, a process of adding the value of the post-BB notification counter to the display remaining number counter HG is executed. Then, in step S4603, processing for setting an addition command for notifying that an addition for the above addition has occurred is executed. In the display control device 81 that receives this add-on command, as shown in FIG. 99(b), an additional notification effect for the number of games equal to the post-BB notification counter is performed as an additional notification effect in the full-stop effect. , the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled. It should be noted that the additional notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 without accompanying the freezing effect of all seven reds.

In the subsequent step S4604, a process of clearing the post-BB notification counter to 0 is executed. Then, in step S4605, the processing for clearing the freeze restriction flag is executed, and then the BB end notification processing is terminated.

<Relationship between the winning game's stop result and the presence or absence of various freeze effects>
Supplementary with reference to FIG. explain.

As already explained, in this slot machine 10, the 1st BB and the 2nd BB are provided as bonuses, and most of them are based on the winning of Special Rep A duplicates 1, 2 or Special Rep AB duplicates 1, 2 ( about 87%, see FIG. 90).

In the winning games of the special reply A duplication 1, 2 and the special reply AB duplication 1, 2, the ninth replay winning as the special reply A can be established. When the ninth replay winning is established in the winning game, not only is it a special reply A duplicate 1 winning game or a special reply A duplicate 2 winning game, but also whether it is a special reply AB duplicate 1 winning game. Whether or not it is a duplicate 2-win game cannot be determined from the stop result.

Of these, as to whether the special reply A duplicate 1 and the special reply AB duplicate 1, or the special reply A duplicate 2 and the special reply AB duplicate 2, the stop roll in the game that shifts to the bonus state ("Red 7 ” pattern match or “white BAR” pattern match).

On the other hand, whether it is special reply A duplication 1, 2 or special reply AB duplication 1, 2 is impossible to distinguish in subsequent games if the ninth replay winning prize is established in the winning game as described above. It has become. More specifically, for example, whether the special reply A overlap 1 or the special reply AB overlap 1, a pseudo-freeze effect occurs in the 2nd role winning game during BB, and a pseudo freeze effect occurs in the BB 3rd role winning game. Although there is a difference in whether or not it is appropriate, there is an additional notification effect that accompanies a red 7 matching freeze effect that is the same effect in terms of effect. In the first embodiment, such an effect is used to enhance the effect of the special reply AB duplication 1 and 2, which are limited bonuses.

On the other hand, if the 10th replay winning game is established in the special reply AB overlap 1, 2 winning game, the game is not the special reply A overlapping 1, 2 winning game, but the special reply AB overlapping 1, 2 winning game. can be clearly determined.

Therefore, based on the establishment of the 10th replay prize in this way, during the bonus state based on the special reply AB duplication 1, 2, a pseudo-freeze effect at the time of winning the second role during BB and the third role during BB It is arranged not to generate a pseudo-additional notification performance accompanied by a freezing performance of 7 red matching at the time of winning. In other words, if there is a high possibility that the bonus this time is based on the 1st and 2nd winnings of the Tokurip AB duplicate, and the player is likely to be aware that it is a restricted bonus, a pseudo-additional notification will be made. I tried not to As a result, it is possible to prevent the uselessness of generating the effect in a situation where it has been determined that the effect is a pseudo effect.

In particular, in the pseudo-additional notification effect in the slot machine 10, various red 7 matching freeze effects are generated as rotation effects of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, an effect of weakening the pseudo impression can be expected as compared with a configuration in which a pseudo additional notification effect is generated with a simple display effect. On the other hand, since the stop operation etc. are invalidated during the freeze production, if it is realized that the freeze production is a pseudo-additional notification production, the production effect of the freeze production is Not only is this unpredictable, but there is also the possibility that the interruption of the progress of the game will irritate the player. Therefore, as in the above configuration, according to the possibility that the bonus is determined whether or not it is a restricted bonus, by switching the presence or absence of the freeze effect, the effect of the freeze effect is reduced. It is possible to exhibit it according to the situation.

In this way, while the pseudo add-on notification effect is not performed, the number of add-on games that should have been notified in the pseudo add-on notification effect is notified at the end of the bonus, so that the freeze effect is not generated. In this way, even if the tenth replay winning prize is established, the inconvenience of not being able to grasp the number of post-loading games is not caused. As a result, while it is possible to give priority to the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the feeling of inequality such as the difference in the amount of information provided (the number of games to be added).

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the effect during the bonus is different depending on the winning mode in the special reply A duplicate 1, 2 or the special reply AB duplicate 1, 2 winning game, but in this modification, other winning Describe opportunity-based bonuses.

As already explained, as the bonus winning trigger role, in addition to the special reply A duplication 1 and 2 and the special reply AB duplication 1 and 2, there are overlapping roles with transition trigger roles such as strong cherry and weak watermelon (strong cherry duplication 1 , 2, weak watermelon duplication 1, 2, etc.), and a single 1st BB and a single 2nd BB that are bonus single winnings are provided. Unlike Tokuripu A duplication 1, 2 and Tokuripu AB duplication 1, 2, which are overlapping roles with replays, in overlapping roles with these transition trigger roles and bonus single roles, no role is won in the winning game. Dropouts can also occur.

As shown in FIG. 101, in this modified example, when a winning game is lost, an additional notification effect including a pseudo-addition is generated. , to prevent the occurrence of additional notification performance including pseudo performance. More specifically, in the overlapping role with the transition trigger role, for example, of the strong cherry overlaps 1 and 2, the strong cherry overlap 2 is a restricted bonus. Then, in the strong cherry duplicate 2-win game, when a strong cherry win is established, a freeze restriction flag is set so as not to generate a pseudo-additional notification effect. On the other hand, in the strong cherry duplicate 2 winning game, when the strong cherry winning is not established, the freeze limit flag is not set to generate a pseudo-additional notification effect.

Here, among the overlapping roles with the transition trigger role, the overlapping role with the 1 BB is a non-restricted bonus, and the overlapping role with the 2 BB is a restricted bonus. When the bonus is shifted to a bonus as a bonus, whether the bonus is a restricted bonus or a non-restricted bonus can be clearly determined by the stop result of the bonus winning game. That is, when the overlapping role with the transition trigger role is used as a trigger, if the bonus state is shifted to by matching the "Red 7" symbols, the bonus is a non-restricted bonus, and the overlap role with the transition trigger role is used as a trigger, " BAR" symbol matching, the bonus is a limited bonus, and if the player understands such a role structure, an additional notification during the bonus state triggered by the transition trigger role is given. It is possible to clearly determine whether or not it is a pseudo one.

It is considered that whether or not the player understands the above-mentioned combination structure depends on the player's degree of understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine. Therefore, in the above modified example, in the case where the player fails to win the transitional trigger role in a game in which the transitional role overlaps with the transitional trigger role, a pseudo-additional notification effect is generated assuming that the skill level of the game is low. , when the transition opportunity winning prize is established, it is assumed that the skill level of the game is high, and a pseudo-additional notification performance is not generated. In this way, by generating an effect according to the player's degree of understanding, it is possible to exhibit a suitable effect according to the situation.

In addition, in the winning result corresponding processing for BB winning game in this modification (FIG. 95), at step S4202, even if it is a bonus winning game other than special reply AB duplication 1, 2, it is determined affirmatively, and at step S4204 , Whether or not a prize is established for each role (Toku Rep B, Strong Cherry, Strong Watermelon, etc.) that is a role that overlaps with the bonus and is the target of determining whether or not a pseudo-additional notification effect is generated. is determined, and the freeze limit flag is set in step S4205 if the win has been established, and the freeze limit flag is not set if the win has not been established.

Further, for example, even in non-restricted bonuses such as strong cherry duplication 1, whether or not an additional notification effect is generated may be changed depending on whether or not a winning game is missed. More specifically, in the double winning game with the transition opportunity, when the transition opportunity win can be established, the freeze limit flag is set. Then, in the BB extra processing (FIG. 84) when the BB 3rd role is won during the non-limiting bonus, if the freeze limit flag is set, the red 7 matching freeze effect is accompanied when the extra winning is performed. It is preferable that the number of additional games is collectively notified at the end of the BB without executing the additional notification effect. More specifically, before the processing (step S3806, step S3808, step S3809) for setting various flags such as the first freeze flag, it is determined whether or not there is a freeze limit flag, and if the freeze limit flag is not set , sets the corresponding freeze flag. When the freeze limit flag is set, the freeze flag is not set, and processing such as adding the current number of additional games to the post-BB notification counter is performed. As a result, even during the non-limiting bonus, it is possible to generate an additional notification effect at the end of the bonus state without executing various freeze effects.

As described above, even during non-restricted bonuses, the occurrence of freeze effects in restricted bonuses is generated by configuring the presence or absence of the occurrence of freeze effects depending on the stop result of the bonus winning game (whether or not there is a dropout, etc.) The relationship between the presence or absence of and the stop roll (whether or not there is a dropout, etc.) in the bonus winning game matches, and the impression that the freeze effect occurs or does not occur depending on the stop roll in the bonus winning game can be strengthened. In other words, it is not determined whether the bonus is a restricted bonus or a non-restricted bonus, but whether or not the freeze occurs depends on the stop roll of the bonus winning game. To make it more difficult for a player with a low game skill to understand whether or not the freeze is due to a pseudo-additional notification performance, while preventing troublesome performance from occurring for a player with a high game skill. becomes possible.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the fact that the freeze limit flag has been set is treated as valid over one advantageous section. FIG. 102(a) is a flow chart showing the BB end notification processing in this modification, and FIG. 102(b) is a flow chart showing the attack mode end processing in this modification. The attack mode ending process is a process executed by main controller 101 in a game in which the number of remaining attack mode games (attack mode continuation number G3) is zero.

The BB end notification processing in this modification is the same as the processing in the second embodiment except that the processing for clearing the freeze restriction flag is not performed (FIG. 99(a)). That is, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the post-BB notification counter is greater than 0. If it is greater, the value of the post-BB notification counter is added to the display remaining number counter HG in step S4702, and the process proceeds to step S4703. to set the overlay command. As a result, when the bonus ends, an extra notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display section 65 and the like. After that, in this modification, after performing the processing of clearing the post-BB notification counter to 0 in step S4704, the BB end notification processing is terminated without clearing the freeze limit flag.

The freeze limit flag is cleared in the attack mode end processing.

That is, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the game is the end of the attack mode, and if it is the end game, it is determined in step S4802 whether or not the freeze limit flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is set, the limit flag is cleared in step S4803, and then the termination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4801 or step S4802, the end processing is terminated.

In this way, during one advantageous section (attack mode), if the freeze limit flag is successfully set by winning the 10th replay in the bonus winning game, the state is taken over, and then Even if the 10th replay winning prize or the like is not established in a bonus winning game, the freeze performance (particularly pseudo-additional notification) is not generated during the bonus state. As a result, the playability is improved, and even if the stop operation for establishing the 10th re-game winning is unsuccessful, no meaningless freeze effect will occur. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably generate the freeze effect.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the player can clear the freeze limit flag after the freeze limit flag is set. FIG. 103(a) is a flow chart showing the winning result handling process for the BB winning game in this modified example. The process for this BB winning game is a process executed in the winning result corresponding process (FIG. 44) by the main control device 101 .

In step S4901, it is determined whether or not the current game is a BB winning game based on the winning result. That is, as a winning result of this game, a game in which "red 7" symbols are aligned on the activated line and the first BB winning is established, or a "white BAR" symbol is aligned on the activated line and the second BB winning is established. Affirmative determination is made in step S4901 because it is a game to play. If it is not a BB winning game, the processing for this BB winning game is terminated.

If the determination in step S4901 is affirmative, it is determined in step S4902 whether or not the freeze limit flag has been set. If the freeze restriction flag is not set, the processing for the BB winning game is terminated. If the freeze limit flag is set, it is determined in step S4903 whether or not the stop operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the current game is a predetermined specific operation mode. As the specific operation mode, in this modified example, the operation is a reverse push (an operation to stop the right stop switch 44 first), but other operation modes may be used. If a negative determination is made in step S4903, the processing for the BB winning game is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4903 and the bonus winning is established in the specific operation mode, the freeze limit flag is cleared in step S4904, and then the processing for this bonus winning game ends.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 103(b), for example, the 10th replay win is established in the special reply AB overlap 1, 2 winning game, etc. Based on the freeze limit flag being set, The auxiliary display unit 65 or the like may be configured to notify that the pseudo addition notification effect is not generated (indicated as "actual addition mode" in the figure). Then, as shown in FIG. 103(c), the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is configured to notify that the state in which the pseudo addition notification effect is not generated can be canceled by performing the specific operation mode. should be

By doing so, the freeze limit flag is unintentionally set, or the freeze effect is not generated against the player's intention, such as changing his mind after setting the freeze limit flag. Scenes can be reduced.

In this case, the operation for clearing the freeze limit flag is less difficult than the operation for setting the freeze limit flag. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to clear the flag easily when the restriction flag is set.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the aspect of the pseudo-additional notification effect in the restricted bonus is different. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing processing for pseudo-addition during BB in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, first, in step S5001, a process of grasping the remaining attack mode game count ZG (more specifically, attack mode continuation count G3) is executed. Then, in step S5002, a pseudo-additional lottery process is executed. In the seventh pseudo add-on table in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the number of notification games to be selected when performing the pseudo add-on notification effect is set differently depending on the number of remaining games ZG. Specifically, when the number of remaining games ZG is less than 50, the pseudo additional notification effect is not generated, and the setting is made such that the more the number of remaining games ZG increases, the more likely the pseudo additional notification effect is generated. It is In addition, as the number of remaining games ZG increases, the pseudo-additional notification effect for a larger number of games is more likely to be selected.

In step S5003, based on the processing result of step S5002, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-additional lottery has been won. When not winning, in step S5004, the first pseudo effect processing for pseudo freeze is executed, and in step S5005, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC, and then the pseudo add-on processing during BB is terminated. . In this case, similar to steps S4103 and S4204, a pseudo-freeze effect is generated in accordance with the out counter.

If it is determined in step S5003 that the pseudo add-on lottery has been won, it is determined in step S5006 whether or not the pseudo add-on notification effect of 30 games has been won. If 30 games have been won, the process advances to step S5007 to execute processing for setting the first freeze flag. In the subsequent step S5008, a process of adding 30 to the advance counter MG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The advance counter MG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games for which a pseudo-addition notification effect has been performed. In the subsequent step S5009, a process of adding 30 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S5006, it is determined in step S5010 whether or not the pseudo-additional notification effect of 50 games has been won. If 50 games have been won, the process advances to step S5011 to execute processing for setting the second freeze flag. Then, in step S5012, a process of adding 50 to the advance counter MG is executed, and in step S5013, a process of adding 50 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S5010, it means that the pseudo-additional notification effect of 100 games has been won. In this case, the process advances to step S5014 to execute processing for setting the third freeze flag. Then, in step S5015, a process of adding 100 to the advance counter MG is executed, and in step S5016, a process of adding 100 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

After one of the processes of steps S5009, S5013 and S5014 is executed, in step S5017, it is possible to perform an additional notification effect for the number of games added to the display remaining number counter HG in each of the above processes. A superimposition command including information is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S5005, after which the pseudo superimposition processing during BB is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the value of the add-on counter BG, a pseudo add-on notification effect is generated by lottery in the 3rd winning game in the BB of the limited bonus. Therefore, a difference can occur between the actual number of remaining games ZG in the attack mode and the display remaining number counter HG, and the display remaining number counter HG can be larger than the actual remaining number of games ZG.

Next, processing for addition notification in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 106 .

In this embodiment, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the preload counter MG is greater than zero. If it is larger than 0, it is determined in step S5102 whether or not the value of the advance counter MG is larger than the current number of additional games. If it is larger, the process proceeds to step S5103 to execute processing for subtracting the number of games to be added this time from the previous addition counter MG, and then this addition notification processing is terminated. In this case, the additional information will not occur in the current game, and the processing for the additional information will not be performed.

If it is determined in step S5102 that the number of games to be added this time is equal to or greater than the pre-addition counter MG, the process proceeds to step S5104. In step S5104, a process of subtracting the value of the advance counter MG from the number of games to be added this time is executed. Then, in step S5105, a process of clearing the advance counter MG to 0 is executed.

When it is determined in step S5101 that the pre-boarding counter MG is 0, or after executing the processing of step S5105, in steps S5106 to S5112, processing for immediate boarding notification and post-boarding notification is executed. After that, the process for addition notification is terminated. The processing of steps S5106 to S5112 is the same as the processing of steps S3001 to S3007.

In other words, the number of informing games of the additional informing effect generated in a pseudo manner in the process for pseudo-additional informing during the BB is stored as an advance counter MG. Then, the number of games to be added this time is subtracted from the number of games to be added at this time from the number of games to be added to the number of games to be added, and when the number of games to be added to the number of games to be added is set to 0, the remaining number of games is added to the number of games. In other words, the configuration is such that a pseudo add-on notification effect is executed first, and when an actual add-on opportunity occurs, the previously executed add-on notification effect is compensated. By doing so, it becomes possible to generate a pseudo-additional notification effect regardless of the value of the addition counter BG, and diversification of generation patterns can be achieved. It should be noted that in the following description, the above-described pseudo-additional notification effect will also be referred to as a pre-additional notification effect in relation to the subsequent addition notification effect.

Section display second processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107 .

In this embodiment, similar to the processing of steps S1801 to S1809, in steps S5201 to S5209, based on the upper limit (1500) of the number of advantageous section games AG or the number of continuous games in attack mode or challenge mode Then, the processing for ending the advantageous section is executed. However, in this embodiment, the process is different when the advantageous section is ended based on the affirmative determination in step S5209 and the number of continuous games in attack mode or challenge mode.

That is, if the determination in step S5209 is affirmative, it is determined in step S5210 whether or not the display remaining number counter HG is greater than zero. If the display remaining number counter HG is greater than 0, after executing the process of clearing the display remaining number counter HG to 0 in step S5211, a special effect command is output to the display control device 81 in step S5212. Execute the process to set as If a negative determination is made in step S5210, or if the process of step S5212 has been executed, the process advances to step S5205 to execute the process of clearing the number of games in the advantageous section AG to 0. The processing after step S5205 is as described above.

That is, as described above, when the advance notification effect is generated and when the additional trigger is generated later, the advance counter MG is decremented, and the number of informing games for the advance notification effect is compensated. On the other hand, if an additional opportunity does not occur, or if an additional opportunity does not occur but the number of additional games does not compensate for the number of reported games (the advance counter MG does not become 0), the actual remaining amount is determined. The attack mode or the like ends in a state in which the display remaining number counter HG is greater than the number of games ZG. That is, before the display remaining number counter HG reaches 0, the actual number of remaining games ZG becomes 0, and the attack mode or the like can end.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when such a situation occurs, a special effect is generated. The special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. FIG. 108 shows a special effect table stored in the various table storage area 105a, and FIG.

When a special performance is generated by the display control device 81, the end performance at the end of the attack mode is controlled to be a performance different from the normal performance. That is, as shown in FIG. 109(a), when the end effect at the end of the attack mode is the normal effect, a display indicating that the attack mode has ended is displayed, along with the number of consecutive games in the current attack mode ("number of games" in the figure). notation) and the number of medals obtained in this attack mode (in the figure, the number of medals obtained is displayed).

In this embodiment, a plurality of effects are set as special effects. For example, when special effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. Along with the display of the number of continued games and the number of earned medals, a predetermined character (in the figure, a military character holding a weapon) is displayed. Further, for example, when the special effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. A character different from the character in the case of 1 (in the figure, a character of a soldier raising a weapon in his hand and raising a roar) is displayed.

In the effect setting process at the end of the attack mode in the display control device 81, which of the special effect A and the special effect B is selected depends on the value of the display remaining number counter HG at the end and the set value. is set to As shown in FIG. 108, when the display remaining counter HG is 0, the special effect A or the special effect B is not selected, and the normal effect (FIG. 109(a)) is selected as the effect at the end of the attack mode. be. When the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 9, the selection ratio between the normal effect and the special effect A differs depending on the set value. More specifically, if it is setting 1 or setting 2, the normal effect and the special effect A are selected at 50% each. If the setting is 3 or 4, the normal effect is selected at 40%, and the special effect A is selected at 60%. If the setting is 5 or 6, the normal effect is selected at 30% and the special effect A is selected at 70%. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the selection rate of the special effect A. When the attack mode ends in a situation where the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 9, the special effect A is selected, the higher settings can be expected.

When the display remaining number counter HG is 10 or more, setting values are set to be easier to narrow down than when the display remaining number counter HG is less than 10. FIG. That is, when the display remaining number counter HG is 10 to 99, if the setting is 1 or 2, the normal effect is selected at 60% and the special effect A is selected at 40%. In setting 3 or setting 4, the normal effect is selected at 10%, the special effect A is selected at 70%, and the special effect B is selected at 20%. If the setting is 5 or 6, the normal effect is not selected, the special effect A is selected at 60%, and the special effect B is selected at 40%. That is, when the attack mode ends in a situation where the display remaining number counter HG is 10 to 99, if the special effect B is selected, it becomes possible to determine that the setting is 3 or more, and the normal effect is selected. It is possible to determine that the setting is 4 or less. Also, when the special effect A is selected, the possibility of setting 3 or 4 increases, and when the special effect B is selected, the possibility of setting 5 or 6 increases.

When the display remaining number counter HG is 100 or more, if the setting is 1 or 2, the normal effect is selected at 90% and the special effect A is selected at 10%. In setting 3 or setting 4, the normal effect is not selected, the special effect A is selected at 90%, and the special effect B is selected at 10%. In the setting of 5 or 6, the normal effect is not selected, the special effect A is selected at 10%, and the special effect B is selected at 90%. That is, when the attack mode ends in a situation where the display remaining number counter HG is 100 or more, it is possible to determine whether setting 1 or setting 2 is selected when the normal effect is selected. In addition, when the special effect A is selected, the possibility of setting 3 or 4 increases, and when the special effect B is selected, the possibility of setting 5 or 6 increases, and it is easy to narrow down. is easier than the situation in which the remaining display counter HG is less than 100.

As described above, as a result of performing the advance notification effect, a discrepancy occurs between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games ZG, and even if the display remaining number counter HG does not reach 0, the attack mode may end. However, in such a scene, a special effect that allows narrowing down of the set values can occur. In this way, it is possible to make up for the disappointment that the attack mode ends before the display remaining counter HG reaches 0 with the joy of being able to narrow down the set values.

A state in which the advance notification effect is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 110 .

As shown in FIG. 110(a), when the attack mode is started as an advantageous section at the timing of te1, the initial number of games in the attack mode is input to the number of remaining games ZG, and the number of remaining games for display is displayed on the remaining number counter HG. , the same initial number of games is input. After that, each time the game is played, the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG are subtracted.

When the restricted bonus is started at the timing of te2, an advance notification effect can occur during the bonus state until the timing of te5. For example, when the advance notification effect occurs at the timing of te3 or te4, the display remaining number counter HG is added, but since this effect is pseudo, the actual remaining game number ZG is added. Not done. As already explained, the advance notification effect is also an additional notification effect accompanied by a freeze effect with all 7 reds.

When the bonus ends at the timing of te5, thereafter, the subtraction of the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG is restarted each time the game is completed. Then, when an actual additional opportunity occurs at the timing te6 or te7, compensation for the number of notified games is performed by the advance notification effect at the timing te3 or te4. The deviation from the number of games ZG is eliminated. As a result, when the number of remaining games ZG becomes 0 at timing te8 and the attack mode ends, the display remaining number counter HG also becomes 0.

As shown in FIG. 110(b), when the attack mode is started as an advantageous section at the timing of tf1, as in FIG. The number of remaining games ZG and the display remaining number counter HG are decremented each time the number of remaining games is consumed.

When the restricted bonus is started at the timing of tf2, an advance notification performance can occur during the bonus state until the timing of tf5. For example, when the advance notification effect occurs at the timing of tf3 or tf4, the display remaining number counter HG is added, but since this effect is pseudo, the actual remaining game number ZG is added. Not done. These advance notification effects are the same as the advance notification effects at the timings of te3 and te4.

After the bonus ends at the timing of tf5, the subtraction of the number of remaining games ZG and the display remaining number counter HG is resumed each time the game is played. In FIG. 110(b), the actual addition opportunity occurs at the timing of tf6, and the number of notified games is compensated for in the advance notification effect at the timing of tf3, while the advance notification effect is performed at the timing of tf4. This shows a case where compensation for the number of reported games was not performed. In this case, when the number of remaining games ZG becomes 0 at the timing of tf7 and the attack mode ends, the display remaining number counter HG is not 0, and the notification game is executed in advance notification effect at the timing of tf4. The attack mode ends with the number remaining. In this case, the display remaining number counter HG is forcibly decremented to 0 at the end of the game, and a special effect is generated to suggest a set value.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Regardless of the value of the add-on counter BG, the generation rate of the add-on notification performance shifts to the restricted bonus by configuring to generate a pseudo add-on notification performance during the restricted bonus for which the add-on lottery is restricted. The production can be performed with a higher degree of freedom without depending on the situation.

The discrepancy between the number-of-remaining-games display ZGP and the actual number of remaining games ZG due to the pre-addition notification effect is compensated for by an additional opportunity that may occur later. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of scenes in which the attack mode ends while the divergence has occurred, and the production effect of the advance notification production (the effect of judging that the actual addition is being performed) is more suitable. can be demonstrated.

The advance notification effect is likely to occur when the number of remaining games in the attack mode is large, and is less likely to occur when the number of remaining games is small. By doing so, it is possible to generate an advance notification effect according to the ease with which compensation is performed. In other words, when the remaining number of games in the attack mode is small, in situations where compensation cannot be performed, the advance notification effect is not generated as much as possible, so that the scene where the attack mode ends with the above deviation occurring is reduced. can be reduced.

When the attack mode ends while the deviation occurs, as a special effect, a setting value suggestion effect is generated. As a result, it is possible to follow up on the disappointment that the attack mode ends before the remaining game number display ZGP on the display becomes zero.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, another form of display of the number of games to be notified by the advance notification effect will be described. That is, in the above-described third embodiment, the number of games notified by the advance notification effect is added to the display remaining number counter HG, and the remaining game number display ZGP is distinguished from the display in which the advance notification effect is not added. However, in this modified example, it is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the display that does not take into account the advance notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, the number of games for advance notification is displayed separately from the number of remaining games display ZGP. In the figure, the display of the number of games for the advance notification is displayed as "? number of games". In this case, the display control device 81, based on the addition command received from the main control device 101, when it grasps that the addition notification effect of this time is the addition notification effect, displays the number of remaining games ZGP instead of the display ZGP. The display of the number of games to be added is updated by adding the number of games to be added this time. The remaining game number display ZGP is decremented by 1 each time the game is completed and updated, while the game number display for the advance notification is not decremented each time the game is completed. Further, when the number of games to be added after that occurs and the addition notification effect is restricted, as in the third embodiment, the display change of the remaining game number display ZGP is restricted, and furthermore, the number of games to be added is limited to the amount of the addition notification. The display of the number of games is also not changed. Then, when the remaining game number display ZGP reaches a predetermined number (1), of the game number display for the advance notification, the compensated part is added to the remaining game number display ZGP as a post-addition notification effect. It should be configured to

By doing so, it is possible to clearly grasp that the number of games added by the advance notification effect is an undetermined amount. On the other hand, by limiting the additional notification at the time of subsequent additional winning and displaying the undetermined portion as it is, it is impossible to determine whether or not compensation for the advance notification effect has been performed. , it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the undetermined amount is settled, and it is possible to appropriately increase the attention of each game in which no additional notification is generated, and it is possible to enjoy the attack mode until the end. becomes.

It should be noted that it is possible to change the mode of displaying the number of games for the advance notification when an additional opportunity is generated. For example, when an additional opportunity occurs, the color, shape, and background of the display of the number of games for the advance notification may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the additional addition. By doing so, when the number-of-remaining-games display ZGP reaches a predetermined value, it is possible to perceive in advance the degree of expectation of occurrence of the post-addition notification effect corresponding to the compensation.

In addition, regarding the display of the number of games for the advance notification, not only the number of the notification games for which the advance notification effect was performed, but also the number of the notification games of the additional notification effect that were actually won (by lottery, etc.) are partially added. It is good also as a structure which carries out. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the display of the number of games for the advance notification will not be the display of only the undetermined number of games, and that the display of the number of games will be added after the fact.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, as in the third embodiment, the number of games to be notified of the advance notification effect is added to the number-of-remaining-games display ZGP and updated, and the number-of-remaining-games display ZGP is The number of games can be changed to a special display that makes it difficult to distinguish.

In FIG. 111(b), the numerical display (numerical display) indicating the number of games remaining in the number-of-remaining-games display ZGP is indicated as "???" as a special display, and after how many games the advantageous section ends. or it is difficult or impossible to determine how many games will be the trigger game number for the post-addition notification. For example, the display control device 81 may perform a change lottery when the advance notification effect is generated, and change the number display to a special display when the change lottery is won. By doing so, even if the advantageous section ends without compensation for the advance notification, it becomes difficult to perceive the ending game in advance, and the player will feel a sense of loss. can be reduced.

It should be noted that the change to the special display should preferably be made in a game in which at least the numbers equal to or greater than the number of games for which the advance information is displayed are indicated in the number portion of the number of remaining games display ZGP. For example, in the display control device 81, in each game, processing is performed to grasp the value of the remaining game number display ZGP, and in a game in which a number indicating a specific value (for example, 150) that is equal to or greater than the number of games for advance notification is displayed. , the configuration may be such that the change lottery is performed. By doing so, it is possible to change from the numerical display to the special display even when the entire advance notification is not compensated.

Further, even if the advance notification effect does not occur, in a game in which the numerical display of the number of remaining games ZGP has become a predetermined numerical display (for example, "0150"), it may be configured to change to the specific display. good. In this way, even if the number of games is counted from the display before changing to the specific display, there may be cases where the game ends with the number of games counted, and the remaining game number display ZGP is an undetermined amount due to the advance notification effect. It is possible to weaken the impression that it is a numerical display that includes .

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the configuration of the additional notification process when an additional opportunity is generated after performing the additional notification effect is different. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing part of the additional notification processing in this modified example.

In step S5301, it is determined whether or not the preload counter MG is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S5302, and it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the addition of this time is a shift trigger role. If it is not a shift trigger role, that is, if an additional win is won based on a so-called normal role with a relatively high winning probability such as a push-order bell or push-order replay, the above steps S5102 to S5105 are performed in steps S5303 to S5306. Similarly, a process of subtracting the number of games to be added this time from the pre-addition counter MG is performed. In step S5302, if an additional win is made based on a so-called rare combination with a relatively low winning probability such as a strong cherry or a weak watermelon, which is a transition opportunity combination, the process proceeds to step S5106, and subtraction from the advance counter MG is performed. Instead, a process (steps S5106 to S5112) for notifying the number of games to be added is executed.

Since it is easier to win the extra lottery when winning the rare role than the extra lottery when winning the normal role, there is a great sense of expectation for the occurrence of the extra notification effect in the rare role winning game. Conceivable. Based on such a premise, in the above configuration, the addition based on the normal role with a high appearance rate in each game is compensated for the advance notification effect, and the addition based on the rare role with a low appearance rate in each game , It is configured to perform the additional notification as it is without applying to the compensation of the advance notification effect. As a result, in games where there is a great sense of expectation for the occurrence of the additional notification effect, the player does not feel lost or uncomfortable that the additional notification effect does not occur, and is the first in a game that is difficult for the player to notice. It is possible to compensate for the number of informing games of the informing effect.

Depending on the winning combination at the time of the additional winning after the occurrence of the advance notification effect, although it has a different configuration whether or not it is allocated to the compensation for the advance notification effect, the result that triggers the advance notification effect (3rd role in BB ) or circumstances will not affect the determination of whether or not it will be used for reimbursement at a later add-on win. In other words, it can be said that the determination of whether or not to be used for compensation at the time of the subsequent addition winning is a process that is performed independently of the content of the advance notification effect except for the value of the advance counter MG. By doing so, it is difficult to cause a phenomenon in which the content of the performance at the time of later winning the additional payment is largely different depending on the content of the prepayment notification performance, and the performance effect of the prepayment notification performance is achieved by not giving a sense of incongruity to the performance. can increase

It should be noted that, depending on the number of remaining games ZG in the attack mode, it may be configured such that the easiness of compensation for the advance notification effect at the time of additional winning is different. Even in this way, it is possible to make a determination of compensation independently of the effect contents of the advance notification effect. In this case, the smaller the number of remaining games ZG is, the more likely it is to be used for compensation.

<Modification 4>
This modified example is based on the third embodiment in which the number of games to be notified of the advance notification effect is added to the number-of-remaining-games display ZGP (the value of the number-of-remaining-games display ZGP becomes equal to the display-use remaining-number counter HG), In the game in which the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value, the number of information games of the advance information effect is subtracted from the value of the number of remaining games display ZGP. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the post-addition notification process in this modified example.

If it is determined in step S5401 that it is in the advantageous section, in step S5402 subtraction processing of the display remaining number counter HG is executed. Then, in step S5403, it is determined whether or not the display remaining number counter HG after the subtraction processing is the first predetermined number (102, 52, 32). The first predetermined number is a number corresponding to the number of games (100, 50, 30) that can be announced in the advance notification effect, more specifically, the number of games that can be notified in the advance notification effect. It is the number obtained by adding the number of games for (2). If it is determined in step S5403 that it is the first predetermined number, it is determined in step S5404 whether or not the post-loading flag is set. If the post-loading flag is set, it is determined in step S5405 whether or not the post-loading counter BG is greater than the second predetermined number (100). The second predetermined number in step S5405 is set to be a relatively large value as the number of additional games in one additional opportunity. This is the case where a boarding notification occurs.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5405, then in step S5406 processing is performed to generate a freeze effect at the start of rotation of the next game. Specifically, a process of setting the fourth freeze flag and inputting 1 to the freeze counter FC is executed. Although detailed description of the processing is omitted, in the rotation effect processing (FIG. 74) in this modification, when the freeze counter FC becomes 0 and the fourth freeze flag is set, the fourth freeze flag is cleared. At the same time, a delay freeze effect is set for delaying the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec). Therefore, in the next game in which the fourth freeze flag is set, the start of rotation of the reels is delayed for a predetermined period. In subsequent step S5407, a process for controlling the display control device 81 is executed so that the freeze effect for midway addition is executed in the next game. More specifically, a freeze command for midway addition is output to the display control device 81 . In step S5407, in the next game, the value of the post-addition counter BG is added to the display remaining number counter HG, and the addition amount is subtracted from the post-addition counter BG. , a process for clearing the trailing flag (for example, a process for setting a flag for it) is performed.

The freeze effect for midway addition will be described with reference to FIG.

The midway addition freeze effect is a effect performed during the above-mentioned predetermined period in which the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is delayed. In this effect, the number-of-remaining-games display ZGP in the auxiliary display section 65 shown in FIG. 114(a) is updated and changed as shown in FIG. 114(c). In this case, the fantasy effect (special notification) shown in FIG. 114(b) is executed before the display is changed to that shown in FIG. 114(c). In the fantasy production, a male character engulfed in flames is displayed, and a loud male voice saying, "What you were looking at was just an illusion!" An explanation is given that the display was a pseudo display. In addition, it is preferable that the words are also displayed in characters on the auxiliary display section 65 . The fantasy effect is executed over the predetermined period, and when the predetermined period elapses, the fantasy effect ends, and the remaining game number display ZGP in FIG. 114(c) is displayed after the change. The player can grasp the occurrence of the fantasy performance by delaying the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the fantasy performance is performed during a predetermined period in which the start of rotation is delayed and game operations cannot be performed. As a result, it is possible to anticipate the effect of preventing oversight of the fantasy production and the effect of increasing the degree of attention.

If it is determined in step S5404 that the post-loading flag is not set, it is determined in step S5408 whether or not the pre-loading counter MG is the third predetermined number (100, 50, 30). The third predetermined number is a number corresponding to the number of games (100, 50, 30) that can be notified by the advance notification effect, more specifically, the number of games that can be notified by the advance notification effect. The affirmative determination in step S5408 indicates the case where the number of informing games has not been fully compensated after the advance informing effect.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5408, then in step S5409 processing is performed to generate a freeze effect at the start of rotation of the next game. Specifically, a process of setting the fourth freeze flag and inputting 1 to the freeze counter FC is executed. In subsequent step S5410, a process for controlling the display control device 81 is executed so that the freeze effect for subtraction is executed in the next game. More specifically, it outputs a freeze command for subtraction to the display control device 81 . In step S5410, in the next game, the value of the advance counter MG is subtracted from the display remaining number counter HG, and the subtraction amount is subtracted from the advance counter MG. processing to set a flag for

The freeze effect for subtraction will be described with reference to FIG.

The subtraction freeze effect is an effect corresponding to the midway addition freeze effect, and the operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the same as the midway addition freeze effect, and only the display contents on the auxiliary display section 65 are different. It is a performance. That is, the subtraction freeze effect is an effect performed during the above-described predetermined period in which the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is delayed based on the fourth freeze flag. In this effect, the number-of-remaining-games display ZGP in the auxiliary display section 65 shown in FIG. 114(a) is updated by subtraction as shown in FIG. 114(d). In this case, before the display is changed to that shown in FIG. 114(d), the fantasy effect (special notification) shown in FIG. 114(b) is executed. The illusion effect is as described above, and a male character engulfed in flames is displayed, and an explanatory notification is given that the previous display was a pseudo display. The difference from the halfway addition freeze effect is whether the remaining game number display ZGP is updated by addition or subtraction after the fantasy effect.

If it is determined in step S5403 that the display remaining number counter HG is not the first predetermined number, the process advances to step S5411, and similarly to steps S3104 to S3110, in steps S5411 to S5417 the display remaining number counter HG is After executing the processing for performing the post-addition notification effect when the fourth predetermined number (1) is reached, the post-addition notification processing is terminated. Note that the fourth predetermined number is a value smaller than the first predetermined number, and the subsequent addition notification effect is an effect that can occur in the game after the halfway addition freeze effect and the subtraction freeze effect. If a negative determination is made in either step S5401 or step S5405, or if either step S5407 or step S5410 is executed, the post-addition notification process is terminated.

In this way, when the value of the display remaining number counter HG becomes the first predetermined number and the remaining game number display ZGP becomes a value corresponding to the number of informing games of the advance informing effect, the freeze effect for midway addition or A freeze effect for subtraction can occur. In the midway addition freeze effect, the remaining game number display ZGP is changed by being greatly increased, and in the subtraction freeze effect, the remaining game number display ZGP is changed by being greatly subtracted. Either of the two extreme events will occur. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the midway addition freezing effect and the subtraction freezing effect, and to heighten the throbbing feeling to the climax especially during the fantastic effect which is the branching point.

The subtraction freeze effect is generated when the advance notification effect is not fully compensated, and when partial compensation is performed, as shown in the third embodiment At the same time, a special effect is generated to suggest a set value. That is, the display remaining number counter HG reaches the first predetermined number, and even if the subtraction freeze effect does not occur, the display remaining number counter HG reaches the fourth predetermined number. The difference between the remaining number counter HG and the number of remaining games ZG can be subtracted. Then, the amount of subtraction when the fourth predetermined number is obtained is smaller than the amount of subtraction when the first predetermined number is obtained. Then, if the subtraction freeze effect can be avoided at the first predetermined number, this time, at the fourth predetermined number, a post-adding notification is generated, all compensation is performed, or even if all compensation is not performed Expecting the occurrence of a special performance, it is possible to create not only the performance effect of the advance notification performance, but also a new game property using the subtraction of the divergence.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) As a restricted bonus, a difference in winning probability is provided according to a set value, and a pseudo-additional notification is generated during the restricted bonus. A limited bonus may be a bonus that is transferred through a transfer lottery when the number of wins of a small winning combination with a set difference or the number of wins reaches a specific number.

(2) When an additional notification effect occurs during the bonus, the additional notification effect is generated at the start of the game following the game in which the 3rd role was won during the BB. The configuration may be such that the additional notification effect is generated in the game in which the player wins, or the additional notification effect is generated in the game a plurality of times after the game in which the 3rd combination in the BB is won. However, if the game in which the 3rd role in BB is won is too far from the game in which the additional notification effect is generated, there is a possibility that the 3rd role in BB will be won again in the meantime. In this regard, it is preferable to start the game in which the 3rd hand is won during the BB or the start of the next game, since the content of the notification does not become complicated.

In this case, the freeze counter FC, which is executed in accordance with the additional notification effect, may be changed so as to input the corresponding numerical value. If 1 is input to FC and a freeze effect is to be generated after two games of the game in which the extra lottery is won, 3 should be input to the freeze counter FC.

(3) Although the freeze effect is provided as the additional notification during the bonus, the freeze effect may be generated even when the additional notification is executed during the attack mode, etc., other than during the bonus.

(4) Although the restricted bonuses (and non-restricted bonuses) in the 1st BB and 2nd BB have been explained, a setting difference is provided in the winning probability of the CB, and a pseudo-additional notification effect is generated during the CB state that is the restricted bonus. It may be configured to allow In this case, by providing a CB with no set difference in the winning probability and a CB with a set difference, there will be a CB state with a limited bonus and a CB state with a non-restricted bonus. The effect of the relationship between 1BB and 2BB can be expected even in both CB states. This is not limited to CB, but can also be applied to single bonus (SB), middle bonus (MB) and regular bonus (REG) where the upper limit of the number of remaining payouts is smaller than that of BB.

(5) Although the restricted bonus (or non-restricted bonus) in the 1st BB and 2nd BB that shift to the bonus state as the game state has been described, the transition state is not limited to the bonus state. good too. That is, it is possible to limit the execution of the additional lottery in a specific RT state with a setting difference in the transition rate, and to execute the pseudo-additional notification effect during the specific RT state. In this case, by not restricting the execution of the additional lottery in the normal RT state where there is no set difference in the transition rate, it is possible to expect the effect of the relationship between the restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus even in both RT states. .

(6) On the premise that the add-on in the non-restricted bonus is triggered by winning the 3rd hand during the BB, and the pseudo add-on notification effect during the restricted bonus is performed when the 3rd hand during the BB is won. However, the additional trigger for the non-restricted bonus and the trigger for the pseudo-addition notification effect for the restricted bonus may be different. For example, the pseudo add-on notification effect during the restricted bonus may be performed when the second winning combination is won during the BB. In this case, it is preferable that the pseudo-freeze effect in the restricted bonus is performed with the winning of the 3rd combination in the BB as a trigger.

(7) Although the lottery table for each game in the bonus state is shared between the limited bonus and the non-limited bonus, and the same lottery table is used, different lottery tables may be used. Also, different lottery tables may be used for each game in the first BB state and the second BB state.

(8) The pseudo add-on notification effect is configured to be executed during the restricted bonus in which the add-on lottery is restricted, but it may be executed in a state where the add-on lottery is restricted, for example, it may be executed during the carryover state. good too. In this case, the addition lottery is restricted not only in the carryover state of the restricted bonus, but also in the carryover state of the non-restricted bonus, so that the pseudo-additional notification effect can be executed.

(9) The freeze effect generated in the pseudo-additional notification effect and the additional notification effect is not limited to the above. For example, a freeze effect may be provided in which the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is delayed for a predetermined period. In this case, the degree of expectation for the number of games notified in the pseudo-additional notification effect may differ according to the length of the predetermined period of delay.

(10) In the freeze effect, the "Red 7" pattern combination is temporarily stopped, but it may be configured not to be temporarily stopped, or the pattern combination to be temporarily stopped may be changed. The number of specific symbols (for example, “red 7” symbols) stopped on the activated line may indicate the degree of expectation for the number of additional notification games.

(11) The number of games to be notified in the pseudo-additional notification effect is not limited to the above, and the number of games to be notified may be less than 30 games, or the number of games to be notified is greater than 100 games. may be performed, and the range of the number of reported games may vary depending on the situation at the time of transition to the bonus. By adopting a configuration capable of informing the number of games less than 30 games, it is possible to generate a pseudo-additional informing performance even when the accumulation amount of the post-addition counter BG is small.

(12) In the pseudo-additional notification effect, a freeze effect is generated as rotation effect processing by the main control device 101, and the line where the "red 7" pattern alignment is temporarily stopped suggests the degree of expectation for the number of notification games. but may be changed as follows:

For example, an operation mode role with different winning results depending on the order of the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is provided, and when the stop operation is performed in the first order, the first result is won, and the game stops in a second order different from the first order. It is assumed that when operated, a second result different from the first result is won. Then, when the first result is won, for example, the stop result is set to stop with the "red 7" symbols aligned on the upper right line L5, and when the second result is won, for example, the stop result is set to "red" on the upper line L1. 7” is a stop result in which the symbols are aligned and stopped. Then, based on the winning of the operation mode combination, an additional notification effect (pseudo additional notification effect) is generated, and whether the order notification of the first order of winning the first result is executed according to the number of games to be notified. , determines whether or not to perform the order notification of the second order that results in the second result winning. In this case, it is preferable to cause the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 to generate a stop instruction effect such as "Aim for Red 7!"

In addition, the stop payout at the time of the first result winning is, for example, a stop payout in which the symbols "Red 7" are aligned on the right rising line L5 and stops, and the stop payout at the time of the second result winning is set to the right rising line L5 "Red 7". 7" symbols are tense, but on a predetermined reel (for example, the last stop reel of the second order), the "red 7" symbol stops at a position different from the upward right line L5 and is out of tense. When the stop operation is performed in the first order, the "red 7" symbols are stopped together, and when the stop operation is performed in the second order, the "red 7" symbols are out of ten. Then, when winning the operation mode combination, in the case of winning the addition lottery or performing a pseudo-additional notification effect (when there is an unannounced addition that is the target of the pseudo-additional notification effect), the above "Aim for red 7" !”, etc., and execute the order notification of the first order, and if you do not win the additional lottery or do not generate the pseudo-additional notification effect (unannounced that is subject to the pseudo-additional notification effect When there is no addition), the stop instruction effect is executed and the order notification of the second order is executed.

In these cases, as the additional notification effect and the pseudo-additional notification effect, instead of or in addition to the freeze effect, it is preferable to execute the stop instruction effect and the order notification based on the above-described stop order.

Even in this way, it is possible to enjoy the additional notification effect together with the stop result, and the reliability given to the player is improved as compared with the additional notification effect on the mere display screen. However, for a player who understands the game characteristics of the advantageous section in which the winning combination differs depending on the operation order of the stop operation, the order notification of the first order and the order notification of the second order are pseudo-additional notifications. It can be easily predicted that this is part of the effect, and it is considered that the additional notification effect accompanied by the freeze effect under the control of the main control device 101 side will gain the trust of the players.

(13) Although the main controller 101 executes the addition notification process, the display controller 81 may execute the process. However, when the pseudo add-on notification effect is performed by using the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, etc., the value of the add-on counter BG is set to the control device that performs the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If the display control device 81 is configured to execute the addition notification process (the display control device 81 is configured to manage the addition counter BG), the pseudo It is preferable that the display control device 81 manages the driving control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R performed together with the additional notification effect.

(14) In a configuration in which the mode of occurrence of a pseudo-additional notification effect varies depending on the set value, not only the rate of occurrence and the number of notification games, but also the effect at the time of occurrence (for example, the content of the effect displayed on the auxiliary display section 65) is set. It may be configured differently depending on the value. In addition, the difference due to the setting value of the generation mode and the ease of narrowing down the setting value are not limited to those of the above configuration, and the setting value of the generation mode can be set as long as it is a distribution mode that assists the game in which the setting value is predicted. Any discrepancies due to

(15) By setting the freeze limit flag, the pseudo additional notification effect accompanied by various red 7 matching freeze effects is restricted, but in the pseudo additional notification effect, various red 7 matching freeze effects A configuration may be adopted in which the additional notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is generated after being set to non-occurrence. That is, by preventing the occurrence of a freeze effect that restricts the start and progress of game operations and controls, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not like the progress of the game being disturbed by the effect.

(16) By setting the freeze limit flag, the execution of the pseudo-additional notification effect is restricted, and at the end of the BB, the additional notification for the limit is executed. It is good also as composition which does not perform addition information. The additional notification for that amount is notified at least as a subsequent addition notification in a game in which the remaining number counter HG for display reaches a predetermined value, and the notification at the end of the BB makes a substantial difference in the player's advantage. because it does not cause

(17) Although the freeze limit flag is set according to the stop result of the BB winning game, the freeze limit flag may be set based on the player's operation. For example, a configuration in which the freeze limit flag is set according to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the BB winning game or the BB winning game (for example, if it is pushed forward, it is not set, and if it is pushed backward, it is set). Good, a configuration that sets the freeze limit flag when the length of the period during which the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation) is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, set when pressed for 3 seconds or longer) configuration) may be used, or the configuration may be configured to be set based on the operation of other operation means.

In addition, although the freeze limit flag is set by the stop roll of the BB winning game to limit the execution of the pseudo-additional notification effect, the control during the BB is different depending on the stop roll of the BB winning game. If it is For example, depending on the stop roll (by setting a flag), the number of sliding frames in the sliding control during the BB is changed, the lottery table during the BB is changed, or the effect content during the BB is changed. There may be.

(18) The configuration may be such that the freeze limit flag can be set in advance (before winning the BB). However, in this case, the operating means (credit input switches 56 to 58, start lever 41, stop switches 42 to 44) used for normal game operation are not set unintentionally by normal game operation. may be configured to set the freeze limit flag using a different operation means.

(19) Although the freeze limit flag can be cleared by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of BB winning, the freeze limit flag can be cleared by other operation modes or other operation means. good. In this case, it is preferable to be able to clear the freeze limit flag, which is easier to operate than the operation of setting the freeze limit flag.

(20) If a bonus is won in a double role with a role that may be missed, a freeze limit flag is set when a stop operation is performed so as not to cause a failure in the double role winning game (in the case of winning a missed role) is set, but conversely, it may be configured to set the freeze limit flag when a failure occurs. In this way, a player with a low level of game skill or a player who wants to enjoy a freeze effect can be reminded of the importance of the stop operation, and the desire to improve the game operation technique to generate the freeze effect can be aroused. becomes possible. In addition, for a player with a high degree of skill in the game, a selection is made as to whether to perform a stop operation and generate a freeze effect so as not to cause a failure, or to generate a failure and not generate a freeze effect. I will let you. If a failure occurs, it becomes difficult to understand the winning trigger combination, making it difficult to determine whether it is a restricted bonus or a non-restricted bonus. In other words, the options forced on a player with a high skill level are all options that allow the player to enjoy some kind of game performance, and the player who is eager to progress the game is encouraged to enjoy the game performance. It becomes a configuration that can be provided.

(21) By setting the freeze limit flag, the freeze effect during the bonus is prevented from occurring at all, but it may be configured to occur partially. For example, when 100 games are selected in the notification game number lottery process (step S4004, etc.), a pseudo-additional notification effect accompanied by a freeze effect (freeze effect with 7 reds on the upper row) is generated, and 50 games or 30 games are selected. It may be configured so that freezing does not occur when the Even a player who understands that it is a pseudo-additional notification effect is considered to be happy with a large amount of additional notification effects, and as described above, a pseudo-additional notification effect for a predetermined number of games or more (100 games or more) If the effect is to be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the freeze limit flag, an effect that pleases the player can be expected.

In addition, because the freeze limit flag was set, the freeze effect related to the pseudo-additional notification effect (various red 7 matching freeze effects and pseudo-freeze effect) was not generated, but due to other triggers different from the pseudo-additional notification effect A freeze effect (for example, a freeze for notifying that the player has won the premier role) may be generated.

(22) Duplicate winning with the 9th replay (Special reply A) Special reply A duplication 1 and 2 are set as non-limiting bonuses, and the 9th replay (Special reply A) and the 10th replay (Special reply B ), and the probability of winning is set so that the bonuses to be restricted are limited to the duplicate AB duplicates 1 and 2, but these relationships may be reversed. In other words, the set difference is provided in the winning probability of the special feature A overlapping 1 and 2 that is duplicate winning with the 9th re-game, and the limited target bonus is provided, and the special feature that is duplicate winning with the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game. A non-limiting bonus may be used without providing a set difference in the winning probabilities of AB duplication 1 and 2. In this way, the operation to stop aiming for the tenth replay winning prize at the time of winning is an operation for determining that the additional lottery is actually being performed, and the additional lottery in the above embodiment is actually performed. Although the operation for determining that the bonus is the opposite of the operation for determining that it is not, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a restricted bonus.

(23) A configuration may be adopted in which the pre-addition notification effect and the pseudo-additional notification effect based on the post-addition counter BG are mixed. That is, even if the post-addition counter BG is sufficiently accumulated when the 3rd combination of the BB is won, the pre-additional information presentation may be generated instead of the pseudo-additional information presentation based thereon.

(24) After performing the advance notification effect, if an additional opportunity occurs, the additional notification is limited as a compensation for the advance notification effect, but the selection between the advance notification and the subsequent notification is performed. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which one of the notifications is restricted when the subsequent notification is selected or when the preceding notification is selected, and the other is not restricted (notified and not used for compensation).

(25) After performing the advance notification effect, if there is a difference between the number of remaining games ZG and the display remaining number counter HG, a subtraction process is performed by a predetermined first predetermined number or fourth predetermined number. However, an execution lottery may be performed in each game, and subtraction processing may be performed when the execution lottery is won. In this case, it is also possible to realize a game property that allows the player to enjoy which of the execution lottery winning and the advance notification effect compensation (additional winning) is completed first.

(26) A configuration may be adopted in which the subtraction process after performing the advance notification effect is executed when the result of the game becomes a specific result. For example, subtraction processing can be performed depending on the number of times that a specific role that is an additional trigger role is won but not won, or the number of times that a specified role (for example, a strong cherry) is won but not won. It may be configured to execute.

(27) In the carry-over state before the transition to the bonus when the bonus and the attack mode are won at the same time, the advance notification effect may be executed. A bonus that can be won simultaneously with an attack mode or the like is a non-restricted bonus, and an additional lottery can be executed during the bonus. On the other hand, even if it is a non-limiting bonus, the extra lottery is restricted in the carryover state of the bonus, so there is a gap between the bonus state and the carryover state of the non-limiting bonus in whether or not the extra lottery is possible. Therefore, if it is configured to generate an advance notification effect during the carryover state, there is a high possibility that it will be compensated after the fact (during the bonus or after attack mode, etc.), and it will be possible to fill the above gap. , it is possible to suitably secure the performance balance by using the advance notification performance.

(28) In the restricted bonus, depending on the situation at the time of transition, not only the mode transition lottery but also the execution of the mode transition lottery is restricted. In this case, for example, when the 3rd combination of BB in the restricted bonus won in the normal mode is won, a rightward rising red 7 aligned freeze effect corresponding to the winning of the attack mode transition lottery is generated. Then, after the end of the restricted bonus, it is configured to execute the effect that the attack mode is being prepared (notify that it is waiting for promotion replay winning), and if the attack mode is won during the preparation, it is as it is. If the attack mode is shifted to (generate push order notification when promotion replay is won), and attack mode is not won during the preparation (if attack mode is not won over a predetermined number of games), for example, the above illusion effect is generated. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the effect during preparation is ended after the player has been ready.

(29) Although a configuration has been shown in which setting values can be suggested by a pseudo-additional notification effect during a restricted bonus with a setting difference, it is possible to suggest a set value regardless of the pseudo-additional notification effect during a restricted bonus. In this case as well, it is possible to add benefits to the restricted bonus in place of the superiority of the restricted bonus over the non-restricted bonus. In addition, on the premise that setting values can be suggested for both restricted bonuses and non-restricted bonuses, a configuration in which the occurrence rate of setting value suggestions is higher for restricted bonuses than for non-restricted bonuses It is possible to add a benefit to the restricted bonus even with a configuration in which setting values are likely to be suggested, or the like.

(30) Although it is configured such that whether or not the additional notification effect is generated depends on the stop roll at the time of winning the bonus, it is sufficient if some effect mode during the bonus is different. A configuration in which the background color of the production is different may be adopted.

(31) Although the freeze limit flag is set by the stop result when the bonus is won, the freeze limit flag may be set by the game between the bonus win and the win.

(32) A freeze limit flag may be set by a stop roll during a bonus. That is, when the 2nd hand in the BB is won and when the 3rd hand in the BB is won, both win the 9th regame, and when the 3rd hand in the BB wins, the 10th regame is won. The second hand in BB is different in that the tenth replay is not won. In other words, if the player succeeds in establishing the tenth replay winning prize, it can be determined that it is based on winning the 3rd hand in the BB, and the pseudo-freeze is based on the 3rd hand in the BB. It is possible to discriminate whether it is based on a thing or a second hand in BB. Therefore, when a stop roll that results in the 10th replay winning prize appears during the bonus, the freeze limit flag is set, especially if it is configured to limit the occurrence of pseudo freeze, the extra lottery is not executed. It is possible to avoid giving a sense of incompatibility due to performing pseudo-freezing even though is determined.

(33) The processing for addition notification is configured to be executed after the processing for adding the number of games is executed when the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is won. It is good also as a structure which performs a process for alerting|reporting. In other words, the notification timing may be determined prior to adding the current number of additional games to the number of remaining games in the attack mode. In this case, for example, when the post-addition notification is selected, the addition processing of the post-addition counter BG is performed in the game, and the game number addition processing is executed in the game in which the post-addition notification is executed. . When judging whether or not the sum of the number of execution games in the attack mode and the number of remaining games has reached the upper limit number of games, the value of the second addition counter BG corresponding to the selection of the second addition notification is also taken into consideration. It is good to have the structure which determines whether it has reached|attained.

(34) The subsequent lottery table is not limited to the above. For example, according to the value of the post-boarding counter BG and the type of the special combination, either the post-boarding notification or the immediate boarding notification is selected, but both the post-boarding notification and the immediate boarding notification are selected. In some cases, the number of add-on games at the time of add-on winning may be allocated to the post-add notification and the immediate add-on notification. In this case, the ratio allocated to the additional information and the immediate addition information may differ depending on the number of additional games, the special combination, the value of the additional addition counter BG, and the like.

Specifically, for example, if 100 additional games are won based on the strong cherry winning, 50 games are allocated to the late addition notification, and the remaining 50 games are allocated to the immediate addition notification, but based on the strong cherry winning. In the case where 30 games are added to the game, all 30 games are allocated to the immediate addition notification and not to the subsequent addition notification. In addition, if you win 100 additional games based on the weak cherry winning, 80 games are allocated to the late addition notification, and the remaining 20 games are allocated to the immediate addition notification. A configuration may be adopted in which the ratio of allocation differs according to the type of winning combination. Furthermore, in the case where the addition of 100 games is won based on the strong cherry winning, if the addition counter BG is 30 or more, 50 games are allocated to the addition notification, and the remaining 50 games are allocated to the immediate addition notification. However, if the post-addition counter BG is less than 30, all 100 games may be assigned to the post-addition notification.

(35) Although the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display portion N9 have been described as examples of the section indicator, the configuration of the section indicator is not limited to the above. The section indicator may be configured to clearly display whether or not it is an advantageous section by at least switching the display mode. Also, the display mode (lighting mode) in the advantageous section may be different from that described above. For example, the operation part of the start lever 41 and a part or all of the predetermined credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are configured to be light emission controllable, and the operation part and the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 emit light based on the advantageous section. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the function as the section indicator is ensured by a predetermined operation unit. As described above, the display of the section indicator is started at a timing before the operation of the game following the start game is permitted. By displaying the advantageous section at or near the predetermined operating section as described above, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the transition to the advantageous section.

Further, the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 may include a display section having a section display function. In this case, at least the display unit having the function of the section indicator is preferably controlled by the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 controls the auxiliary display section 65 itself to perform the function of the section indicator. It may be configured to be controlled by the main controller 101 together with the display unit.

Furthermore, as a section indicator, a character that can be displaced between a predetermined first position and a second position different from the first position is provided at a position (for example, the front part of the game machine) that can be visually recognized by the player. Whether or not it is an advantageous section is notified by a display mode including the role object when the role object is placed at the first position and a display mode including the role object when the role object is placed at the second position. may be configured.

(36) In the instruction monitor 68, the display mode of the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the above. For example, the winning combination differs depending on the stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to stop first, and the stopping order of the second and third reels includes a three-choice pressing order combination that does not affect the winning combination. In this case, pressing order information (display of "7") displayed by lighting the first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7, and the first display segment N1 to the 7. Pressing order information displayed by lighting the display segment N7 (display of "8"), the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment The pressing order information (display of "9") displayed by lighting the segment N7 may be used to notify the pressing order of these three options.

(37) In the instruction monitor 68, the timing to turn off the push order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the third reel stop ON operation, but is operated by at least the push order notification. It suffices that the pressing order notification is performed until the stop switches 42 to 44 to be pressed are grasped (the pressing order information should be displayed). For example, it may be during the second reel stop ON operation or during the second reel stop OFF operation. Further, in the case of performing the pressing order notification of the pressing order of three options, it may be performed at the time of the first reel stop ON operation or at the time of the first reel stop OFF operation. Furthermore, the light may be turned off after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time of these operations.

Furthermore, the timing may be later than the third reel stop ON operation, the third reel stop OFF operation, or a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) from the third reel stop OFF operation. The light may be turned off after a lapse of time, or may be at the end of payout of medals.

(38) The instruction monitor 68 may also be used as the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62. In these cases, the respective display units 60 to 62 perform the push order notification at the timing when the push order notification is performed, while displaying the original display of each of the display units 60 to 62 at the timing when the push order notification is not performed. It should be configured to perform

When used as the credit display unit 60, the credit display unit 60 may display credits at least until a bet operation is performed, and then notify the pressing order (based on the operation of the start lever 41). The push order notification ends at least at the timing before the timing when the number of medals acquired (paid out) in the game increases and is updated (the timing when medal payout starts) (the push order information is turned off). ), for example, it may be configured to be finished by the time the third reel is stopped ON, and to be switched to credit display when medal payout is started.

The remaining payout number display unit 61 is a display unit for displaying the number of remaining payouts during the bonus. There is a configuration in which notification is not performed (a game feature different from a game feature in which medals are increased by notification of the pressing order), and a game in which the number of remaining payouts is displayed by the remaining payout number display unit 61 and a game in which the notification of the pressing order is performed. You may avoid duplication. Incidentally, in this case, the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display section 65 may be generated during the bonus.

When the payout number display unit 62 is also used, it is preferable that the pressing order information is terminated before at least the payout number display unit 62 starts displaying the number of payout medals of the game. For example, when the 3rd reel stop ON operation is performed, the push order notification is terminated (the push order information is turned off), and if the payout combination is won, the payout number is displayed when the 3rd reel stop OFF operation is performed. do it. Such a configuration may be applied to the remaining payout number display section 61 .

Further, the display units 60 to 62 may be used to notify the pressing order. In the game panel 25, a credit display section 60 is arranged on the left side, a remaining payout number display section 61 is arranged in the middle, and a payout number display section 62 is arranged on the right side (FIG. 1). When the left stop switch 42 should be operated, the credit display section 60 is displayed, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the remaining payout number display section 61 is displayed, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the payout is displayed. The pressing order may be notified by displaying the number display section 62 or the like. In this case, as described above, from after the bet operation is performed to when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the pressing order is notified on any of the display units 60 to 62. However, since the original display function is guaranteed, the period from after the betting operation is performed to when the third reel stop ON operation is set as the period in which the pressing order is notified by these display units 60 to 62, and other than that. During the period of (2), the original display of each of the display units 60 to 62 may be performed.

(39) Advantageous intervals may be defined as follows. A section in which at least one pushing order notification corresponding to the winning of the maximum number of payouts occurs. More specifically, in a push-order bell that can pay out 9, 3, or 0 medals depending on the stop order, the push-order notification that 9 medals will be paid out is generated at least once. interval.

(40) In addition to 1BB and 2BB, CBs (1st CB to 4th CB) are provided as transitional hands in which the probability of a small win can change depending on the transition of the game state. Other transition roles may be provided. Other transition roles include MB (middle bonus), which has no limit on the number of sliding frames, REG (regular bonus), which has a lower maximum acquisition number than the 1st BB and 2nd BB, and one JAC game. SB (single bonus) etc. can be considered. Also, the maximum number of wins for each bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the maximum acquisition number during the CB state may be set to 3, which is less than 15, or may be set to 0.

(41) Although medals are not paid out when the transition combination (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) wins, medals may be paid out.

(42) In order to prevent differences in the probabilities and advantages of the transition lottery to the attack mode and the additional lottery depending on the set values, these lotteries are performed based on the lottery results with no particular set differences. A lottery may be drawn based on a certain lottery result, but setting differences may be prevented by adjusting the benefits at the time of winning (the winning probability of a privilege, transition lottery, etc., and the number of additional games). For example, with setting 1, you will win with a probability of 1/100, and with setting 6, you will have a special role that you will win with a probability of 1/10. At setting 6, it is 1/20. By doing so, the total added winning probability becomes 1/200 regardless of the setting value, and the setting difference is eliminated.

(43) By winning the transition lottery to the attack mode, etc. or the additional lottery, basically an event that is advantageous to the player will occur, but for example, it may be configured to perform an exit lottery such as the attack mode. Alternatively, a subtraction lottery for the number of continued games may be performed.

(44) Although the game in which the number of bets is 3 has been mainly described, the above invention may be applied to a 1-bet game in which the number of bets is 1 or a 2-bet game in which the number of bets is 2. For example, if you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section in a 1-bet game or a 2-bet game, or if you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section in a 3-bet game, the section indicator display start mode table will be changed. By making them different, the display start modes of the section indicators may be different.

(45) The number of forcibly ended games in the advantageous section is not limited to the above number (1500), and may be more or less.

(46) The conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section may include not only the completion of the upper limit number of games (1500), but also the upper limit number of payout medals (3000) in addition to or instead of that.

(47) The add-on lottery table and the add-on game count lottery table are not limited to those described above, and the winning probability, the range and average of the add-on game number at the time of winning, etc. are arbitrary. For example, the number of games (eg, 2000 games) exceeding the upper limit number of the advantageous section may be selected as the number of additional games.

(48) Although the VB mode as a pseudo-bonus has been configured to be transitionable only during the attack mode, it may be configured to be transitionable even during the normal mode. In this case, when a lottery for switching to the VB mode is won, the winning game is set as the start game, and the display of the section indicator is started before the operation of the game following the start game is permitted. And it is sufficient. Also, in this case, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won at the same time as the VB mode, the starting game should be the game in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won.

(49) As a special role that triggers a lottery to move to an advantageous section or an additional lottery, etc., a small combination with a medal payout such as a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc., and a prize with these strong cherries Although specific replays having a common mode, and overlapping combinations of these small wins and specific replays and bonuses have been described as examples, the results that trigger the lottery are not limited to these results. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined bonus is performed alone, or a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed even in normal replays. Alternatively, a transition lottery or the like may be performed based on the number of games played or the cumulative number of points separately awarded based on each result. In any case, it is sufficient that the timing of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section or the like does not cause a difference in the probability of winning or the frequency of occurrence depending on the set value.

(50) When the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won, the winning combination differs depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the benefits given are different, and the stopping order is notified. Although the advantage for the player is made different depending on whether or not the stop operation is performed, any combination may be used as long as the advantage for the player is different by notifying the user of the stop operation.

For example, on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel, the first pattern (for example, "black BAR" pattern) and the second pattern (for example, "red 7" pattern) cannot be aimed at the same time (at a position separated by five symbols or more). )Deploy. Then, the first symbol on the left reel 32L, the predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (eg, "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol), and the predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (eg, "first replay" symbol or "Second replay" symbol) and stop on the activated line, the first result winning is established, and the second symbol on the left reel 32L and the predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (for example, "first replay" symbol or " 2nd replay symbol) and a predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (e.g., 1st replay symbol or 2nd replay symbol) stop on the activated line, so that the second result winning is established. A prize mode is set for the first result and the second result. In this case, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the first symbol when the first result is won, the first result prize can be established, but if the stop operation is performed aiming at the second symbol instead of the first symbol, the first result prize will not be awarded. It will not work and no corresponding benefits will be granted. Similarly, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the second symbol when the second result is won, the second result winning can be established, but if the stop operation is performed aiming at the first symbol instead of the second symbol, the second result winning is not possible. It will not work and no corresponding benefits will be granted. On top of that, a special role is provided in which either the first result or the second result will be won, and when the special role is won, which one of the first result or the second result is won (first symbol and second result) Which of the two symbols should be targeted for the stop operation of the left reel 32L?). Also in such a configuration, it is possible to win the winning result (either the first result or the second result) by the notification, and the degree of advantage for the player changes depending on the presence or absence of the notification. At least one of a mode in which such notification is likely to be performed, a mode in which the probability of transition to the mode in which the notification is likely to be performed is high, and a mode in which those who have won the lottery for transition to these modes are before transition. The advantageous interval may be a situation including the mode, or the advantageous interval may be a situation including at least one of the above modes, including each of the above modes and each mode based on the pushing order.

In other words, the stopping operation for differentiating the winning combination is not limited to the stopping order, and may be any stopping operation mode including the timing of the stopping operation. is not limited to notification of the pressing order, and may be notification of a mode related to an operation mode.

(51) Regarding the advantageous section, the winning probability of the transition lottery and the benefits at the time of winning (transition mode, number of additional games, etc.) are common regardless of the setting value, but the winning probability etc. are different depending on the setting value. good too. In this case, depending on the type of result that triggers a lottery such as a transfer lottery, there are cases where there is a difference in the set value probabilities and prizes at the time of winning, and there are cases where there is no difference in the probability and prizes at the time of winning due to the set values. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

(52) The number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is managed by the number of games AG in the advantageous interval. (until three replays are won in a row) may be set as one set, and the number of sets may be used for management. Specifically, in the attack mode, a predetermined number of games (50 games) is set as one set, and the number of sets is determined by lottery at the start of the attack mode or at the time of the attack mode transition lottery. Then, the attack mode is terminated when the determined number of sets is completed. In this case, when the measurement conditions such as winning a special role are established during the attack mode, etc., a lottery with the number of sets will be performed as an additional lottery for the attack mode. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the number of sets is added.

In such a configuration, in relation to the upper limit number of games (1500 games) in the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is set as one set, or a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, replay 3 consecutive wins) or a specific number of games (e.g. 50 games). A configuration may be adopted in which an upper limit set number is set and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by completing the upper limit set number. In this case, the number of sets of advantageous sections may be determined by a predetermined counter, and forced termination may be performed when the counter reaches the upper limit (30). If the challenge mode and the omen mode are taken into consideration, the number of games is determined so that the number of sets includes the challenge mode and the omen mode (for example, the total number of games of the omen mode and the challenge mode is one set). If the above-mentioned counter reaches the upper limit value, including these modes, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval will be reached. In addition, in a configuration where the number of games per set can vary (a configuration in which a set consists of whether a predetermined end condition is met or a specific number of games are played), the number of games is less than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. , the counter for the number of sets can be the upper limit.

In relation to the pseudo add-on notification effect, it is preferable to use the unnotified portion of the set number as described above to pseudo-notify that the set number has been added during the restricted bonus.

(53) A configuration may be adopted in which the pressing order notification is performed also in the challenge mode and the sign mode. More specifically, including attack mode, challenge mode, omen mode, etc., when the transition to the specific game state even as an advantageous interval, the advantageous interval until the press order notification occurs at least a predetermined number of times (once) A configuration that does not end may be adopted.

(54) The ball payout rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 has the highest ball payout rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(55) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(56) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

For example, a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls may be configured to have a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball output rate, etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest these set values and as a teaching effect. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball rate is high and low, each of the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 being the high ball entry state.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, a start lever is operated while medals as game media are betted. Then, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to set the winning probability);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (for example, special reply AB duplication 1), and the game is played based on the fact that the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position. Advantageous transition means for shifting the state to an advantageous state (restricted bonus) that is advantageous to the player (function for executing processing to transition to the restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the transition result is are different and
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games in the specific gaming state (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
Normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (when the normal end condition is satisfied in the section display second process function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on),
an increasing means (a function of executing a process for adding the number of games by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, a first increase notification (immediate ride notification) that the increase processing has been performed based on the game in which the specific condition that triggered the increase processing has been established. can be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, a second increase notification that the increase processing is performed based on a game subsequent to the game in which the specific condition that triggered the increase processing is satisfied. A second increase notification execution means (a function of executing a setting process of an addition effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing (additional notification) by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
Regarding the result of the increase processing to be the target of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution means, the uninformed part grasping means for grasping the result of the uninformed part (grasping the post-loading counter BG function to execute processing, etc.) and
Based on the result of the unreported amount by the unreported amount grasping means, the third increase notification execution means (the main controller 101 performs the pseudo-addition process during BB) capable of executing the second increase notification during the advantageous state function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by privilege granting means if the rolled number corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. The player is shifted to an advantageous state. In such a configuration, furthermore, there is provided a specific game state in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of state notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game.

Moreover, in the specific game state, an increase process is performed to increase the remaining number that can be a trigger for ending the specific game state based on the establishment of a specific condition, and as a result, the first increase notification and the second increase notification are performed. done. Therefore, in the game characteristic of waiting for the winning of the advantageous state while enjoying the benefit from the mode notification of the specific gaming state, the increase processing can extend the waiting state while enjoying the benefit, and the advantageous state and the above-mentioned advantageous state can be obtained. A chain with the specific game state is more likely to occur. The winning probability of the advantageous state differs depending on the set value that causes a change in the mode of increase of the game media, etc. If the set value makes it easy to shift to the advantageous state, the advantageous state is frequently shifted during the specific game state. Therefore, the chain between the specific game state and the advantageous state is likely to occur. It can have a big impact on the game. In this case, it is thought that the player wants to play a game with a game machine having set values that are likely to cause chaining. It can also provide the fun of finding a table.

On the other hand, if the difference in the increase or decrease of the game medium becomes too large depending on the set value, the operation rate of the game machines other than the game machine with the desired set value may drop significantly, and the desired set value is not desired. A player may focus only on obtaining a large amount of media, and may not be able to fully enjoy the special game presentation. In other words, if the degree of advantage in the advantageous state is increased too much in the above-described chained game, the difference in increase or decrease of the game media due to the set value may become too large, and the above-described inconvenience may become apparent. On the other hand, in a game in which the advantageous state and the specific game state are chained, if each state is simply switched back and forth, the relevance between the states will be diluted even if the chain is generated, and the game will be lost. Feeling tired easily.

Therefore, in the above configuration, during the advantageous state in which the transition rate varies depending on the set value, the second increase notification for notifying the result in the game after the game in which the increase processing was performed can be performed. It was configured. In this way, by using the unannounced part of the second increase notification, there is no need to increase the advantage of the advantageous state by performing the increase processing of the specific game state during the advantageous state, and the increase or decrease by the set value It is possible to strengthen the relationship between the advantageous state and the specific game state without increasing the difference.

Regarding the ``first increase notification execution means'', ``when the increase processing is performed by the increase means, in a series of games triggered by the game in which the specific condition that triggered the increase process is satisfied, First increase notification execution means (additional effect setting by display control device 81) capable of executing first increase notification (immediate addition notification) that the increase processing has been performed by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) It may be expressed as "a function to execute the process)", and for "second increase notification execution means", "when the increase process is performed by the increase means, the increase process is triggered by the In a game that is later than the game in which the specific condition is established and that is determined after the fact, a second increase notification (subsequent notification) that the increase processing has been performed is performed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary It may be expressed as "second increase notification execution means (function for executing setting processing of the additional effect by the display control device 81) that can be executed by the display unit 65)". This is also applicable for other features below.

In addition, the above-mentioned "normal transition means" may be expressed as follows.

"Normal transition means for shifting to the normal game state when the specific game state ends" and "Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state, the specific game state is changed to the normal normal transition means for transitioning to a game state".

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, further comprising limiting means capable of limiting execution of the increasing process by the increasing means in the advantageous state (a function of executing the process of step S3601 by the main controller 101). .

Since the execution of the increase processing is restricted by the restricting means in the game in the advantageous state, the game does not substantially affect the advantage in the specific game state. Based on this premise, if it is possible to execute the notification of the second increase notification during the advantageous state as in feature A1, the game during the advantageous state can be performed without increasing the advantage of the advantageous state too much. It is possible to enhance the impression that the game is a game that can affect the advantage of the specific game state.

Feature A3. When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set, the second increase notification is performed by the third increase notification executing means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, characterized in that the probabilities of execution are common.

According to the above configuration, although the transition rate to the advantageous state varies depending on the set value, the probability that the second increase notification is executed during the advantageous state is common regardless of the set value. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value from the occurrence rate of the second increase notification. In particular, considering that the range of increase and decrease of the game media due to the set value should be small, it is considered that the difference in the advantage due to the set value should not occur with respect to the specific game state, and the execution of the increase processing. It is considered that the rate, that is, the occurrence rate of the increase notification should also be set so as not to cause a difference due to the set value. Then, as in the above configuration, if the occurrence rate of the second increase notification during the advantageous state does not differ due to the set value, the relationship between the first increase notification and the second increase notification during the specific game state It is possible to enjoy the second increase notification during an advantageous state without any inconsistency without a sense of incongruity.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the third increase in the predetermined game in the advantageous state The probability that the second increase notification is executed by the notification execution means is common.

In addition, "... the probabilities are common" may be expressed as "... the probabilities are the same or substantially the same." The expressions "common" and "same or substantially the same" include configurations that are not completely the same, and it is sufficient that the winning probabilities match to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify them. The extent to which the expressions "common" and "identical or substantially identical" indicate the same applies to other features.

Feature A4. Depending on whether the first set value is set by the setting means or when the second set value different from the first set value is set, the third increase notification execution means performs a predetermined mode to set the second set value. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the probabilities of execution of the 2-increase notification are different.

According to the above configuration, not only the rate of transition to the advantageous state but also the probability of executing the second increase notification in a predetermined manner during the advantageous state differs depending on the set value. Therefore, for example, with a set value that both the transition rate to the advantageous state and the execution rate of the second increase notification of the predetermined mode are high, and a set value that both the transition rate and the execution rate are low, all advantageous The difference in the number of occurrences of the second increase notification in the total predetermined mode during the state becomes large, and the impression received with the higher setting value (a happy image because the second increase notification is executed a lot) and the lower setting value The difference from the impression received in (unpleasant image because the second increase notification is not easily executed) is also large. On the other hand, as described in feature A1, even if the execution rate of the second increase notification during the advantageous state is increased, there is no effect on the degree of advantage, so the number of occurrences of the second increase notification in a predetermined mode during all games difference does not affect the advantage. By doing so, it becomes possible to increase the difference in the impression given by the difference in the setting value rather than the difference in the actual advantage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game while ensuring the fairness of the game. can.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the third increase in the predetermined game in the advantageous state The probability that the second increase notification is executed in a predetermined mode by the notification execution means is different.

Feature A5. A first control means (main controller 101) having at least the lottery means and the drive control means, and a second control means (display control device 81) having the second increase notification execution means,
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the first control means has the uninformed part grasping means.

According to the above configuration, the lottery is conducted based on the operation of the start operation means, and the spinning body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means to establish a prize, and the lottery related to the profit of the player is performed. By providing the first control means with drive control means for controlling the drive of the means and the orbiting body, and providing the second control means with a notification configuration such as the second increase notification execution means, each It is possible to suitably execute the processing, and to suitably take countermeasures against fraud and the like by consolidating the means involved in the profit into the first control means.

In addition, by providing the uninformed part grasping means on the first control means side, it becomes possible to reflect the grasping result of the uninformed part grasping means in the processing on the first control means side. That is, for example, it is possible to reflect the grasped result of the uninformed part grasping means in the lottery by the lottery means, and it is possible to reflect the grasped result of the uninformed part grasping means to the drive control of the rotating body by the drive control means. It is possible. By doing so, even if the second increase notification by the third increase notification execution means is performed as an effect, compared to the configuration in which only the display screen for effect controlled by the second control means is used, the effect It is possible to further enhance the effect.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "predetermined information can be output from the first control means to the second control means, and predetermined information output is performed from the second control means to the first control means." By providing the configuration of "No", the significance of providing the unreported part grasping means on the side of the first control means is further enhanced.

Feature A6. The driving control means causes the revolving bodies to start revolving when the starting operation means is operated, and stops the revolving bodies to revolve when the stopping operation means is operated. year,
When executing the second increase notification by the third increase notification execution means, special drive control means ( The gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized by comprising a function of executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, when the second increase notification is performed during the advantageous state, a so-called freeze occurs as a specific game motion in which the start and progress of the normal game motion are restricted. In this way, it is possible to grasp that the second increase notification is performed through the fact that the progress of the rotation of the orbiting body, such as start and stop, is restricted and frozen, and the second increase notification is performed during the freeze. is performed, it is also suppressed that the second increase notification is overlooked. Therefore, the degree of attention to the second increase notification is preferably increased, and the effect of performing the second increase notification during an advantageous state can be preferably exhibited.

Feature A7. The third increase notification execution means is capable of executing the second increase notification in a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined special result (3rd win in BB) in the advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the second increase notification can be executed in a game in which the lottery result during an advantageous state is a special result. By doing so, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the second increase notification during the advantageous state is not a pre-determined execution or a mere performance, but that it has occurred precisely because a special result has been drawn as a lottery result. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of making it seem as if the increase processing was actually performed.

Feature A8. In the advantageous state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, execution lottery means (pseudo-additional lottery process by main controller 101) that performs an execution lottery as to whether or not to execute the second increase notification function to execute),
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the third increase notification executing means executes the second increase notification according to a lottery result of the execution lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the second increase notification is not only executed when the special result is won, but the second increase notification is executed through the execution lottery. Therefore, the second increase notification may not be executed when the special result is won. By doing so, the increase notification is performed in a flow that is closer to the flow of the actual increase processing, and the effect of making it seem as if the increase processing has been performed is enhanced.

In addition, with the above configuration, when the lottery result in the advantageous state is a special result, it is difficult to give a sense of discomfort even if the second increase notification is not performed. That is, as described in feature A1, the third increase notification execution means is configured to execute the second increase notification based on the unreported amount by the second increase notification execution means, and when there is no unreported amount may require a special configuration that does not require execution of the second increase notification, such as changing the lottery table so as not to result in a special winning result. In that respect, in the case of the configuration that passes through the execution lottery as in the above configuration, if there are no unreported items, it is sufficient to simply disqualify the execution lottery, without using a special configuration. It becomes possible to manage whether or not to execute the second increase notification.

Feature A9. The execution lottery means sets the winning probability of the execution lottery as a first probability when transitioning to the advantageous state in the first situation, and sets the probability of winning the execution lottery as a first probability, and when transitioning to the advantageous state in a second situation different from the first situation. is capable of setting the winning probability of the execution lottery to a second probability higher than the first probability.

According to the above configuration, the execution probability of the second increase notification at the time of winning the special result is changed according to the situation of shifting to the advantageous state, and the execution mode of the second increase notification is diversified, In the game with the second increase notification, it is possible to preferably improve interest.

Feature A10. The execution lottery means sets a situation in which the number of games after the transition to the specific gaming state is less than a predetermined number as the first situation, and a situation in which the number of games after the transition is the predetermined number or more as the second situation. The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that it is possible to

If the number of games played after the transition to the specific game state increases, the possibility that the specific condition for execution of the second increase notification by the second increase notification executing means is met increases, and the execution of the second increase notification increases. There is also a high possibility that there is an unreported portion of the second increase report by means. Further, if the number of games played is determined, whether the first situation or the second situation is determined regardless of whether or not the specific condition is established before the transition to the advantageous state. Therefore, by making it like the above configuration, while adjusting the execution rate of the second increase notification without discomfort in relation to the unnotified portion of the second increase notification, the increase notification during the advantageous state is the second increase notification It is possible to make it difficult to predict directly from the success or failure of a specific condition.

Feature A11. The execution lottery means defines a situation in which the number of games played after the transition to the advantageous state is less than the specified number as the second situation, and a situation in which the number of games played after the transition to the advantageous state is equal to or greater than the specified number as the first situation. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or feature A10, characterized in that it is possible to

As the number of games played during the advantageous state increases, the possibility of a game with a special result that triggers the execution of the second increase notification increases. On the condition that the increase processing that triggers the second increase notification is not performed during the advantageous state, the more the second increase notification is executed during the advantageous state, the less the unnotified portion is. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, as the number of games played in an advantageous state increases, the second increase notification becomes less likely to be executed, and the event that the unreported portion is exhausted can be made less likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the execution rate of the second increase notification without discomfort in relation to the non-reported portion of the second increase notification.

Feature A12. The execution lottery means defines as the first situation a situation in which the uninformed portion of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is less than the number of games of the second increase notification based on the current special result winning. Any one of the features A9 to A11, wherein the second situation can be a situation in which the unnotified amount is equal to or greater than the number of games of the second increase information based on the winning of the special result of this time. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

In the above configuration, the number of games not reported is directly discriminated and the winning probability of the execution lottery is changed, and when there is no or little unreported information, events such as trying to execute the second increase report will occur. The occurrence can be avoided more reliably.

Feature A13. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and a predetermined special pattern combination stops at the valid position, the privilege granting means imparts a privilege corresponding to the special result. ,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a special result (second combination in BB) that does not trigger the execution of the second increase notification by the third increase notification execution means is provided,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination stops at the valid position, the privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A7 to A12.

According to the above configuration, the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result that can trigger the execution of the second increase notification can appear even when the special result is won. Since the second increase notification is not executed based on the special results other than when the special result is won, the second increase notification is not always executed even if the special pattern combination appears. In this way, even when the second increase notification is not performed, it is possible to simulate the event when the increase processing is actually performed, and the second increase notification during the advantageous state is performed as if the increase processing is performed. It enhances the effect of making you feel as if you were ripped off.

Feature A14. The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein the privilege corresponding to the special result and the privilege corresponding to the special result are common.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the stop numbers are shared between when the special result is won and when the special result is won, the privilege given to each result is shared, so that the second increase notification It is possible to further enhance the effect of making it difficult to understand the execution trigger.

Feature A15. A first special lottery means (such as an attack mode by the main controller 101) capable of executing a first special lottery to determine whether the specific condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined trigger result. A function to execute the lottery process for adding the number of games),
When the result of the lottery by the first special lottery means is the result that the specific condition is satisfied, the aspect of the increase notification for the increase processing based on the specific condition is satisfied is the first increase by the first increase notification execution means. Second special lottery means capable of executing a second special lottery to select one mode from a plurality of modes including the mode of notification and the mode of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution means A function to execute a post-loading lottery process),
with
As the trigger result, a high probability trigger result (push order bell, push order replay) in which the probability of winning by the lottery means is relatively positive and a low probability trigger result (rare combination such as strong cherry and weak watermelon) are set. has been
In the second special lottery in the case of a winning result in the first special lottery based on the high probability trigger result, in the case of a winning result in the first special lottery based on the low probability trigger result The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the mode of the second increase notification by the second increase notification executing means is more likely to be selected than the second special lottery.

According to the above configuration, the increase processing based on the high-probability trigger result is more likely to be subject to the second increase notification by the second increase notification executing means than the increase processing based on the low-probability trigger result. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a low-probability trigger result, and the result is a so-called rare combination, a flashy performance is generally performed, and not only is it easy for the player to notice the winning, It is easy to recognize that the trigger for the increase processing has occurred. On the other hand, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a high-probability trigger result, it is more difficult to recognize that it triggers an increase process than in the case of a low-probability trigger result. Based on this premise, the increase processing based on the high-probability trigger result as described above is configured to be easily targeted for the second increase notification, so that the fact that the increase processing was performed and the second increase notification executing means It becomes difficult to realize that the unreported amount is accumulated due to By doing so, when the second increase notification is performed during an advantageous state, it becomes difficult to understand from what result the second increase notification is the increase notification.

In addition, the above configuration is limited to the configuration that "the first special lottery based on the low-probability trigger result is more likely to win the winning result than the first special lottery based on the high-probability trigger result". It is possible to further enhance the effect of making it difficult to recognize that the increase processing has been performed based on the trigger result.

Feature A16. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the transition result win is reserved until the pattern combination for transition stops at the effective position,
The driving control means is configured to provide a plurality of pattern combinations including a pattern combination for a first winning and a pattern combination for a second winning which is different from the pattern combination for the first winning in the effective position when the transition result is won. is to control each of the orbiting bodies so that it can be stopped,
When the pattern combination for the first winning is stopped, execution of the second increase notification by the third increase notification executing means is permitted, and when the pattern combination for the second winning is stopped. Features A1 to A15 characterized by comprising means for limiting execution of the second increase notification by the third increase notification execution means (function for executing processing for setting a freeze limit flag by the main control device 101) The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, whether or not to execute the second increase notification during the subsequent transition to the advantageous state differs depending on the stop roll when the transition result is won. More specifically, in the transition result winning game, when the pattern combination for the first winning is stopped, the second increase notification is executed, and when the pattern combination for the second winning is stopped, the execution of the second increase notification is restricted. be. These stop numbers appear based on the player's operation of the stop operation means. , is basically left to the player's operation. In other words, it becomes possible for the player to select whether or not to execute the second increase notification during the advantageous state, and it is possible to generate an effect according to the various needs of the player.

Feature A17. As the game state, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (advantage section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
low-advantage transition means for transitioning the high-advantage state to the low-advantage state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined termination condition (when the normal termination condition is satisfied in the section display second processing by the main controller 101); function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on) and
grasping means for grasping the number of remaining high-advantage states (number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG);
an increasing means (a function of executing a process for adding the number of games by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
Execution of a first increase notification capable of executing an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) when the increase processing is performed by the increase means. Means (a function of performing processing for executing an additional notification effect by the main control device 101);
An unexecuted portion for grasping an unexecuted portion in which the increase processing by the increasing means is not executed although the specific condition is satisfied, or the increase notification is not executed although the increase processing is performed by the increasing means. grasping means (function for executing processing for grasping the post-loading counter BG by the main control device 101);
Execution of a second increase notification capable of executing the increase notification for the unexecuted portion ascertained by the unexecuted portion grasping means by a predetermined notifying means during a predetermined limit period in which the fulfillment of the specific condition is restricted. Means (function for executing pseudo-addition processing during BB by main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and in the high advantage state, when a specific condition is satisfied, the remaining number of the high advantage state is increased. It has a so-called add-on function, and since an increase notification corresponding to an increase in the balance is performed, expectations for the fulfillment of the specific condition are heightened. Moreover, in the above-described configuration, during a predetermined restriction period in which the fulfillment of the specific condition is restricted, the increase notification may be performed based on the unexecuted portion of the increase processing or the increase notification. Also, the attention of the high-advantage state is increasing. Therefore, it is possible to favorably improve interest in the high-advantage state while preventing discrepancies between the actual remaining number and the reported number of times.

In addition, the above-mentioned "low-advantage transition means" may be expressed as follows.

``Low advantageous transition means for transitioning to the low advantageous state when the high advantageous state ends''; low-advantage transition means for transitioning to a low-advantage state".

It should be noted that the configurations indicated by features A1 to A16 may be applied individually to the configuration of feature A17, or the configurations indicated by features A1 to A16 may be applied in combination. In this case, the "high advantage state" is the "specific game state", the "low advantage state" is the "normal game state", the "predetermined limited period" is the "advantage state", and the "first increase notification execution means" is the "second The 1st increase notification execution means, the 2nd increase notification execution means, and the 2nd increase notification execution means may be appropriately read and applied as the 3rd increase notification execution means.

Feature A18. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (for example, special reply AB duplication 1), and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the specific transition result stops at the effective position. Advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to a specific advantageous state (restricted bonus) that is advantageous for the player (function for executing processing to transition to the restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As the game state, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (advantage section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
low-advantage transition means for transitioning the high-advantage state to the low-advantage state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined termination condition (when the normal termination condition is satisfied in the section display second processing by the main controller 101); function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on) and
grasping means for grasping the number of remaining high-advantage states (number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG);
an increasing means (a function of executing a process for adding the number of games by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
Execution of a first increase notification capable of executing an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) when the increase processing is performed by the increase means. Means (a function of performing processing for executing an additional notification effect by the main control device 101);
An unexecuted portion for grasping an unexecuted portion in which the increase processing by the increasing means is not executed although the specific condition is satisfied, or the increase notification is not executed although the increase processing is performed by the increasing means. grasping means (function for executing processing for grasping the post-loading counter BG by the main control device 101);
A second increase notification execution means (by main controller 101) capable of executing the increase notification for the unexecuted portion ascertained by the unexecuted portion grasping means by predetermined notification means during the predetermined specific advantageous state function to execute pseudo-addition processing during BB);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a benefit is granted by a privilege granting means if the rolled number corresponds to the result of the lottery, the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the specific transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the specific transition result is When it stops, it shifts to a specific advantageous state advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, furthermore, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and in the high advantage state, when a specific condition is satisfied, the number of remaining high advantage states is increased. Since an increase notification corresponding to an increase in the remaining number is performed, the expectation that the specific condition will be satisfied is heightened. Moreover, during the specific advantageous state, the increase notification may be performed based on the unexecuted amount of the increase processing or the increase notification, and the attention degree of the highly advantageous state is increased. In this case, since it is not necessary to actually establish the specific condition if it is an increase notification of the unexecuted amount, for example, a configuration in which the specific condition cannot be established in a specific advantageous state or the establishment of the specific condition is restricted. It is possible to execute the increase notification even in a configuration where the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to favorably improve interest during the high-advantage state while preventing discrepancies between the actual remaining number and the notified number.

In addition, the above-mentioned "low-advantage transition means" may be expressed as follows.

``Low advantageous transition means for transitioning to the low advantageous state when the high advantageous state ends''; low-advantage transition means for transitioning to a low-advantage state".

Feature A19. The gaming machine according to feature A18, further comprising means for restricting establishment of the specific condition in the predetermined specific advantageous state (a function of executing the process of step S3601 by the main controller 101).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to execute the increase notification even if the specific condition is not established in the specific advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game without increasing the advantage of the specific advantageous state too much. becomes possible.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"In a predetermined specific advantageous state, establishment of the specific condition is restricted."

Feature A20. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when a second set value different from the first set value is set, the second increase notification executing means executes the increase notification. The gaming machine according to feature A18 or feature A19, characterized in that the probability of winning is common.

According to the above configuration, the probability that the increase notification is executed during the specific advantageous state is common regardless of the set value, so it is difficult to predict the set value from the occurrence rate of the increase notification during the specific advantageous state. can be done. In particular, considering the idea that the range of increase or decrease in the game media due to the set value should be small, it is considered that the difference in the degree of advantage due to the set value should not occur with respect to the high advantage state, and the execution of the increase process. It is considered that the rate, that is, the occurrence rate of the increase notification should also be set so as not to cause a difference due to the set value. Then, if the occurrence rate of the increase notification during the specific advantageous state does not differ due to the set value as in the above configuration, there will be no discrepancy in relation to the increase notification during the high advantageous state, and the specific advantageous state It is possible to enjoy the increase notification in the middle without a sense of incongruity.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the number of times the first setting value is set in the predetermined game in the predetermined specific advantageous state is increased." 2. The probability that the increase notification is executed by the increase notification execution means is common."

Feature A21. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the second increase notification executing means performs the increase in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A20, wherein probabilities of execution of notification are different.

According to the above configuration, the probability of executing the increase notification in a predetermined manner during the specific advantageous state differs depending on the set value. Therefore, for example, the difference in the number of occurrences of the increase notification becomes large between a set value that increases the execution rate of the increase notification of the predetermined mode and a set value that decreases the execution rate, and the impression received with the higher set value (a lot) There is also a large difference between the impression received at the lower setting value (the impression that the increase notification is not executed easily) and the impression received at the lower set value (the impression that the increase notification is not executed easily). On the other hand, the increase notification during the specific advantageous state does not affect the advantage even if the execution rate is increased, so the difference in the number of occurrences of the increase notification during all games does not affect the advantage. By doing so, it becomes possible to increase the difference in the impression given by the difference in the setting value rather than the difference in the actual advantage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game while ensuring the fairness of the game. can.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the number of times the first setting value is set in the predetermined game in the predetermined specific advantageous state is increased." 2. The probabilities that the increase notification execution means executes the increase notification in a predetermined manner are different.

Feature A22. A first control means (main controller 101) having at least the low-advantage transition means and a second control means (display control device 81) having the first increase notification execution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A21, wherein the first control means has the unexecuted portion grasping means.

According to the above configuration, the first control means is provided with the low-advantage state transition means that contributes to the player's profit, and the second control means is provided with the configuration for notification such as the first increase notification execution means. It is possible to suitably execute each process while achieving decentralization, and to suitably take countermeasures against fraud and the like by concentrating the means involved in profit in the first control means.

In addition, by providing the unexecuted part grasping means on the first control means side, it is possible to reflect the grasping result of the unexecuted part grasping means to the processing on the first control means side. That is, for example, it is possible to reflect the grasped result of the unexecuted portion grasping means in the lottery of each game, and the grasped result of the unexecuted portion grasping means can be reflected in the manner of notifying the result of each game (slot machine reel control, etc.). ). By doing so, even if the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is performed as an effect, the effect is improved compared to a configuration in which only the display screen for effect controlled by the second control means is used. It is possible to raise it further.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "predetermined information can be output from the first control means to the second control means, and predetermined information output is performed from the second control means to the first control means." By providing the configuration of "not executed", the significance of providing the unexecuted portion grasping means on the side of the first control means is further enhanced.

Feature A23. The driving control means causes the revolving bodies to start revolving when the starting operation means is operated, and stops the revolving bodies to revolve when the stopping operation means is operated. year,
When executing the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means, special drive control means (main control A gaming machine according to feature A22, characterized by comprising a function of executing rotation effect processing by the device 101).

According to the above configuration, when the increase notification is performed during the specific advantageous state, a so-called freeze occurs as a specific game action in which the start or progress of the normal game action is restricted. In this way, it is possible to grasp that the increase notification is performed through the fact that the progress of the rotation of the orbiting body, such as start and stop, is restricted and frozen, and if the increase notification is performed during the freeze, It is also suppressed that the increase notification is overlooked. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the increase notification, and to preferably achieve the effect of performing the increase notification during the specific advantageous state.

Feature A24. The second increase notification executing means can execute the increase notification in a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined special result (3rd win in BB) in the predetermined specific advantageous state. The game machine according to any one of features A18 to A23, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in the game in which the lottery result in the specific advantageous state is the special result, the increase notification based on the unexecuted amount can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the increase notification during the specific advantageous state is not something whose execution has been decided in advance or is just a performance, but that it has occurred because a special result was drawn as a lottery result. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of making it seem as if the increase processing was actually performed.

Feature A25. When the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result in the predetermined specific advantageous state, execution lottery means (pseudo-additional lottery process by main controller 101) for executing lottery to determine whether or not to execute the increase notification. function),
The gaming machine according to feature A24, wherein the second increase notification executing means executes the increase notification according to a lottery result by the execution lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the increase notification is not executed by the second increase notification executing means only by winning the special result, but the increase notification is executed through the execution lottery. Therefore, when the special result is won, the increase notification may not be executed. By doing so, the increase notification is performed in a flow that is closer to the flow of the actual increase processing, and the effect of making it seem as if the increase processing has been performed is enhanced.

In addition, by adopting the above configuration, when the lottery result in the specific advantageous state is a special result, it is difficult to give a sense of discomfort even if the increase notification is not executed. That is, as described in feature A18, the second increase notification execution means is configured to execute increase notification based on the unexecuted portion, and if there is no unexecuted portion, for example, so as not to win a special result A special configuration, such as changing the lottery table, that does not require the increase notification may be required. In that respect, in the case of the configuration that passes through the execution lottery as in the above configuration, if there is no unexecuted lottery, it is sufficient to simply disqualify the execution lottery, without using a special configuration. It becomes possible to manage whether or not to execute the increase notification.

Feature A26. The execution lottery means sets the winning probability of the execution lottery to a first probability when transitioning to the predetermined specific advantageous state in the first situation, and sets the winning probability of the execution lottery to the predetermined specific advantageous state to a second state different from the first situation. The gaming machine according to feature A25, wherein the winning probability of the execution lottery can be set to a second probability higher than the first probability when the situation shifts.

According to the above configuration, the execution probability of the increase notification at the time of winning the special result is changed according to the state of transition to the specific advantageous state, the execution mode of the increase notification is diversified, and the increase notification during the specific advantageous state In the game by, it is possible to preferably improve interest.

Feature A27. The execution lottery means defines a situation in which the number of games played after the transition to the high advantage state is less than a predetermined number as the first situation, and a situation in which the number of games played after the transition to the high advantage state is equal to or greater than the predetermined number as the second situation. The gaming machine according to feature A26, characterized in that it is possible to

If the number of games played after the transition to the high advantage state increases, the possibility that the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means has not yet been executed also increases. Further, if the number of games played is determined, whether the first situation or the second situation is determined regardless of whether or not the specific condition is established before shifting to the specific advantageous state. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, the increase notification during the specific advantageous state is based on the unexecuted portion while adjusting the execution rate of the increase notification without discomfort in relation to the unexecuted portion of the increase notification. can be made difficult to predict directly from the success or failure of specific conditions.

Feature A28. The execution lottery means sets a situation in which the number of games played after transitioning to the predetermined specific advantageous state is less than a specific number as the second situation, and a situation in which the number of games played after the transition is equal to or greater than the specific number. as the first situation, or the gaming machine according to feature A27 or feature A27.

As the number of games completed during the specific advantageous state increases, the possibility of having a game for which the increase notification is to be executed is likely to increase. Then, in a configuration in which the increase processing that triggers the increase notification is not performed during the specific advantageous state, the more the increase notification is executed during the specific advantageous state, the less the unexecuted portion is. Therefore, by adopting the above-described configuration, the more the number of games played in the specific advantageous state, the more difficult it is to perform the increase notification, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the unexecuted games are exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably adjust the execution rate of the increase notification in relation to the unexecuted portion.

Feature A29. The execution lottery means sets a situation in which the unexecuted amount of the increase notification is less than the current number of games for which the second increase notification execution means has performed the increase notification as the first situation, and the unexecuted amount is the current second increase notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features A26 to A28, wherein a situation in which the number of games for which the increase notification is given by the increase notification execution means or more can be set as the second situation.

In the above configuration, the number of unexecuted games is directly discriminated and the winning probability of the execution lottery is changed, and when there is no or little unexecuted game, the second increase notification executing means tries to execute the increase notification. It is possible to more reliably avoid the occurrence of events such as

Feature A30. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and the predetermined special combination of patterns stops at the effective position, the privilege granting means grants a privilege corresponding to the special result. ,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a special result (second combination in BB) that does not trigger the execution of the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is provided,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination stops at the valid position, the privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A29.

According to the above configuration, the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result that can trigger the execution of the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means can appear even when the special result is won. Since the increase notification is not executed based on the special result, even if a special combination of symbols appears, the increase notification is not necessarily executed. By doing so, it is possible to simulate the event when the increase processing is actually performed, including the scene where the increase notification is not performed, and the increase notification during the predetermined period is as if the increase processing was performed. It enhances the effect of making you think.

Feature A31. The gaming machine according to feature A30, wherein the privilege corresponding to the special result and the privilege corresponding to the special result are common.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the stop numbers are shared between when the special result is won and when the special result is won, the privilege to be given is made common regardless of the result, so that the increase notification is executed. It is possible to further enhance the effect of making the opportunity difficult to understand.

Feature A32. A first special lottery means (such as an attack mode by the main controller 101) capable of executing a first special lottery to determine whether or not the specific condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined trigger result. A function to execute the lottery process for adding the number of games),
When the result of the lottery by the first special lottery means indicates that the specific condition is satisfied, the execution mode of at least one of the increase processing and the increase notification based on the establishment of the specific condition is grasped by the unexecuted part grasping means. a second special lottery means capable of executing a second special lottery for selecting one mode from a plurality of modes including the target mode (function for executing post-loading lottery processing by the main controller 101);
with
As the trigger results, high-probability trigger results (push-order bell, push-order replay) in which the probability of winning by the lottery means is relatively positive and low-probability trigger results (rare roles such as strong cherry and weak watermelon) are set. has been
In the second special lottery in the case of a winning result in the first special lottery based on the high probability trigger result, in the case of a winning result in the first special lottery based on the low probability trigger result The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A31, wherein a mode to be grasped by the unexecuted game grasping means is more likely to be selected than the second special lottery.

According to the above configuration, the specific condition based on the high-probability trigger result is more likely to be grasped by the unexecuted part grasping means than the specific condition based on the low-probability trigger result because the increase processing and the increase notification are not executed. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a low-probability trigger result, and the result is a so-called rare combination, a flashy performance is generally performed, and not only is it easy for the player to notice the winning, It is easy to recognize that the trigger for the increase processing has occurred. On the other hand, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a high-probability trigger result, it is more difficult to recognize that it triggers an increase process than in the case of a low-probability trigger result. Based on this premise, as described above, the increase processing and increase notification based on the high probability trigger result are likely to be unexecuted, so that the unexecuted portion that is the target of the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means It becomes difficult to realize that the is accumulated. By doing so, when the increase notification is performed during the specific advantageous state, it becomes difficult to understand from what result the increase notification is derived.

In addition, the above configuration is limited to the configuration that "the first special lottery based on the low-probability trigger result is more likely to win the winning result than the first special lottery based on the high-probability trigger result". It is possible to further enhance the effect of making it difficult to recognize that the increase processing has been performed based on the trigger result.

Feature A33. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific transition result, the winning of the specific transition result is reserved until the pattern combination for transition stops at the valid position,
The driving control means is configured to provide a plurality of pattern combinations including a pattern combination for a first winning and a pattern combination for a second winning which is different from the pattern combination for the first winning in the effective position when the transition result is won. is to control each of the orbiting bodies so that it can be stopped,
When the pattern combination for the first winning is stopped, execution of the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means is allowed, and when the pattern combination for the second winning is stopped, the second increase notification is permitted. 2 Any one of features A18 to A32, characterized by comprising a means for limiting execution of the increase notification by the increase notification execution means (a function of executing processing for setting a freeze limit flag by the main control device 101) The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, depending on the stop roll when the specific transfer result is won, whether or not to execute the increase notification during the specific advantageous state that occurs thereafter differs. More specifically, in the transition result winning game, when the pattern combination for the first win is stopped, the increase notification is executed, and when the pattern combination for the second win is stopped, the execution of the increase notification is restricted. be. These stop numbers appear based on the player's operation of the stop operation means. , is basically left to the player's operation. In other words, it becomes possible for the player to select whether or not to execute the increase notification during the specific advantageous state, and it is possible to generate an effect according to the various needs of the player.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result (for example, special reply A overlap 1), and the pattern combination for the first transition corresponding to the first transition result stops at the effective position. Based on this, a first advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to a first advantageous state (non-restricted bonus) that is advantageous for the player (a process for shifting to a restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101). functions to perform) and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result (for example, special reply AB duplication 1), and the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result stops at the effective position. Second advantage transition means for shifting the game state to a second advantageous state (restricted bonus) that is advantageous for the player (processing for shifting to a non-restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101). functions to perform) and
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
Normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (when the normal end condition is satisfied in the section display second process function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on),
grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games in the specific gaming state (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
an increasing means (a function of executing a process for adding the number of games by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification execution means (display A function of executing the setting process of the additional effect by the control device 81);
with
The increase notification executing means can execute the increase notification in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state,
In the first advantageous state, the specific condition can be satisfied when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined special result (3rd win in BB), while in the second advantageous state, the lottery. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific condition is not established when the result of the lottery by means is the special result.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result and the second transition result, and these first transition result and the second transition result. When the pattern combination corresponding to the second shift result stops, the game shifts to a first advantageous state or a second advantageous state, which is advantageous for the player. In such a configuration, furthermore, there is provided a specific game state in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of state notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game.

Moreover, in the specific game state, when the specific condition is established, an increase process is performed to increase the remaining number that can be a trigger for ending the specific game state, and an increase notification is performed. Therefore, in the game characteristic of waiting for winning the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state while enjoying the benefit from the mode notification of the specific game state, the increase process can extend the waiting state while enjoying the benefit. As a result, the chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state is more likely to occur. Not only that, if the state is shifted to the first advantageous state, the increase processing can be performed even during the first advantageous state. On the other hand, when transitioning to the second advantageous state, the increase processing cannot be performed during the second advantageous state. Therefore, the degree of advantage greatly differs depending on which advantageous state the player transitions to during the specific game state, and from this point of view as well, the playability is greatly improved.

As described above, by not performing the increase process in the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage from the first advantageous state and increase or decrease the amount of game media. On the other hand, when looking at the second advantageous state alone, the game in the second advantageous state is uninteresting for the player who expected the transition to the first advantageous state, and there is concern that the degree of attention will be lowered. On the other hand, even if the increase notification is performed as a mere effect in the second advantageous state, there is a large difference from the fact that the increase processing is not performed, and there is a possibility that it may rather cause a decrease in the degree of attention.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the increase notification is performed while the increase processing is not performed during the second advantageous state, and the increase notification during the second advantageous state is increased during the first advantageous state. It is configured to be executed with a special result, which is the game result of the case, as a trigger. In other words, in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the increase notification is executed in the game with a special result. will be based on Therefore, when the increase notification is performed without the increase processing during the second advantageous state, the increase notification is not performed as a mere effect, but the impression is strengthened that the increase notification has actually undergone the increase processing. becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably increase the degree of attention of the second advantageous state.

In addition, the above configuration is
"The increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, and in the first advantageous state, the lottery result by the lottery means is predetermined. While the specific condition can be satisfied when a special result (3rd hand in BB) is obtained, the specific condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the second advantageous state. It doesn't work
"The increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, and the specific condition can be satisfied in the first advantageous state, It is not established in the second advantageous state, and in the first advantageous state, the specific condition can be established when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (3rd win in BB). On the other hand, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the second advantageous state, the specific condition is not established."

Moreover, the above-mentioned "normal transition means" may be expressed as follows.

"Normal transition means for shifting to the normal game state when the specific game state ends" and "Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state, the specific game state is changed to the normal "Normal transition means for transitioning to a game state".

Feature B2. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the special result in the first advantageous state and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the special result in the second advantageous state are common. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the increase notification in the first advantageous state and the occurrence rate of the increase notification in the second advantageous state are common, and the increase notification during the second advantageous state is the increase during the first advantageous state It is possible to further enhance the effect of simulating notification.

Feature B3. The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the valid position. can be,
The increase notification executing means can execute the increase notification in a game in which the special symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position in the first advantageous state, and the special symbol combination in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the increase notification can be executed in a game in which the player can stop at the effective position.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the increase notification can be performed when the special result is won in both advantageous states, not only the lottery result but also the stop result is common, and the executed increase notification is the increase notification based on the lottery result. can be further strengthened. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention during the second advantageous state of feature B1.

In particular, it is based on the premise that the lottery by the lottery means and the driving of the revolving body, etc., which are involved in the profit of the player, are performed by the control device on the main side, and the effects such as the display screen are performed by the control device on the sub side. For example, it can be considered that the player trusts the action and the stop result of the looping body under the control of the main side more than the performance content under the control of the sub side. In other words, it is highly likely that the contents shown only by the effects on the display screen, etc., without accompanying the action of the revolving body or the stop result, will be seen as just the effects. In that respect, in the above configuration, the effect contents of the increase notification during the second advantageous state and the increase notification during the first advantageous state match, including the stop roll, so that it is not a mere effect, but an actual increase. There is a high possibility that it will be determined that processing has been performed.

Feature B4. the special result is a first special result;
The privilege granting means corresponds to the first special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result stops at the valid position. It is possible to grant the privilege to
If the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the first advantageous state is a predetermined second special result (first win in BB), the specific condition is not established, and in the second advantageous state The specific condition is not satisfied even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result,
The increase notification executing means does not execute the increase notification when the second special result is won in the first advantageous state and the special symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the second The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein when the second special result is won in an advantageous state and the special symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, the increase notification is not executed.

In both cases, a first special result and a second special result having a common stopping number are provided as special symbol combinations. If the second special result wins, the increase process is not executed. In addition, in the second advantageous state, the increase process is not executed even if either the first special result or the second special result is won. In this way, it becomes difficult to understand which of the first special result and the second special result is the trigger for the increased notification that can be executed during the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. , it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the increase notification during the second advantageous state has not undergone the increase processing.

Feature B5. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the second special result in the first advantageous state and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the second special result in the second advantageous state are common. The game machine according to feature B4, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the increase notification when the special combination of symbols is stopped during the first advantageous state and the occurrence rate of the increase notification when the special combination of symbols is stopped during the second advantageous state are different. In common, it is possible to enhance the effect of making the increase notification during the second advantageous state resemble the increase notification during the first advantageous state.

Feature B6. The feature B3 is characterized in that the increase notification executing means can execute the increase notification during the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state at a timing after the special symbol combination stops at the effective position. The game machine according to any one of B5.

According to the above configuration, when the special symbol combination can be stopped, the increase notification is performed, and the increase notification is performed after the special symbol combination is stopped. Based on the premise that the stop result is more effective in making the player trust than the notification of the display effect, etc., the above configuration can be said to provide the reliability of the content of the notification before the increase notification. In other words, it is configured to execute the increase notification after judging or convincing that the increase processing has actually been performed by the stop result. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making the increase notification during the second advantageous state seem to be accompanied by the increase processing.

Feature B7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, determination processing can be executed for determining whether the game with the special result is in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state. Determining means (function for executing the processing of step S3601 by the main controller 101),
The increase notification executing means executes a first process when the determination means determines that the first advantageous state is established, and executes the first process when the determination means determines that the second advantageous state exists. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that a process different from that is executed.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the same special result is used for the increase notification in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the processing for the increase notification is the first processing and the second processing based on the determination result of the determination means. different from processing. In other words, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state have the same processing configuration up to the middle when the special result is won, and the complication of the processing configuration is suppressed in addition to exhibiting the excellent effects of the above features. .

Feature B8. The first process and the second process are set so that there is at least a predetermined common process (an addition process of the display remaining number counter HG by the main controller 101) between the first process and the second process. The gaming machine according to feature B7, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the processing after the judgment processing in the case of winning the special result is different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, common processing is set for the processing after the judgment processing. Therefore, while making it easy to distinguish advantageous states in the gaming machine, the processing configuration is similar, and the processing configuration can be further simplified.

Feature B9. The increase notification execution means is
In the first advantageous state, it is possible to execute the increase notification about the result of the increase process executed based on the special result winning during the first advantageous state,
In the second advantageous state, the increase notification regarding the result of the increase processing executed before shifting to the second advantageous state can be executed based on the special result winning. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that during the first advantageous state, the increase notification corresponding to the result of the increase processing executed based on the special result winning during the first advantageous state is executed, and the second advantageous state is executed. Inside, an increase notification corresponding to the result of the increase processing performed before the transition to the second advantageous state is performed based on the special result winning. In this way, even in a configuration in which the specific condition is not satisfied during the second advantageous state, the increase notification can be executed during the second advantageous state, and the increase notification can be applied to the increase processing executed during the advantageous state. It is possible to strengthen the impression that they correspond.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, wherein the pattern combination for the first transition and the pattern combination for the second transition are common.

According to the above configuration, since the symbol combination for the first transition to shift to the first advantageous state and the symbol combination for the second transition to the second advantageous state are common, the stop rolls at the time of transition are common. From now on, it will be impossible to judge which one is the advantageous situation this time. As a result, it becomes difficult to determine whether the increase notification to be executed is the increase notification that has undergone the increase processing or the increase notification that has not been processed, and the degree of attention during the second advantageous state can be preferably increased.

Feature B11. Both the first transition result and the second transition result include an advantageous result (first BB) that enables transition to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, and either one of the advantageous results A result that includes a duplicate result (special reply B) that is different from
The privilege imparting means stops, at the effective position, a picture combination for duplication corresponding to the result of duplication, which is different from the picture combination for the first shift and the picture combination for the second shift. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein a privilege corresponding to the overlapping result is given based on the fact that the game has been played.

According to the above configuration, there is a difference between the first transition result and the second transition result as to whether or not the overlapping result is included as the winning content, and the overlapping result is the symbol combination for the first transition or the symbol for the second transition. A prize is won by stopping a pattern combination for duplication that is different from the combination. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the first transition result is winning or the second transition result is winning by stopping the combination of symbols for overlapping and establishing the winning as a result of overlapping. As a result, while obtaining the effect of making the increase notification during the second advantageous state appear to have undergone the increase processing as described above, it is determined that the increase notification during the second advantageous state has not undergone the increase processing. It is possible to meet the conflicting needs of players who want to enjoy the performance and those who do not.

Feature B12. When the stop operation means is operated in the first mode in which the overlapping picture combination corresponding to the overlapping result can be stopped, the overlapping picture combination can be stopped, while the overlapping picture combination can be stopped in the first mode. When operated in a second mode different from the above, the other pattern combination different from the overlapping pattern combination is stopped,
The gaming machine according to feature B11, wherein the other symbol combination can be stopped regardless of whether the first transition result or the second transition result is won.

According to the above configuration, it is necessary to operate the stop operation means in the first mode in order to determine the first transition result and the second transition result by establishing the overlapping result winning. If the second mode is adopted without the first transition result, it becomes impossible to judge the first transition result and the second transition result. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the increase notification is the first increase notification or the second increase notification only when the stop operation means can be operated in the first mode. In this way, if the player wants to enjoy the performance, he/she can operate in the second mode, and if not, he or she can operate in the first mode. It is possible to pick up on the machine side.

Feature B13. The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the second mode is a mode that the player can operate more easily than the first mode.

According to the above configuration, in order to be able to determine the type of increase notification, it is necessary to operate in the first mode, which is more difficult, and in the game characteristics of the slot machine in which the game is progressed by operating the stop operation means, the increase notification is reduced. It is possible to incorporate even the presence or absence of determination of the type of the game into the game.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

A configuration in which "in a specific loop (left reel 32L) among the loops, the number of patterns arranged corresponding to the overlapping pattern combination is smaller than the number of patterns arranged corresponding to the other pattern combination"; , "the period during which the operation of the stop operation means is in the first mode is shorter than the period in which the operation is in the second mode".

Feature B14. The specific condition according to any one of characteristics B1 to B13, wherein the specific condition can be satisfied in the game in which the first transition result is won, but is not satisfied in the game in which the second transition result is won. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the relationship between the first advantageous state in which the specific condition can be satisfied and the second advantageous state in which the specific condition is not satisfied is matched, and the effect of adjusting the ball output depending on the success or failure of the specific condition can be achieved in the winning game. can be expected to include

In particular, if this configuration is applied to a configuration in which the winning game can have different stop numbers as in the feature B11, the game will be played while paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is established in the winning game. Assuming this, the stop operation of each stop operation means is likely to be a careful operation, and the interest in the stop result of the winning game is likely to be attracted. Therefore, it becomes possible to exhibit the effect of characteristic B11 more suitably.

Feature B15. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result when the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, wherein the probabilities are the same, but the probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result are different.

According to the above configuration, the first advantageous state in which the increase process is performed (the specific condition can be satisfied) has the same winning probability regardless of the set value, and the increase process is not performed (the specific condition is not satisfied). ) In the second advantageous state, the probability of winning differs depending on the set value. By doing so, the game property that the winning result and the degree of advantage are different depending on the stop operation mode is realized by the second advantageous state regardless of the set value, and then the winning probability of the second advantageous state is set by the set value. It is also possible to give an impression as if the set values are involved in the game characteristics of the stop operation mode by simulating the first advantageous state in which the number is different.

Feature B16. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result (for example, special reply A overlap 1), and the pattern combination for the first transition corresponding to the first transition result stops at the effective position. Based on this, a first advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to a first advantageous state (non-restricted bonus) that is advantageous for the player (a process for shifting to a restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101). function) and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result (for example, special reply AB duplication 1), and the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result stops at the effective position. Second advantage transition means for shifting the game state to a second advantageous state (restricted bonus) that is advantageous for the player (processing for shifting to a non-restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101). function) and
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
Normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (when the normal end condition is satisfied in the section display second process function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on),
grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games in the specific gaming state (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
an increasing means (a function of executing a process for adding the number of games by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
First increase notification execution means capable of executing an increase notification (immediate ride notification) on the result of the increase process by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) when the increase process is performed by the increase means. (a function of executing a setting process of an additional effect by the display control device 81);
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, execution of the increase processing by the increasing means is permitted, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state, the increase by the increasing means. a specific means for restricting the execution of processing (an additional lottery table set to allow an additional lottery during a non-restricted bonus by the main controller 101 and restrict an additional lottery during a restricted bonus);
When the specific condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state, the increase processing by the increasing means is not executed, or the increase processing is executed by the increasing means but the increase notification is not executed. A second increase notification execution means (function for executing pseudo-addition processing during BB by main controller 101) capable of executing the increase notification by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the amount of execution;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result and the second transition result, and these first transition result and the second transition result. When the pattern combination corresponding to the second shift result stops, the game shifts to a first advantageous state or a second advantageous state, which is advantageous for the player. In such a configuration, furthermore, there is provided a specific game state in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of state notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game.

Moreover, in the specific game state, when the specific condition is established, an increase process is performed to increase the remaining number that can be a trigger for ending the specific game state, and an increase notification is performed. Therefore, in the game characteristic of waiting for winning the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state while enjoying the benefit from the mode notification of the specific game state, the increase process can extend the waiting state while enjoying the benefit. As a result, the chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state is more likely to occur. Not only that, if the state is shifted to the first advantageous state, the increase processing can be performed even during the first advantageous state. On the other hand, when transitioning to the second advantageous state, the increase processing cannot be performed during the second advantageous state. Therefore, the degree of advantage greatly differs depending on which advantageous state the player transitions to during the specific game state, and from this point of view as well, the playability is greatly improved.

As described above, by not performing the increase process in the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage from the first advantageous state and increase or decrease the amount of game media. On the other hand, when looking at the second advantageous state alone, the game in the second advantageous state is uninteresting for the player who expected the transition to the first advantageous state, and there is concern that the degree of attention will be lowered. On the other hand, even if the increase notification is performed as a mere effect in the second advantageous state, there is a large difference from the fact that the increase processing is not performed, and there is a possibility that it may rather cause a decrease in the degree of attention.

Therefore, in the above configuration, although the increase processing is not performed even if the specific condition is satisfied during the second advantageous state, the increase notification is performed based on the unexecuted portion of the increase processing and the increase notification. It is possible to improve the playability in the second advantageous state while preventing discrepancies between the remaining number and the reported number. Therefore, attention to the game can be increased without excessively increasing the degree of advantage in the second advantageous state.

In addition, the above-mentioned "normal transition means" may be expressed as follows.

"Normal transition means for shifting to the normal game state when the specific game state ends" and "Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state, the specific game state is changed to the normal "Normal transition means for transitioning to a game state".

Feature B17. The gaming machine according to feature B16, wherein the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state and the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state are common.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the increase notification in the first advantageous state and the occurrence rate of the increase notification in the second advantageous state are common, and the increase notification during the second advantageous state is the increase during the first advantageous state It is possible to further enhance the effect of simulating notification.

Feature B18. The specific condition can be satisfied when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (3rd win in BB),
The specifying means permits the execution of the increase process when the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result in the first advantageous state, while the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature B16 or feature B17, wherein execution of the increase processing is restricted when a special result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, the game result that triggers the establishment of the specific condition is the same as the special result in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to strongly give the impression that the increase processing has been performed even for the increase notification during the second advantageous state in which the execution of the increase processing is actually restricted.

Feature B19. The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the valid position. can be,
According to the specifying means, when execution of the increase process is permitted during the first advantageous state and when execution of the increase process is restricted during the second advantageous state, the special The gaming machine of feature B18, wherein the combination of symbols can be stopped.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which an increase notification can be performed when a special result is won, not only the lottery results but also the stop numbers are common, and the executed increase notification is an increase notification based on the lottery result, further strengthening the impression. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention during the second advantageous state.

In particular, it is based on the premise that the lottery by the lottery means and the driving of the revolving body, etc., which are involved in the profit of the player, are performed by the control device on the main side, and the effects such as the display screen are performed by the control device on the sub side. For example, it can be considered that the player trusts the action and the stop result of the looping body under the control of the main side more than the performance content under the control of the sub side. In other words, it is highly likely that the contents shown only by the effects on the display screen, etc., without accompanying the action of the revolving body or the stop result, will be seen as just the effects. In that respect, in the above configuration, the effect contents of the increase notification during the second advantageous state and the increase notification during the first advantageous state match, including the stop roll, so that it is not a mere effect, but an actual increase. There is a high possibility that it will be determined that processing has been performed.

Feature B20. the special result is a first special result;
A second special result (second hand in BB) different from the first special result is set as a lottery result by the lottery means,
The privilege granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result stops at the valid position, a privilege corresponding to the first special result can be given. can be,
A lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and when the special pattern combination stops at the valid position, a privilege corresponding to the second special result can be given,
The gaming machine according to feature B19, wherein the specific condition is not satisfied when the lottery result of the lottery means is the second special result (3rd win in BB).

In both cases, a first special result and a second special result having a common stopping number are provided as special symbol combinations. If the second special result wins, the increase process is not executed. In addition, in the second advantageous state, the increase process is not executed even if either the first special result or the second special result is won. In this way, it becomes difficult to understand which of the first special result and the second special result is the trigger for the increased notification that can be executed during the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. , it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the increase notification during the second advantageous state has not undergone the increase processing.

In addition, the "second special result" is expressed as "a second special result different from the first special result as a lottery result by the lottery means in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state", It is possible to more clearly exhibit the effect of winning the second special result during the both-advantageous state.

Feature B21. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the second special result in the first advantageous state and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the second special result in the second advantageous state are common. The gaming machine according to feature B20, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the increase notification when the special combination of symbols is stopped during the first advantageous state and the occurrence rate of the increase notification when the special combination of symbols is stopped during the second advantageous state are different. In common, it is possible to enhance the effect of making the increase notification during the second advantageous state resemble the increase notification during the first advantageous state.

Feature B22. The game according to any one of features B19 to B21, wherein the second increase notification executing means can execute the increase notification at a timing after the special symbol combination stops at the valid position. machine.

According to the above configuration, when the special symbol combination can be stopped, the increase notification is performed, and the increase notification is performed after the special symbol combination is stopped. Based on the premise that the stop result is more effective in making the player trust than the notification of the display effect, etc., the above configuration can be said to provide the reliability of the content of the notification before the increase notification. In other words, it is configured to execute the increase notification after judging or convincing that the increase processing has actually been performed by the stop result. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making the increase notification during the second advantageous state seem to be accompanied by the increase processing.

Feature B23. The specific condition can be satisfied when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (3rd win in BB),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, determination processing can be executed for determining whether the game with the special result is in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state. Determining means (function for executing the processing of step S3601 by the main controller 101),
The first increase notification execution means executes a first process after the determination means determines that the first advantageous state is established,
Any one of characteristics B16 to B22, wherein the second increase notification executing means executes a second process different from the first process after the determining means determines that the second advantageous state is established. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the same special result is used for the increase notification in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the processing for the increase notification is the first processing and the second processing based on the determination result of the determination means. different from processing. In other words, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state have the same processing configuration up to the middle when the special result is won, and the complication of the processing configuration is suppressed in addition to exhibiting the excellent effects of the above features. .

Feature B24. The first process and the second process are set so that there is at least a predetermined common process (an addition process of the display remaining number counter HG by the main controller 101) between the first process and the second process. The gaming machine according to feature B23, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the processing after the judgment processing in the case of winning the special result is different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, common processing is set for the processing after the judgment processing. Therefore, while making it easy to distinguish advantageous states in the gaming machine, the processing configuration is similar, and the processing configuration can be further simplified.

Feature B25. The gaming machine according to any one of features B16 to B24, wherein the pattern combination for the first transition and the pattern combination for the second transition are common.

According to the above configuration, since the symbol combination for the first transition to shift to the first advantageous state and the symbol combination for the second transition to the second advantageous state are common, the stop rolls at the time of transition are common. From now on, it will be impossible to judge which one is the advantageous situation this time. As a result, it becomes difficult to determine whether the increase notification to be executed is the increase notification that has undergone the increase processing or the increase notification that has not been processed, and the degree of attention during the second advantageous state can be preferably increased.

Feature B26. Both the first transition result and the second transition result include an advantageous result (first BB) that enables transition to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, and either one of the advantageous results A result that includes a duplicate result (special reply B) that is different from
The privilege imparting means stops, at the effective position, a picture combination for duplication corresponding to the result of duplication, which is different from the picture combination for the first shift and the picture combination for the second shift. The gaming machine according to any one of features B16 to B25, wherein a privilege corresponding to the overlapping result is given based on the fact that the game has been played.

According to the above configuration, there is a difference between the first transition result and the second transition result as to whether or not the overlapping result is included as the winning content, and the overlapping result is the symbol combination for the first transition or the symbol for the second transition. A prize is won by stopping a pattern combination for duplication that is different from the combination. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the first transition result is winning or the second transition result is winning by stopping the combination of symbols for overlapping and establishing the winning as a result of overlapping. As a result, while obtaining the effect of making the increase notification during the second advantageous state appear to have undergone the increase processing as described above, it is determined that the increase notification during the second advantageous state has not undergone the increase processing. It is possible to meet the conflicting needs of players who want to enjoy the performance and those who do not.

Feature B27. When the stop operation means is operated in the first mode in which the overlapping picture combination corresponding to the overlapping result can be stopped, the overlapping picture combination can be stopped, while the overlapping picture combination can be stopped in the first mode. When operated in a second mode different from the above, the other pattern combination different from the overlapping pattern combination is stopped,
The gaming machine according to feature B26, wherein the other symbol combination can be stopped regardless of whether the first transition result or the second transition result is won.

According to the above configuration, it is necessary to operate the stop operation means in the first mode in order to determine the first transition result and the second transition result by establishing the overlapping result winning. If the second mode is adopted without the first transition result, it becomes impossible to judge the first transition result and the second transition result. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the increase notification is the first increase notification or the second increase notification only when the stop operation means can be operated in the first mode. In this way, if the player wants to enjoy the performance, he/she can operate in the second mode, and if not, he or she can operate in the first mode. It is possible to pick up on the machine side.

Feature B28. The gaming machine according to feature B27, wherein the second mode is a mode that the player can operate more easily than the first mode.

According to the above configuration, in order to be able to determine the type of increase notification, it is necessary to operate in the first mode, which is more difficult, and in the game characteristics of the slot machine in which the game is progressed by operating the stop operation means, the increase notification is reduced. It is possible to incorporate even the presence or absence of determination of the type of the game into the game.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

A configuration in which "in a specific loop (left reel 32L) among the loops, the number of patterns arranged corresponding to the overlapping pattern combination is smaller than the number of patterns arranged corresponding to the other pattern combination"; , "The period in which the operation of the stop operation means is in the first mode is shorter than the period in which the operation is in the second mode."

Feature B29. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics B16 to B28, wherein the specific condition can be satisfied by winning as a result of the first transition, but is not satisfied even if winning is a result of the second transition. .

According to the above configuration, the relationship between the first advantageous state in which the execution of the increasing process is allowed and the second advantageous state in which the execution of the increasing process is restricted matches, and the ball output is adjusted according to the success or failure of the specific condition. can be expected, including winning games.

In particular, if this configuration is applied to a configuration in which the winning game's stop number can differ as in the feature B26, the game will be played while paying attention to whether or not the increasing process is performed in the winning game. Assuming this, the stop operation of each stop operation means is likely to be a careful operation, and the interest in the stop result of the winning game is likely to be attracted. Therefore, it becomes possible to exhibit the effect of characteristic B26 more suitably.

Feature B30. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result when the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features B16 to B29, wherein the probabilities are the same, but the probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result are different.

According to the above configuration, the first advantageous state in which execution of the increase process is allowed has a common winning probability regardless of the set value, and the second advantageous state in which the execution of the increase process is restricted depends on the set value. Different odds of winning. By doing so, the game property that the winning result and the degree of advantage are different depending on the stop operation mode is realized by the second advantageous state regardless of the set value, and then the winning probability of the second advantageous state is set by the set value. It is also possible to give an impression as if the set values are involved in the game characteristics of the stop operation mode by simulating the first advantageous state in which the number is different.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Each of the revolving bodies is made to start revolving each revolving body when the starting operation means is operated, and stop the revolving of each revolving body when the stop operation means is operated. Drive control means for controlling the body (function for executing reel control processing by the main control device 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to set the winning probability);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
The winning result obtained by the lottery means is a first set value in which the winning probability is common between the case where the first set value is set by the setting means and the case where the second set value different from the first set value is set. Based on the transition result (for example, special reply A duplication 1) and the pattern combination for transition ("red 7" pattern complete) stopped at the effective position, the game state is changed to the third advantageous for the player. a first advantage transition means (function for executing processing to transition to a restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101) for transitioning to a 1 advantageous state (non-restricted bonus);
A lottery result by the lottery means is a second transition result (e.g., a special program) in which the winning probability differs between when the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value is set by the setting means. AB duplication 1), in which the game state is shifted to a second advantageous state (restricted bonus) advantageous to the player based on the stopping of the pattern combination for transition at the effective position. Transition means (function for executing processing for transitioning to a non-restricted bonus in bonus state processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state is a predetermined specific result (first specific role processing by main controller 101 function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
Normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (when the normal end condition is satisfied in the section display second process function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on),
grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games in the specific gaming state (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
an increasing means (a function of executing a process for adding the number of games by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, a first increase notification (immediate ride notification) that the increase processing has been performed based on the game in which the specific condition that triggered the increase processing has been established. can be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, a second increase notification that the increase processing is performed based on a game subsequent to the game in which the specific condition that triggered the increase processing is satisfied. A second increase notification execution means (a function of executing a setting process of an addition effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing (additional notification) by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
with
The manner in which the first increase notification is performed in the first advantageous state by the first increase notification execution means and the manner in which the second increase notification is performed in the second advantageous state by the second increase notification execution means are indistinguishable. Or a game machine characterized by being difficult to identify.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result and the second transition result, and these first transition result and the second transition result. When the pattern combination corresponding to the second shift result stops, the game shifts to a first advantageous state or a second advantageous state, which is advantageous for the player. In such a configuration, furthermore, there is provided a specific game state in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of state notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game.

Moreover, in the specific game state, based on the establishment of a specific condition, an increase process is performed to increase the remaining number that can be a trigger for ending the specific game state, and when the increase process is performed, the first increase notification and the second Increase notification is performed. Therefore, in the gaming aspect of waiting for winning the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state while enjoying the benefit from the mode notification of the specific game state, the increase processing can extend the waiting state while enjoying the benefit. As a result, the chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state is more likely to occur.

Here, the first transition result that triggers the transition to the first advantageous state has a common winning probability regardless of the set value, and the second transition result that triggers the transition to the second advantageous state is set. Winning probability differs depending on the value. Therefore, the increase/decrease mode of the game media can be adjusted by the appearance rate of the second advantageous state. However, if the difference in appearance rate of the second advantageous state can be accurately grasped, the setting value becomes too easy to grasp, which may affect the operating rate of each game machine in the game hall.

Therefore, in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the stopping numbers at the time of winning (at the time of transition) are both pattern combinations for transition, and the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are distinguished from each other. It is difficult to stick. In addition, the first increase notification during the first advantageous state and the second increase notification during the second advantageous state cannot be identified or are difficult to identify. It's getting harder to make decisions. The difference is that the first increase notification is a notification when the increase processing is performed in the game, and the second increase notification is a notification when the increase processing is performed in the previous game. there is In this way, by making it difficult to distinguish between advantageous states such as the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in which there is a difference in the probability of winning according to the setting value and the contents of the increase notification are different, the second advantageous state is made difficult to distinguish. Even if the difference in the increase/decrease mode of the game media is designed by . Therefore, while designing the mode of increase of the game medium according to the set value, it is possible to make the player think that the mode of increase, that is, the increase or decrease of the game medium, is realized by the player's own luck, and vice versa. Moreover, it is also possible to give the impression that the increase or decrease of the game media is due to the set values rather than the player's own luck. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Regarding "identifiable or difficult to identify", it may be expressed as "the player is unidentifiable or difficult to identify", or it may be expressed as "common" or "identical or substantially identical". You may

Moreover, the above-mentioned "normal transition means" may be expressed as follows.

"Normal transition means for shifting to the normal game state when the specific game state ends" and "Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state, the specific game state is changed to the normal normal transition means for transitioning to a game state".

Feature C2. The drive control means includes a specific drive control means (function for executing various freeze effect processing by the main control device 101) that controls each of the revolving bodies in a predetermined specific mode,
The first increase notification execution means, when executing the first increase notification in the first advantageous state, causes the specific drive control means to control each of the circulating bodies to be the specific mode,
The second increase notification executing means, when executing the second increase notification in the second advantageous state, causes the specific drive control means to control each of the circulating bodies to be in the specific mode. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to the above configuration, the first increase notification in the first advantageous state and the second increase notification in the second advantageous state have not only commonality of notification modes but also control of the orbiting body as a specific mode. By doing so, for example, compared to a configuration in which only the effects on the display screen are similar, the possibility that the players will recognize the same is increased.

In particular, it is based on the premise that the lottery by the lottery means and the driving of the revolving body, etc., which are involved in the profit of the player, are performed by the control device on the main side, and the effects such as the display screen are performed by the control device on the sub side. For example, it is considered that the player trusts the movement of the revolving body under the control of the main side more than the effect content under the control of the sub side, and the above-described configuration can provide the first advantage. It is possible to obtain the effect of making it difficult to distinguish between the state and the second advantageous state.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the specific drive control means controls each of the revolving bodies so as to perform a specific game action in which the start or progress of the normal game action is restricted as the specific mode. .

According to the above configuration, when the first increase notification and the second increase notification are performed, a so-called freeze occurs as a specific game operation in which the start and progress of the normal game operation are restricted. In this way, it is possible to grasp that the increase notification is performed through the fact that the progress of the rotation of the orbiting body, such as start and stop, is restricted and frozen, and if the increase notification is performed during the freeze, It is also suppressed that the increase notification is overlooked. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to both increase notifications, and to obtain the effect of performing each increase notification during the both-advantageous state.

Feature C4. As the specific mode, there is a first specific mode ((pseudo) additional notification effect accompanied by a freezing effect of 7 aligned reds in the middle row) and a second specific mode ((pseudo) additional notification effect accompanied by a frozen effect of 7 aligned reds rising to the right). ,
The first increase notification executing means, when executing the first increase notification corresponding to the fact that the increase processing for the first number is performed in the first advantageous state, the first increase notification by the specific drive control means When the control of each of the orbiting bodies to be a specific mode is performed, and the first increase notification corresponding to the increase processing of the second number is performed, the second increase notification by the specific drive control means is performed. so that the control of each of the orbiting bodies to be a specific mode is performed,
When the second increase notification of the first number is executed in the second advantageous state, the second increase notification execution means controls each of the orbiting bodies to be the first specific mode by the specific drive control means. is performed, and when the second increase notification of the second number is executed, the control of each of the circulating bodies to be the second specific mode by the specific drive control means is performed. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or feature C3.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of specific modes are set as control modes of the revolving body, and different specific modes are executed according to the remaining number of specific game states increased in the increasing process. Then, if the increase notification corresponds to the first number increase processing, the control of the circulating body is performed in the first specific mode regardless of whether it is the first increase notification or the second increase notification, and the second number If it is the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing of (1), the control of the circulating body is performed in the second specific mode regardless of whether it is the first increase notification or the second increase notification. In this way, by associating the specific control of the orbiting body, which is likely to leave an impression, with the remaining number increased by the increase processing, the impression that the first increase notification and the second increase notification are the same increase notification can be further strengthened. becomes possible.

Feature C5. The first increase notification execution means, when the result of the first specific lottery (the function of executing the process for adding in the BB in the main control unit 101) performed in the first advantageous state is the winning result (additional winning) The first increase notification is executed, and if the result of the first specific lottery is not the winning result, the first non-increase notification (pseudo freeze effect and special reply A or special reply B winning prize) can be executed,
The second increase notification executing means is configured such that the result of the second specific lottery (function for executing pseudo-addition processing during BB in main control unit 101) performed in the second advantageous state is the winning result (pseudo-additional winning). In this case, the second increase notification is executed, and if the result of the second specific lottery is not the winning result, the second non-increase notification (pseudo freeze effect and special reply A or special reply B winning prize) can be executed. can be,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the notification mode of the first non-increase notification and the notification mode of the second non-increase notification are indistinguishable or difficult to identify.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific lottery is won in the first advantageous state, the first increase notification is executed, and when the second specific lottery is won in the second advantageous state, the second increase notification is performed, and these specific lotteries are performed. Not only the notification mode of the first increase notification and the second increase notification when winning, but also the notification mode of the first non-increase notification and second non-increase notification when not winning is unidentifiable or difficult to identify. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether it is in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state from these non-increase notifications. In this way, it is possible to more preferably exhibit the effect of making it difficult to distinguish between both advantageous states.

Feature C6. The reporting mode of the first increase report in other than the first advantageous state by the first increase report execution means, and the execution mode of the second increase report in other than the second advantageous state by the second increase report execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, which is identifiable.

According to the above configuration, under the premise that the first increase notification and the second increase notification can be identified other than during the advantageous state (during the specific game state), the first increase notification and the second increase notification in the advantageous state , it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the first increase notification and the second increase notification during the advantageous state are the same increase notification.

Feature C7. The second increase notification executing means,
Except for the second advantageous state, it is a game subsequent to the game in which the increase processing was performed, and in which a predetermined notification is given in a predetermined manner (remaining number corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG). In a game where the number display is 1 remaining, the second increase notification can be executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein in the second advantageous state, the second increase notification can be executed regardless of the predetermined notification mode.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the second increase notification is performed in a game in which the predetermined notification is in a predetermined mode, in the second advantageous state, the second increase notification is performed regardless of the predetermined notification mode. If the increase notification is executed, the impression that the second increase notification in the second advantageous state is not the usual second increase notification is given, and the first increase notification and the second increase notification during the advantageous state are the same increase notification. It is possible to strengthen a certain impression.

Feature C8. The first increase notification execution means can execute the first increase notification in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result in the first advantageous state,
Characteristic C7 characterized in that the second increase notification executing means can execute the second increase notification in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the first increase notification during the first advantageous state and the second increase notification during the second advantageous state can be executed in the game with a special result regardless of which increase notification. In this way, the first increase notification and the second increase notification in the advantageous state are common as a game result, and not only the effect of making it difficult to distinguish both advantageous states is enhanced, but also the second increase notification causes the lottery. Through being randomly executed over time, the second increase notification during the second advantageous state is different from the other second increase notification (the second increase notification executed in the game in which the predetermined notification is in a predetermined mode) It is possible to strengthen the impression that it is the same as the first increase notification.

Feature C9. When the first set value is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the first transition result is higher than the probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the second transition result. there is a high probability that
When the second set value is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first transition result is higher than the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, characterized by a low probability.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the winning probability of the first transition result with no setting difference in the winning probability and the winning probability of the second transition result with the setting difference in the winning probability varies depending on the setting value, and is the first setting value. If so, it is easier to win with the first transition result, and with the second set value, it is easier to win with the second transition result. That is, when the increase notification occurs during the advantageous state, if the first setting value, the increase notification is likely to be the first increase notification, and if the second setting value, the increase notification will be the second increase notification. There is a high possibility that it is an increase notification. In this way, by reversing which increase notification is made depending on the set value, it is difficult to determine the type of increase notification and the determination of both advantageous states, but there is a substantial difference depending on the set value. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in which the set value is predicted.

Feature C10. The first increase notification execution means, when the result of the first specific lottery (the function of executing the process for adding in the BB in the main control unit 101) performed in the first advantageous state is the winning result (additional winning) Execute the first increase notification,
The second increase notification executing means is configured such that the result of the second specific lottery (function for executing pseudo-addition processing during BB in main control unit 101) performed in the second advantageous state is the winning result (pseudo-additional winning). When executing the second increase notification,
The first specific lottery results in a winning result when transitioning to the first advantageous state in a first situation and when transitioning to the first advantageous state in a second situation different from the first situation. probabilities can be different,
The probability that the second specific lottery results in winning the second specific lottery may be different between the case of shifting to the second advantageous state in the first situation and the case of shifting to the second advantageous state in the second situation. and
The probability that the first specific lottery will result in a winning result when the state is shifted to the first advantageous state in the first situation, and the second specific lottery when the state is shifted to the second advantageous state in the first situation The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, characterized in that the probability of a winning result is common to the winning result.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first increase notification is performed through the first specific lottery in the first advantageous state, and the second increase notification is performed through the second specific lottery in the second advantageous state, the first specific lottery is performed. , and the winning probability of the second specific lottery may differ depending on the situation of shifting to an advantageous state. By doing so, the easiness of chaining between the advantageous state and the specific game state also differs depending on the situation in which the state shifts to the advantageous state, and the game playability is remarkably improved.

In addition, the probability that the first specific lottery and the second specific lottery result in a winning result is common between the case of shifting to the first advantageous state in the first situation and the case of shifting to the second advantageous state in the first situation. If the first situation shifts to an advantageous state, it is difficult to determine which advantageous state is based on the winning probability of the specific lottery. As a result, it becomes more difficult to distinguish between both advantageous states, and the effect of the feature C1 can be more favorably exhibited.

Feature C11. Probability that the first specific lottery results in a winning result when the state is shifted to the first advantageous state in the second situation, and the second specific lottery when the state is shifted to the second advantageous state in the second situation The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein is common to the probability of winning a winning result.

According to the above configuration, the winning probabilities of the first specific lottery and the second specific lottery are common not only in the advantageous state shifted in the first situation, but also in the advantageous state shifted in the second situation. By doing so, on the premise that the winning probability of the specific lottery differs depending on the situation of shifting to the advantageous state, the first increase notification and the second increase notification are executed in any situation. Since the probabilities are common, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making it difficult to distinguish between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

Feature C12. Probability that the first specific lottery results in a winning result when the state is shifted to the first advantageous state in the second situation, and the second specific lottery when the state is shifted to the second advantageous state in the second situation The gaming machine according to feature C10, characterized in that the probability of winning is different from the probability of winning.

According to the above configuration, in the advantageous state shifted in the first situation, the probability of winning the first specific lottery is the same as in the second specific lottery, but in the advantageous state shifted in the second situation, the first specific lottery and the second specific lottery have different winning probabilities. By doing so, it is difficult to distinguish between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in the first situation, and it is easy to distinguish between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in the second situation. Become. Therefore, it is possible to leave room for determining the second advantageous state and predicting the set value, thereby improving the game playability.

Feature C13. situation grasping means for grasping the situation of the specific game state when it is possible to shift to at least the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state (function for executing the number-of-games management process by the main controller 101);
determination means (function for executing the process of step S4101 by the main controller 101) for determining the first situation and the second situation according to the grasped result by the situation grasping means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C10 to C12, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the specific lottery during the transition to the advantageous state differs depending on the progress of the specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to more preferably improve the interest in the game created by the chain of the specific game state and the advantageous state.

Feature C14. The situation grasping means determines that, during the specific game state, the second increase notification is not executed among the number of increases based on the increase processing for which the second increase notification is to be performed by the second increase notification execution means. Equipped with means for grasping the number of increments for grasping the minute (function for executing processing for grasping the post-loading counter BG by the main control unit 101),
The second increase notification execution means executes the second increase notification in the second advantageous state based on the grasped result of the increase number grasping means,
The gaming machine according to feature C13, wherein the discrimination means discriminates between the first situation and the second situation according to the grasped result of the increase number grasping means.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the second increase notification during the second advantageous state is performed based on the unexecuted amount of the second increase notification, and the winning probability of the specific lottery differs according to the unexecuted amount. By doing so, for example, it is possible to adjust the winning probability of the specific lottery so as to make it difficult to perform the second increase notification when the unexecuted amount is small, and furthermore, the adjustment can be performed in the first advantageous state. If it is applied to the first specific lottery in the middle, it is possible to perform the adjustment while preventing the difference between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

Feature C15. The situation grasping means, during the specific game state, out of the number of increases based on the increase processing for which the second increase notification will be performed by the second increase notification execution means, the second increase notification has not been executed. Equipped with increment number grasping means for grasping minutes (function for executing processing for grasping post-loading counter BG by main controller 101),
The second increase notification execution means executes the second increase notification in the second advantageous state based on the grasped result of the increase number grasping means,
Characteristic feature C13 characterized in that the determining means is capable of determining between the first situation and the second situation according to the number of games completed in the specific game state grasped by the situation grasping means. Or the gaming machine according to feature C14.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the second increase notification during the second advantageous state is performed based on the unexecuted portion of the second increase notification, the probability of winning the specific lottery according to the number of games completed in the specific gaming state is different. In other words, it is possible to predict the unexecuted portion of the second increase notification to some extent depending on the number of games played. Therefore, the processing can be simplified. In addition, the unexecuted portion has randomness such as success or failure of a specific condition, and the player cannot grasp the unexecuted portion. If the probability of winning a specific lottery is changed according to such a parameter that the player can grasp, the fairness of the game is ensured without making the player feel distrustful.

Feature C16. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result, it becomes possible to stop the first specific pattern combination (stopped number for winning the ninth replay) at the valid position and the first specific pattern. A second specific pattern combination different from the combination (stopped number for winning the 10th replay) can be stopped,
The situation comprehension means is a pattern comprehension means for comprehending the symbol combination stopped at the effective position when the second transition result wins, which is a trigger for the transition to the second advantageous state (a winning pattern for a BB winning game by the main controller 101). function to execute result handling processing),
The characterizing device according to any one of features C13 to C15, wherein the discriminating means is capable of discriminating between the first situation and the second situation according to the result of grasping by the pattern grasping means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the second specific lottery, that is, the execution rate of the second increase notification, changes depending on the pattern combination stopped in the second transition result winning game that triggers the transition to the second advantageous state. If the second increase notification during the second advantageous state is a mere performance and does not affect the actual remaining number in the specific game state, the second increase notification is executed and the performance is executed. It is conceivable that conflicting needs arise between players who want to have fun and players who want to prevent execution of the second increase notification. In this respect, if the presence or absence of the effect can be selected according to the pattern combination at the time of winning, as in the above configuration, the gaming machine can meet the various needs of the players.

Feature C17. When the first specific lottery is not won in the first advantageous state, the second increase notification executing means notifies the second increase notification for the non-winning after the first advantageous state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features C10 to C16, which can be executed as an increase notification.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the second specific lottery is adjusted according to the situation of the second advantageous state, and the winning probability of the first specific lottery is adjusted accordingly, and the winning probability of the first specific lottery is adjusted. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the non-winning lottery is not notified in order to match the second specific lottery. By doing so, it is possible to match the winning probability of the first specific lottery to the second specific lottery without difficulty.

Feature C18. The specific condition is set so as not to be established in the second advantageous state,
The second increase notification during the second advantageous state by the second increase notification executing means is a notification corresponding to the increase processing executed in the game before transition to the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C17.

Since the second advantageous state has a different transition rate depending on the set value, the above configuration can prevent the advantage of the game property in the specific game state from being superior or inferior depending on the set value. The fairness of games in terms of sex is guaranteed. In addition, since the second increase notification during the second advantageous state has the same notification mode as the first increase notification during the first advantageous state, it is as if the increase processing is being performed during the second advantageous state. It is possible to give such an impression, and while ensuring fairness during the specific game state as described above, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game performance due to it.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Each of the revolving bodies is made to start revolving each revolving body when the starting operation means is operated, and stop the revolving of each revolving body when the stop operation means is operated. Drive control means for controlling the body (function for executing reel control processing by the main control device 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
The winning result obtained by the lottery means is the first transfer result (for example, special reply A overlap 1), and the pattern combination ("Red 7" pattern matching) corresponding to the first transfer result has stopped at the effective position. First advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to a first advantageous state (non-restricted bonus) that is advantageous for the player (a process for transitioning to a restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101 is executed based on function) and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a second transition result (e.g., special reply AB duplication 1) different from the first transition result, and the pattern combination corresponding to the second transition result stops at the valid position. Second advantage transition means for shifting the game state to a second advantageous state (restricted bonus) that is advantageous for the player (processing for shifting to a non-restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101). functions to perform) and
A gaming machine comprising
The first migration result is a result including at least the first specified result (special reply A),
The second migration result is a result including at least the first identification result and a second identification result (special reply B) different from the first identification result,
In the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, specific notification execution means (additional processing during BB by main controller 101, pseudo addition processing during BB, pseudo addition during BB) capable of executing specific notification (additional notification effect, pseudo-additional notification effect) function to perform processing) and
When the first specified pattern combination corresponding to the first specified result stops at the effective position, the specified notification executing means is permitted to execute the specified notification, while the second specified pattern corresponding to the second specified result is permitted. a limiting means (a function of executing a winning result handling process for a BB winning game by the main control device 101) capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means when the pattern combination is stopped;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the specific notification can be executed in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state that transitions with the first transition result or the second transition result, the first specific result included in both transition results When the first specified pattern combination corresponding to the . is stopped, the specified notification is executed in any advantageous state, and when the second specified pattern combination corresponding to the second specified result included only in the second transition result is stopped, specified. Execution of notification is restricted. In this way, the execution of the specific notification during the second advantageous state can be restricted by the stop roll at the time of winning the second transition result. It is possible to switch whether to allow or not depending on the stop result. In this way, whether or not it is possible to determine the advantageous state is determined by the player's own stop operation. It is possible to make the user enjoy the pleasure of not making a decision.

Feature D2. When the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification, it is possible to perform specific control (freeze effect) to limit the progress of a predetermined game operation,
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein when execution of the specific notification is restricted by the restriction means, execution of the specific control is also restricted.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is a notification that accompanies a specific control that restricts the progress of a predetermined game action, and the player recognizes the specific notification through the restriction of the game operation, like a so-called freeze effect. In addition, the degree of attention of the specific notification is increased. On the other hand, it is considered that even such a specific control with a high performance effect can rather be troublesome for a player who prefers smooth progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who wants to prioritize the progress of the game by restricting the execution of the specific notification according to the stop result and not performing the specific control at the time of restriction.

Feature D3. Characteristic D1 or D2 characterized in that it is set so that the advantage for the player does not change depending on whether the execution of the specific notification is restricted by the restriction means or not. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the advantage does not change depending on the presence or absence of the specific notification. Therefore, for example, like the effect of the feature D2, the player who wants to prioritize the progress of the game selects (selects the limitation of the specific notification). can be performed more purely regardless of the degree of advantage.

Feature D4. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result, and the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode in which the second specific pattern combination can be stopped, the drive control means controls the second transition result. Each of the circulating bodies is controlled so that two specific pattern combinations can be stopped, and the first specific pattern combination is stopped when operated in a manner different from the specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the specific mode when the second transition result is won, the second specific pattern combination is stopped and the execution of the specific notification is restricted. If the button is not operated, the first specific pattern combination is stopped instead of the second specific pattern combination, and the execution of the specific notification is not restricted. In this way, by making the presence or absence of execution of the specific notification different depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, it is possible to let the player select whether or not to execute the specific notification, and to grasp the selection on the gaming machine side. becomes.

Feature D5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result, and the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode in which the second specific pattern combination can be stopped, the drive control means controls the second transition result. Characteristic features D1 through D1, characterized in that each revolving body is controlled so that the specific pattern combination can be stopped, and the first specific pattern combination is stopped if the operation is not performed in the specific mode. The gaming machine according to any one of D4.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the specific mode when the second transition result is won, the second specific pattern combination is stopped and the execution of the specific notification is restricted. If the button is not operated, the first specific pattern combination is stopped instead of the second specific pattern combination, and the execution of the specific notification is not restricted. In this way, by making the presence or absence of execution of the specific notification different depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, it is possible to let the player select whether or not to execute the specific notification, and to grasp the selection on the gaming machine side. At the same time, either the first specific pattern combination or the second specific pattern combination is stopped, so even if the specific mode of limiting the specific notification fails, there is no omission, You can make that choice with confidence.

Feature D6. In the specific loop (left reel 32L) among the loops, the number of patterns arranged corresponding to the second specific pattern combination is smaller than the number of patterns arranged corresponding to the first specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to feature D4 or feature D5, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when trying to stop the second specific pattern combination instead of the first specific pattern combination, the specific looping body aims at the second side, which is smaller in number than the first side, and stops. It must be operated (operated in a particular manner). In other words, stopping the second specified pattern combination in the specified mode is a more difficult operation than stopping the first specified pattern combination. By doing so, basically, the specific notification is executed to give priority to the performance effect, and the execution of the specific notification is restricted only when the difficult operation is performed. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the operation is not executed easily, and it is possible to expect the effect of motivating the player to improve his or her operation technique.

Feature D7. A first pattern corresponding to the first specific pattern combination and a second pattern corresponding to the second specific pattern combination are provided on the specific circular body on the upstream side of the circulation with respect to the second pattern. A gaming machine according to feature D6, characterized in that the first pattern is positioned, and the other first pattern is positioned downstream of the second pattern.

According to the above configuration, if the timing of the stop operation with respect to the specific rotating body is the timing until the predetermined first pattern on the upstream side reaches the effective position, the first pattern is stopped. After the predetermined first pattern has passed through the effective position, the second pattern is stopped at a timing until the second pattern reaches the effective position, and the second pattern passes through the effective position. If it is later, the other first pattern on the downstream side will stop at the effective position. That is, if the second pattern is to be stopped, the timing is limited to the period from when the predetermined first pattern passes through the valid position to when the second pattern reaches the valid position. By doing so, it is possible to set the priority order of attraction of the first pattern and the second pattern while making it possible to stop both the first pattern and the second pattern.

Feature D8. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated at the first timing, the corresponding pattern combination is stopped and the corresponding privilege is given by the privilege giving means, and the stop operation means is operated. When operated at a second timing different from the first timing, the corresponding combination of symbols does not stop and the corresponding privilege is not given by the privilege giving means. ) is provided,
Features D4 to D7, characterized in that the second specific pattern combination has a corresponding pattern arranged on each of the loops so that it cannot be stopped when operated at the first timing. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed mainly at the first timing in the normal time so that the privilege at the time of winning the operation response result can be fully enjoyed. , the second specific pattern combination does not stop when the stop operation is performed at the first timing. In other words, if the specific notification is to be restricted, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at a timing different from the normal time, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the specific notification is unintentionally restricted.

Feature D9. Storage means capable of storing stop information indicating that the second specific pattern combination corresponding to the second specific result has stopped when the second transition result is won (the freeze limit flag by the main controller 101 is function to execute the setting process),
The restricting means is capable of restricting execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means based on the stop information,
Features D1 to D8, characterized in that the storage means can hold the stop information even after the second advantageous state based on the second transition result winning that triggered the storage of the stop information ends. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, the stop information for stopping the second specific pattern combination is retained even after the second advantageous state, so that the second specific pattern combination will not be stopped when the next second transition result is won. However, the execution of the specific notification during the second advantageous state is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to improve the operability without forcing the player to stop the second specific pattern combination each time.

Feature D10. Storage means capable of storing stop information indicating that the second specific pattern combination corresponding to the second specific result has stopped when the second transition result is won (the freeze limit flag by the main controller 101 is function to execute the setting process),
The restricting means is capable of restricting execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means based on the stop information,
Erasing means (winning result for BB winning game by main controller 101) capable of erasing the stop information stored in the storage means before the transition to the second advantageous state based on a specific operation by the player A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized by comprising a function of executing corresponding processing.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to eliminate the unintentional restriction of the specific notification when the second specific pattern combination is stopped by chance.

Feature D11. The gaming machine according to feature D10, wherein the operation for stopping the second specific pattern combination is higher in operational difficulty than the specific operation.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the phenomenon that a player who has unintentionally stopped the second specific symbol combination cannot easily remove the limitation of the specific notification even if he/she tries to remove the limitation.

In addition, as a specific configuration of the above configuration, for example, it is as follows.

"When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result and the stop operation means is operated at a specific timing at which the second specific pattern combination can be stopped, the drive control means While the second specific pattern combination can be stopped, each circulating body is controlled so that the first specific pattern combination is stopped when operated at a timing different from the specific timing,
The specific operation is to operate each of the stop operation means in a specific order.

Feature D12. When the erasing means performs the specific operation before the transition to the second advantageous state based on the second transition result winning for the second specific pattern combination that triggered the storage of the stop information, The gaming machine according to feature D10 or feature D11, wherein the stop information can be erased before the transition to the second advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific pattern combination is stopped by chance, the specific operation is performed before the transition to the second advantageous state based on the second transition result winning that stopped the second specific pattern combination. By doing so, it becomes possible to execute the specific notification in the second advantageous state. As a result, the scene in which the specific notification is unintentionally restricted is reduced, and the effect of the specific notification can be favorably expected.

Feature D13. After the second advantageous state based on the second transition result winning for the second specific pattern combination that triggered the storage of the stop information is completed, the erasing means is adapted to the second transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of features D10 to D12, wherein the stop information can be erased based on the fact that the specific operation is performed when the game is won.

According to the above configuration, when the player changes his/her mind after the second specific combination of symbols is stopped and the second advantageous state in which the specific notification is restricted is completed, the specific notification is given in the second advantageous state after the next time. can be executed. In this case, it is not possible to accept the specific operation at a free timing after the end of the second advantageous state where the specific notification is limited, but it is configured to be accepted when the second transition result is won. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that a specific operation is performed unintentionally.

Feature D14. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Each of the revolving bodies is made to start revolving each revolving body when the starting operation means is operated, and stop the revolving of each revolving body when the stop operation means is operated. Drive control means for controlling the body (function for executing reel control processing by the main control device 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the winning result by the lottery means is a transition result (for example, heavy cherry overlap 1), and the pattern combination for transition ("red 7" pattern matching) corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position. Advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to an advantageous state (non-restricted bonus) advantageous to the player (function for executing processing for shifting to a restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A duplicate result including the transition result and a predetermined specific result (strong cherry) is set as the lottery result by the lottery means,
In the advantageous state, a specific notification execution means (function for executing BB addition processing and BB addition pseudo addition processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing specific notification (additional notification effect, pseudo-additional notification effect);
When the duplicate result is won, the specific notification executing means based on either that the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result has stopped or that the specific pattern combination has not stopped Limiting means capable of limiting execution of the specific notification (function for executing BB winning game winning result handling processing by main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is premised on the configuration that the specific notification can be executed in the advantageous state that transitions when the pattern combination for transition stops due to the winning of the transition result, and the specific notification during the advantageous state is performed by the stop roll at the time of winning the duplicate result. Execution may be restricted. More specifically, the duplicate result is a result including a transition result and a specific result, and when the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result stops or when the specific pattern combination does not stop, the specific notification is restricted. In other words, the former restricts the specific notification based on the winning of a specific result, and the latter means that the specific result has been missed or the transition result has been changed to an advantageous state in the winning game (symbol combination for transition has stopped). Based on this, the specific notification is restricted. In this way, if the performance during the advantageous state is changed depending on the stop result in the transition result winning game, in addition to the playability in the winning game that the transition result winning (advantageous state winning) is sensed, it is advantageous. A game feature is added in which the content of the presentation during the state is determined by the stop operation, and it is possible to greatly improve the interest in the winning game.

Feature D15. The degree of advantage for the player is common between the case where the execution of the specific notification is restricted and the case where the execution of the specific notification is not restricted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, and the stop operation means is operated at a specific timing when the specific combination of symbols can be stopped, the drive control means determines that the specified combination of symbols is determined. While it is possible to stop, if it is operated at a timing different from the specific timing, it is impossible to stop the specific pattern combination,
The limiting means can limit the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means when the duplicate result is won and the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result has stopped. The gaming machine according to feature D14, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the degree of advantage is common regardless of the presence or absence of restrictions on the specific notification, if it is possible to win a specific result that may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation. , execution of specific notification is restricted. It is thought that the more skilled a player is, the less likely he/she likes a mere effect in which the degree of advantage does not change. This is a configuration in which the player is identified as the player who is in the game, and the specific notification is not performed as a mere effect. By doing so, it is possible to set the effects according to the needs of various players.

Note that the features D1 to D13 may be individually applied to the feature D14 or the feature D15, or the features D1 to D13 may be combined and applied.

Feature D16. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Each of the revolving bodies is made to start revolving each revolving body when the starting operation means is operated, and stop the revolving of each revolving body when the stop operation means is operated. Drive control means for controlling the body (function for executing reel control processing by the main control device 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
The winning result by the lottery means is the transition result (for example, special reply A overlap 1), and the pattern combination for transition ("red 7" pattern matching) corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position. Advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous state (non-restricted bonus) advantageous to the player (function for executing processing for shifting to a restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
In the advantageous state, a specific notification execution means (function for executing BB addition processing and BB addition pseudo addition processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing specific notification (additional notification effect, pseudo-additional notification effect);
Restriction means capable of restricting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means based on the stop result when winning the transition result (a function of executing the winning result corresponding process for the BB winning game by the main controller 101) )When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is premised that the specific notification can be executed in the advantageous state in which the transfer result is won and the pattern combination for transfer stops, and the specific notification in the advantageous state is given by the stop roll at the time of winning the transfer result. can be restricted. In this way, if the performance during the advantageous state is changed depending on the stop result in the transition result winning game, in addition to the playability in the winning game that the transition result winning (advantageous state winning) is sensed, it is advantageous. A game feature is added in which the content of the presentation during the state is determined by the stop operation, and it is possible to greatly improve the interest in the winning game.

For the feature D16, the configurations indicated by the features D1 to D15 may be applied individually, or the configurations indicated by the features D1 to D15 may be applied in combination.

Feature D17. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Each of the revolving bodies is made to start revolving each revolving body when the starting operation means is operated, and stop the revolving of each revolving body when the stop operation means is operated. Drive control means for controlling the body (function for executing reel control processing by the main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
The winning result by the lottery means is the transition result (for example, special reply A overlap 1), and the pattern combination for transition ("red 7" pattern matching) corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position. Advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous state (non-restricted bonus) advantageous to the player (function for executing processing for shifting to a restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
In the winning game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result win, when the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position, the first specific control (control not to execute the pseudo-additional notification effect in the advantageous state) ) (a function of executing a process when the freeze limit flag is set by the main control device 101) capable of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, it is premised that when the transition result is won and the pattern combination for transition stops, the state shifts to the advantageous state, and the first specific control is performed as the control during the advantageous state by the stop roll in the transition result winning game. will be done. In this way, if the control during the advantageous state can be changed depending on the stop result in the transition result winning game, in addition to the playability in the winning game that the transition result winning (advantageous state winning) can be sensed, it is advantageous. The playability of determining the content of control (content of presentation) during the state by the stop operation is added, and it is possible to greatly improve the interest in the winning game.

Feature D18. In the winning game, when a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position, a second specific control different from the first specific control (pseudo add-on) is performed in the advantageous state. Characteristic D17 characterized by comprising a second specific control execution means (function for executing processing for pseudo-additional notification effect by main control device 101) capable of executing control for executing notification effect) game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is premised that when the transition result is won and the pattern combination for transition stops, the state shifts to the advantageous state, and the control during the advantageous state by the stop roll in the transition result winning game is the first specific control It becomes different from the second specific control. In this way, if the control during the advantageous state is made different depending on the stop result in the transition result winning game, in addition to the playability in the winning game that the transition result winning (advantageous state winning) can be sensed, it is advantageous. The playability of determining the content of control (content of presentation) during the state by the stop operation is added, and it is possible to greatly improve the interest in the winning game.

Feature D19. A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a first pseudo-effect process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific notification (pseudo-freeze effect) by a predetermined notification means during the advantageous state,
The first specific control execution means limits execution of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means as the first specific control,
The gaming machine according to feature D18, wherein the second specific control execution means permits execution of the specific information by the specific information execution means as the second specific control.

According to the above configuration, execution of the specific notification during the advantageous state is permitted or restricted depending on the stop roll in the transition result winning game. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to decide whether or not to execute the specific notification by the player's own stop operation. More specifically, in the winning game, a player who does not want to see the specific information stops the first specific pattern combination, and a player who wants to see the specific information stops the second specific pattern combination. In the game, there is room for the player to intervene with regard to the contents of the notification during the advantageous state, and the playability of the winning game can be improved.

Feature D20. When the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means, a special control (freeze effect) that limits the progress of a predetermined game operation can be executed,
The gaming machine according to feature D19, wherein when execution of the specific notification is restricted by the first specific control execution means, execution of the special control is also restricted.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is a notification accompanied by a special control that restricts the progress of a predetermined game operation, and the player recognizes the specific notification through the restriction of the game operation, like a so-called freeze effect. In addition, the degree of attention of the specific notification is increased. On the other hand, it is considered that even such a special control with a high performance effect can rather be troublesome for a player who prefers smooth progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who wants to give priority to the progress of the game by limiting the execution of the specific notification according to the stop result and not performing the special control at the time of the limitation.

Feature D21. There is a change in the degree of advantage for the player between when the first specific control is executed by the first specific control execution means and when the second specific control is executed by the second specific control execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D18 to D20, which is set so as not to occur.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to expect a dramatic effect by changing the control during the advantageous state according to the stop result in the winning game within a range that does not cause a change in the advantage.

In particular, as in the feature D20, in a configuration in which the progress of a predetermined game action can be restricted, the selection of the player who wants to prioritize the progress of the game (selection of restriction of specific notification) can be made more purely regardless of the degree of advantage. It is possible to do it.

Feature D22. The drive control means is capable of stopping the first specific pattern combination when the stop operation means is operated in a specific manner in which the first specific pattern combination can be stopped in the winning game. On the other hand, according to any one of features D18 to D21, characterized in that each of the revolving bodies is controlled so that the second specific pattern combination stops when operated in a mode different from the specific mode. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the specific mode in the transition result winning game, the first specific pattern combination is stopped and the first specific control is executed, while the operation is performed in the specific mode. If not, the second specific pattern combination is stopped instead of the first specific pattern combination, and the second specific control is executed. In this way, by varying the control during the advantageous state according to the operation mode of the stop operation means, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to grasp the specific control selected by the player himself/herself as the operation mode.

Feature D23. The drive control means is capable of stopping the first specific pattern combination when the stop operation means is operated in a specific manner in which the first specific pattern combination can be stopped in the winning game. On the other hand, the gaming machine according to any one of features D18 to D22, wherein each of the revolving bodies is controlled such that the second specific pattern combination is stopped when the operation is not performed in the specific mode. .

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the specific mode in the transition result winning game, the first specific pattern combination is stopped and the first specific control is executed, while the operation is performed in the specific mode. If not, the second specific pattern combination is stopped instead of the first specific pattern combination, and the second specific control is executed. In this way, by varying the control during the advantageous state according to the operation mode of the stop operation means, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to grasp the specific control selected by the player himself/herself as the operation mode.

In particular, in the above configuration, either one of the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination is stopped. does not occur, and the selection can be made with peace of mind.

Feature D24. In the specific loop (left reel 32L) among the loops, the number of patterns arranged corresponding to the first specific pattern combination is smaller than the number of patterns arranged corresponding to the second specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to feature D22 or feature D23, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when trying to stop the first specific pattern combination instead of the second specific pattern combination, the specific circular body is stopped by aiming at the patterns on the first side, which are fewer in number than on the second side. It must be operated (operated in a particular manner). That is, stopping the first specific symbol combination in the specific mode is a more difficult operation than stopping the second specific symbol combination. By doing so, basically the second specific control is executed, and the first specific control is executed only when the difficult operation is intentionally performed. In this way, for example, in a configuration in which a predetermined effect is performed in the second specific control, it is possible to avoid the event that the prepared effect is not easily executed, and the effect of stimulating the player's desire to improve the operation technique. can also be expected.

Feature D25. The first pattern corresponding to the first specific pattern combination and the second pattern corresponding to the second specific pattern combination are the predetermined pattern on the upstream side of the circumference of the first pattern in the specific circular body. A gaming machine according to feature D24, characterized in that a second pattern is positioned, and the other second pattern is arranged so as to be positioned downstream of the first pattern.

According to the above configuration, if the timing of the stop operation with respect to the specific rotating body is the timing until the predetermined second pattern on the upstream side reaches the effective position, the second pattern is stopped. After the predetermined second pattern has passed through the effective position, the first pattern is stopped at a timing until the first pattern reaches the effective position, and the first pattern has passed through the effective position. If it is later, another second pattern on the downstream side stops at the effective position. That is, if the first pattern is to be stopped, the timing is limited to the period from when the predetermined second pattern passes through the valid position to when the first pattern reaches the valid position. By doing so, it is possible to set the priority order of attraction of the first pattern and the second pattern while making it possible to stop both the first pattern and the second pattern.

Feature D26. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated at the first timing, the corresponding pattern combination is stopped and the corresponding privilege is given by the privilege giving means, and the stop operation means is operated. When operated at a second timing different from the first timing, the corresponding combination of symbols does not stop and the corresponding privilege is not given by the privilege giving means. ) is provided,
Features D22 to D25, characterized in that the first specific pattern combination has a corresponding pattern arranged on each of the loops so that it cannot be stopped when operated at the first timing. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed mainly at the first timing in the normal time so that the privilege at the time of winning the operation response result can be fully enjoyed. , the first specific pattern combination does not stop when the stop operation is performed at the first timing. In other words, if the first specific control is to be executed, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at a timing different from the normal time, which makes it less likely that the first specific control will be unintentionally executed.

Feature D27. In the winning game, a storage means capable of storing stop information indicating that the first specific pattern combination has stopped (a function of executing a process of setting a freeze limit flag by the main control device 101),
The first specific control execution means is configured to be able to execute the first specific control based on the stop information,
Any one of features D17 to D26, wherein the storage means can hold the stop information even after the advantageous state based on the transition result winning that triggered the storage of the stop information ends. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the stop information for stopping the first specific pattern combination is retained even after the advantageous state is reached. The first specific control is executed during the state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the operability without forcing the player to stop the first specific pattern combination each time.

Feature D28. In the winning game, a storage means capable of storing stop information indicating that the first specific pattern combination has stopped (a function of executing a process of setting a freeze limit flag by the main control device 101),
The first specific control execution means is configured to be able to execute the first specific control based on the stop information,
Based on a specific operation by the player, an erasing means capable of erasing the stop information stored in the storage means before the transition to the advantageous state (a winning result corresponding process for a BB winning game by the main controller 101) A gaming machine according to any one of features D17 to D27, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the first specific control from being unintentionally executed when the first specific pattern combination is stopped by chance.

Feature D29. The gaming machine according to feature D28, wherein the operation for stopping the first specific combination of symbols is higher in operational difficulty than the specific operation.

According to the above configuration, even if a player who has unintentionally stopped the first specific pattern combination tries to execute the second specific control instead of the first specific control, it is difficult to do so. can be suppressed.

In addition, as a specific configuration of the above configuration, for example, it is as follows.

"The drive control means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, and the stop operation means is operated at a specific timing at which the first specific pattern combination can be stopped, the first specific pattern combination can be stopped. While a specific pattern combination can be stopped, each circulating body is controlled so that the second specific pattern combination is stopped when operated at a timing different from the specific timing,
The specific operation is to operate each of the stop operation means in a specific order."

Feature D30. The erasing means, when the specific operation is performed before the transition to the advantageous state based on the transition result winning for the first specific symbol combination that triggered the storage of the stop information, the transition to the advantageous state The gaming machine according to feature D28 or feature D29, characterized in that it is possible to erase the stop information previously.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific pattern combination is stopped by chance, if the specific operation is performed before the transition to the advantageous state based on the transition result winning that stopped the first specific pattern combination, It is possible to execute the second specific control instead of the first specific control in an advantageous state. This reduces the number of situations in which the first specific control is unintentionally executed.

Feature D31. After the advantageous state based on the transition result winning for the first specific symbol combination that triggered the storage of the stop information ends, and when the transition result wins, the erasing means The gaming machine according to any one of features D28 to D30, wherein the stop information can be erased based on the performance of a specific operation.

According to the above configuration, after stopping the first specific symbol combination and ending the advantageous state in which the first specific control is executed, if the player changes his mind, the second specific control can be performed in the advantageous state after the next time. can be executed. In this case, after the advantageous state in which the first specific control is executed, it is not possible to accept the specific operation at any time, but it is possible to accept the specific operation when the transition result is won. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event such as unintentionally performing an operation.

Feature D32. As the migration result, a first migration result (for example, Topic A duplication 1) and a second migration result (for example, Topic AB duplication 1) are set,
The advantageous transition means are
The game state is changed to a game based on that the winning result by the lottery means is the first transition result and the pattern combination ("red 7" pattern complete) corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the valid position. a first advantage transition means (a function of executing processing for transitioning to a non-limiting bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101) for transitioning to a first advantageous state (non-limiting bonus) that is advantageous for the player;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result, and the pattern combination corresponding to the second transition result stops at the valid position, the game state is changed to the second advantageous to the player. a second advantage transition means (a function of executing processing for transitioning to a restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101) for transitioning to an advantageous state (restricted bonus);
with
The first migration result is a result including at least the first specified result (special reply A),
The second migration result is a result including at least the first identification result and a second identification result (special reply B) different from the first identification result,
The privilege imparting means imparts a privilege corresponding to the first specified result based on the stopping of the second specified pattern combination at the effective position, and the stop of the first specified pattern combination at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of features D18 to D31, wherein a privilege corresponding to the second specified result is given based on the fact that the game has been played.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the first transition result or the second transition result transitions to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, the second identification corresponding to the first identification result included in both transition results is stopped, the second specific control is executed in any advantageous state, and the first specific control is executed when the first specific pattern combination corresponding to the second specific result included only in the second transition result is stopped. executed. In this way, since the control during the second advantageous state differs depending on the stop roll when the second transition result is won, it is possible to switch whether to distinguish between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state depending on the stop roll. becomes. In this way, whether or not it is possible to determine the advantageous state is determined by the player's own stop operation. It is possible to make the user enjoy the pleasure of not making a decision.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. As game states, a low-advantage state (normal section) and a high-advantage state (advantage section) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set.
low-advantage transition means for transitioning the high-advantage state to the low-advantage state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined termination condition (when the normal termination condition is satisfied in the section display second processing by the main controller 101); function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on) and
grasping means for grasping the number of remaining high-advantage states (number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG);
an increasing means (a function of executing a process for adding the number of games by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
Execution of a first increase notification capable of executing an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) when the increase processing is performed by the increase means. Means (a function of performing processing for executing an additional notification effect by the main control device 101);
a second increase notification execution means (a function of performing a process for executing an advance notification effect by the main controller 101) capable of executing an increase notification by a predetermined notification means in a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied; ,
After the increase notification is executed by the second increase notification execution means, when the specific condition is satisfied, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means (step by main controller 101 A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of S5101 to step S5105).

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and in the high advantage state, when a specific condition is satisfied, the remaining number of the high advantage state is increased. It has a so-called add-on function, and since an increase notification corresponding to an increase in the balance is performed, expectations for the fulfillment of the specific condition are heightened. Moreover, in the above configuration, the increase notification may be performed even if the specific condition is not satisfied, and even if the specific condition is not satisfied or the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, the highly advantageous state is gaining more attention. In addition, when the increase notification is performed when the specific condition is not established, the increase notification when the specific condition is satisfied after that is configured to be restricted. That is, the above configuration can be said to be a configuration in which the increase notification is performed prior to the increase processing, and then the subsequent increase processing compensates for the previously performed increase notification. By doing so, it is possible to generate an increase notification at a free timing while preventing the difference from the actual remaining number from becoming too large.

In addition, the above-mentioned "low-advantage transition means" may be expressed as follows.

``Low advantageous transition means for transitioning to the low advantageous state when the high advantageous state ends''; low-advantage transition means for transitioning to a low-advantage state".

Feature E2. An increment grasping means for grasping the increment of the remaining number corresponding to the increase notification executed by the second increase notification executing means (a function of executing a process of grasping the advance counter MG by the main controller 101),
Characteristic feature E1, wherein the limiting means limits execution of the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing executed based on the establishment of the specific condition by the increase grasped by the increase grasping means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the execution of the increase notification corresponding to the subsequent increase processing is restricted by the increase in the remaining number in the increase notification executed when the specific condition is not met. Therefore, even if the increase notification is performed when the specific condition is not established, the increase notification corresponding to the subsequent increase processing is not all restricted, and the production effect of the increase notification performed when the specific condition is actually satisfied It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of a situation in which a specific condition is unlikely to be satisfied, even though the user expects it.

Feature E3. As the specific conditions, at least a first specific condition (addition based on a so-called rare combination such as a strong watermelon) and a second specific condition (addition based on a so-called normal combination such as a pushing order bell) are set,
After the increase notification is executed by the second increase notification executing means, the limiting means is configured to set, as the specific condition, when the first specific condition is satisfied and when the second specific condition is satisfied, the The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the execution limit rate of the increase notification by the first increase notification executing means is different.

According to the above configuration, after the increase notification is performed when the specific condition is not satisfied, the first increase notification executing means executes the increase notification when the first specific condition is satisfied and when the second specific condition is satisfied. is restricted or not (easiness to be restricted). For example, if the first specific condition is more likely to be restricted, after the increase notification is performed when the specific condition is not met, the increase notification is less likely to be executed when the first specific condition is met, and when the second specific condition is met. Increase notification is easier to execute than that. In this way, if the extent to which the increase notification is restricted differs depending on the type of the specific condition, it becomes more difficult to perceive that the increase notification is restricted than in the case of uniform restriction. As a result, it becomes difficult to determine that the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means is executed when the specific condition is not met, and it is possible to preferably expect the production effect of the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means. Become.

Feature E4. The first specific condition is less likely to be established than the second specific condition,
After the increase notification is executed by the second increase notification execution means, the limiting means, as the specific condition, when the first specific condition is satisfied than when the second specific condition is satisfied, The gaming machine according to feature E3, characterized in that it is easy to limit the execution of the increase notification by the first increase notification executing means.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition that is likely to be met is met after the second increase notification executing means has given an increase notification, execution of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means is restricted. It is thought that the more difficult the specific condition to be met, the greater the expectation for the increase in the remaining number when it is met, so if the specific condition (first specific condition) that is difficult to be met is met, there is a great interest in the subsequent increase notification. considered to be sent. In other words, if the execution of the increase notification is restricted when a specific condition that is difficult to hold is satisfied, the player who expects the increase notification will be greatly disappointed. In relation to it, it can cause a lot of discomfort. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when a specific condition that is difficult to be satisfied is established, it is difficult to be limited, and by making it easy to limit the increase notification of the increase processing based on the specific condition that is likely to be satisfied, the increase notification is obtained. While making it difficult for people to realize that is limited, it is possible to successfully compensate for the previously increased notification.

Feature E5. The second increase notification executing means, when one of a plurality of types of predetermined special conditions (advanced notification effects for various numbers of games) is satisfied, determines whether the specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to perform an increase notification in a situation where there is no
The limit rate of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means in the limit means is common regardless of the type of the special condition that triggered the execution of the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means. A gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features E1 to E4.

According to the above configuration, the type of trigger for execution of the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means does not affect the limit rate of subsequent increase notification by the first increase notification execution means. This not only simplifies the processing configuration for limiting the increase notification, but also strengthens the impression that the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means is based on the establishment of a specific condition. can be done. In other words, if the subsequent limit rate is changed depending on the trigger for execution of the previous increase notification, the limit rate will not affect the execution rate of the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means or the increase number notified by the increase notification. It may be greatly different from the parameter of the increase notification when the specific condition is met. In that regard, as in the above configuration, the second increase notification execution means is configured to execute the increase notification without considering the subsequent limit rate, so that the parameters of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means are close to or It becomes possible to perform an increase notification with the same parameter, and it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize that the specific condition is not established.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the limiting rate of the increase notification by the limiting means differs according to the remaining number grasped by the grasping means.

In order to reduce the difference between the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means and the actual remaining number, it is preferable to compensate for the previous increase notification earlier. On the other hand, if the remaining number is large, there is a high possibility that the specific condition will be met later, and the chance of compensating for the previously increased notification is likely to occur. Also, if the remaining number is small, the possibility that the specific condition will be satisfied after that is low, and the above-mentioned chance of compensation is unlikely to occur. Based on this premise, if the limit rate is changed according to the number of balances as in the above configuration, for example, it will be forced to increase even if the number of balances is large due to trying to compensate earlier. It is unlikely that the notification will be restricted, and it is possible to compensate for the previously increased notification while not giving a sense of discomfort.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein the smaller the remaining number grasped by the grasping means, the easier it is for the limiting means to limit the increase notification.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature E6, when the remaining number is small, the configuration is such that the previous increase is positively compensated, and the difference in the number of notifications when the high advantage state ends is reduced. becomes possible.

Feature E8. A display corresponding to the remaining number in the high-advantage state, wherein the remaining number display reflecting the increment of the increase notification by the first increase notification executing means and the second increase notification executing means is displayed by a predetermined notification means. Executable remaining number display execution means (function for executing processing related to display remaining number counter HG by main controller 101);
When the number of remaining numbers displayed by the remaining number display execution means reaches a predetermined number (1), a difference that can be notified of the difference from the remaining number grasped by the grasping means. Notification execution means (function for executing subsequent notification processing by main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized by comprising:

The remaining number display by the remaining number display execution means is not only the increase notification of the amount actually increased by the first increase notification execution means, but also the increase by the second increase notification execution means performed without the increase processing. Since the increment of the notification is reflected, it is difficult to distinguish between the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means and the increase notification by the first increase notification executing means from the remaining number display. However, since the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means does not actually perform the increase processing, the display may differ from the remaining number ascertained by the actual grasping means. Therefore, in the above configuration, when the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, the difference can be notified, so that the high advantage state can be terminated after eliminating the difference. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling a sense of incompatibility such as ending the game even though the remaining number is displayed.

Feature E9. When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, a predetermined notification means for providing an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed in a game after the game in which the increase processing is performed. (Auxiliary display unit 65) has a third increase notification execution means (function for performing processing for executing post-addition notification effect by main control device 101),
The remaining number display execution means can also reflect the increase in the increase notification by the third increase notification execution means,
The gaming machine according to feature E8, wherein the difference notification executing means is capable of executing an increase notification by the third increase notification executing means as the notification regarding the difference from the remaining number grasped by the grasping means. .

According to the above configuration, when the remaining number display reaches the predetermined number, as the notification regarding the difference from the remaining number grasped by the grasping means, the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means is not compensated for. Not only that, the information of the unexecuted portion of the increase notification by the third increase notification executing means can also be performed. In other words, as the notification regarding the difference, not only the notification that the remaining number display is larger than the actual remaining number (for example, the notification that the remaining number display is subtracted), but also the remaining number display is smaller than the actual remaining number. A notification (for example, a notification to increase the remaining number display) can also be performed. Therefore, the notification of the difference can be not only a disappointing notification but also a happy notification for the player, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the notification of the difference.

Feature E10. When the difference notification execution means executes the notification regarding the difference with respect to the increase notification executed by the second increase notification execution means, the special privilege giving means capable of giving the player a special privilege ( A gaming machine according to feature E9, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing for setting a special effect command by the main control device 101).

It is not preferable for the player to make a notification for correction such that the actual number of balances decreases. A special privilege is given when notification is made that the remaining number of is low. Therefore, it is possible to follow the disappointment when it is subtracted.

Feature E11. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics E8 to E10, wherein the predetermined number is a number corresponding to an increase in the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means.

According to the above configuration, even if the increment of the increase notification is not completely compensated, it is possible to end the high advantage state after correcting the remaining number display by the notification regarding the difference. Moreover, by doing so, the player is prepared to be notified of the correction (notification of the difference) when the remaining number is displayed corresponding to the increased number of the previous increase notification. This makes it possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment rather than suddenly receiving notification for correction.

Feature E12. The difference notification execution means is
and the remaining number ascertained by the ascertaining means when the remaining number display displayed by the remaining number display executing means reaches a first predetermined number corresponding to the increment of the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means. and when the remaining number display displayed by the remaining number display execution means becomes a second predetermined number smaller than the first predetermined number, the grasping means grasps It is possible to execute notification about the difference from the remaining number of
When the second predetermined number is used to execute the notification regarding the difference in the increase notification executed by the second increase notification execution means, the special bonus granting means capable of giving the player a special bonus ( A gaming machine according to any one of features E8 to E11, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing for setting a special effect command by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, if the increment of the increase notification is not completely compensated, the notification for correction (notification regarding the difference) is made at the first predetermined number, and if even a little compensation is made, the second 2. Notification for the correction is made at a predetermined number. By doing so, it is possible to more preferably avoid the occurrence of an event in which the high advantage state ends while there is a difference in the display of the remaining number.

In addition, it is not preferable for the player to make a notification for correction that the actual remaining number becomes small whether the number is the first predetermined number or the second predetermined number. 2. A special privilege is given when a notification for correction is made in a predetermined number. Therefore, when the notification for correction is not made at the first predetermined number, the user wants to make the notification for correction at the second predetermined number, and the second increase notification executing means increases the notification. A new game property is created using the notification for correction caused by.

Feature E13. A restricted state (restricted bonus) is set in which the establishment of the specific condition is restricted,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, wherein the second increase notification executing means can execute the increase notification in the restricted state.

According to the above configuration, even in a restricted state in which the establishment of the specific condition is restricted, the increase notification can be executed to give an impression as if the specific condition can be established. By doing so, it is possible to improve the entertainment in such a restricted state.

Feature E14. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
A transition rate to the restricted state is different between when the first set value is set by the setting means and when a second set value different from the first set value is set. The gaming machine according to feature E13.

Since the transition rate differs depending on the set value in the restricted state, if it is clearly understood that the fulfillment of the specific condition is restricted, the set value may be accurately determined. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, since the increase notification is executed even if the establishment of the specific condition is restricted, it is difficult to recognize the restricted state, and it becomes difficult to determine the set value. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the operation rate of the game machine or other game machines due to early determination of the set value.

It should be noted that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group E to each configuration of feature group A to feature group E detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), further comprising: a throwing device for performing a throwing process of taking in a game ball from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

10... Slot machine as game machine 32... Reel as revolving body 41... Start lever as start operation means 42 to 44... Stop switch as stop operation means 64... Speaker constituting auxiliary effect section 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
means for shifting the game state to the special state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a situation where the right to shift the game state to the special state advantageous to the player has been acquired;
a setting means having a plurality of stages of set values capable of causing a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages;
A gaming machine comprising
A normal state and a specific state more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set,
means capable of terminating the specific state when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied;
a means capable of grasping the remaining number of the specific state;
means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied;
a first means capable of notifying the number of increases in the remaining number to be increased by the increasing process by means of a predetermined notifying means when the increasing process is performed ;
a second means capable of executing the increase number notification by a predetermined notification means in a game subsequent to the game in which the increase processing was performed ;
with
The gaming machine is configured such that, in the special state, the notification of the increased number of the second means is executed according to a predetermined mode without being affected by the setting value set by the setting means. .

Images